Home › MX480 Universal Routing Platform Hardware Guide

MX480 Universal Routing Platform Hardware Guide

File info: application/pdf · 552 pages · 4.88MB

MX480 Universal Routing Platform Hardware Guide - Juniper ...

Table 2: Switch Control Board Capacities for MX Series 5G Universal Routing ... Admin Link Proto Local. Remote ge-3/0/0 up up ge-3/0/1 up down ge-3/0/2.General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Electrical Codes for Junip…

Table 1 on page 3 lists the MX480 router capacity. ... Table 2 on page 4 compares the fabric bandwidth capacities of SCBs per MX-series ...

2. Site Planning, Preparation, and Specifications. MX480 Site Preparation Checklist | 189 MX480 Site Guidelines and Requirements | 190. MX480 Router Physical Specifications | 191

Full PDF Document

If the inline viewer fails, it will open the original document in compatibility mode automatically. You can also open the file directly.

Extracted Text

MX480 Universal Routing Platform Hardware Guide
Published
2021-10-25

ii
Juniper Networks, Inc. 1133 Innovation Way Sunnyvale, California 94089 USA 408-745-2000 www.juniper.net
Juniper Networks, the Juniper Networks logo, Juniper, and Junos are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. in the United States and other countries. All other trademarks, service marks, registered marks, or registered service marks are the property of their respective owners.
Juniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document. Juniper Networks reserves the right to change, modify, transfer, or otherwise revise this publication without notice.
MX480 Universal Routing Platform Hardware Guide Copyright � 2021 Juniper Networks, Inc. All rights reserved.
The information in this document is current as of the date on the title page.
YEAR 2000 NOTICE
Juniper Networks hardware and software products are Year 2000 compliant. Junos OS has no known time-related limitations through the year 2038. However, the NTP application is known to have some difficulty in the year 2036.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
The Juniper Networks product that is the subject of this technical documentation consists of (or is intended for use with) Juniper Networks software. Use of such software is subject to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement ("EULA") posted at https://support.juniper.net/support/eula/. By downloading, installing or using such software, you agree to the terms and conditions of that EULA.

iii
Table of Contents

About This Guide | xvi

Overview

MX480 Router Description | 2

MX480 Chassis | 5 MX480 Chassis Description | 6

MX480 Component Redundancy | 8

MX480 Router Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping | 9

MX480 Craft Interface Description | 13

Alarm Relay Contacts on the MX480 Craft Interface | 13

Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button on the MX480 Craft Interface | 14

MX480 Component LEDs on the Craft Interface | 15

MX480 Cable Management Brackets | 18

MX480 Cooling System | 20 MX480 Cooling System Description | 21

MX480 Fan LED | 23

MX480 Air Deflector Kits | 24

MX480 Power System Description | 27

MX480 AC Power System | 28 MX480 AC Power Supply Description | 28

MX480 AC Power Supply LEDs | 30

AC Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router | 31

AC Power Circuit Breaker Requirements for the MX480 Router | 33

AC Power Cord Specifications for the MX480 Router | 33

Outstanding Issues with the MX480 Router | 36

v
MX480 Interface Modules--FPCs and PICs | 112 MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) Description | 112 MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) LEDs | 115 FPCs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers | 116 MX480 PIC Description | 116 MX480 PIC Port and Interface Numbering | 117 MX480 PIC LEDs | 119 PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers | 120
MX480 Interface Modules--MPCs and MICs | 121 MIC/MPC Compatibility | 122 MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) Description | 134 MX480 MIC Port and Interface Numbering | 135 MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) LEDs | 139 MICs Supported by MX Series Routers | 139 MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) Description | 153 MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) LEDs | 157 MPCs Supported by MX Series Routers | 157 MX480 Application Services Modular Line Card Description | 164 MX480 Application Services Modular Storage Card Description | 167 MX480 Application Services Modular Processing Card Description | 168 MX480 AS MSC LEDs | 169 MX480 AS MXC LEDs | 170
Services Processing Card--MX-SPC3 Services Card | 171 MX-SPC3 Services Card Overview and Support on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers | 171 MX-SPC3 Services Card | 173
MX-Series Switch Control Board (SCB) Description | 180

Site Planning, Preparation, and Specifications

MX480 Site Preparation Checklist | 187

MX480 Site Guidelines and Requirements | 188 MX480 Router Physical Specifications | 189

MX480 Router Environmental Specifications | 191

MX480 Chassis Grounding Specifications | 192

MX480 Router Rack Requirements | 197

MX480 Router Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance | 199

MX480 Router Cabinet Size and Clearance Requirements | 200

MX480 Router Cabinet Airflow Requirements | 200

MX480 Power Planning | 201 Power Requirements for an MX480 Router | 201

Calculating Power Requirements for MX480 Routers | 213

MX480 Network Cable and Transceiver Planning | 218 Calculating Power Budget and Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cables | 218 How to Calculate Power Budget for Fiber-Optic Cable | 219 How to Calculate Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cable | 219

Understanding Fiber-Optic Cable Signal Loss, Attenuation, and Dispersion | 221

Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications for MX Series Routers | 222

MX480 Management, and Console Port Specifications and Pinouts | 223 RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for an MX Series Routing Engine ETHERNET Port | 223

RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for MX Series Routing Engine AUX and CONSOLE Ports | 224

Initial Installation and Configuration

Installing an MX480 Router Overview | 227

Unpacking the MX480 | 228 Tools and Parts Required to Unpack the MX480 Router | 228

Unpacking the MX480 Router | 228

vii
Verifying the MX480 Router Parts Received | 230
Installing the MX480 | 232 Installing the MX480 Router Mounting Hardware for a Rack or Cabinet | 233
Moving the Mounting Brackets for Center-Mounting the MX480 Router | 236
Tools Required to Install the MX480 Router with a Mechanical Lift | 237
Removing Components from the MX480 Router Before Installing It with a Lift | 237 Removing the Power Supplies Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 237 Removing the Fan Tray Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 238 Removing the SCBs Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 239 Removing the DPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 240 Removing the FPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 241
Installing the MX480 Router Using a Mechanical Lift | 243
Reinstalling Components in the MX480 Router After Installing It with a Lift | 245 Reinstalling the Power Supplies After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 245 Reinstalling the Fan Tray After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 246 Reinstalling the SCBs After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 247 Reinstalling the DPCs After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 248 Reinstalling the FPCs After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 249
Tools Required to Install the MX480 Router Without a Mechanical Lift | 250
Removing Components from the MX480 Router Before Installing It Without a Lift | 251 Removing the Power Supplies Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 251 Removing the Fan Tray Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 252 Removing the SCBs Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 253 Removing the DPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 254 Removing the FPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 255
Installing the MX480 Chassis in the Rack Manually | 256
Reinstalling Components in the MX480 Router After Installing It Without a Lift | 259 Reinstalling the Power Supplies After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 259 Reinstalling the Fan Tray After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 260 Reinstalling the SCBs After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 261 Reinstalling the DPCs After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 262

viii

Reinstalling the FPCs After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 263

Installing the MX480 Router Cable Management Bracket | 264

Connecting the MX480 to Power | 265 Tools and Parts Required for MX480 Router Grounding and Power Connections | 266

Grounding the MX480 Router | 266

Connecting Power to an AC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal-Capacity Power Supplies | 267

Powering On an AC-Powered MX480 Router | 269

Connecting Power to a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power Supplies | 270

Powering On a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power Supplies | 272

Powering Off the MX480 Router | 274

Connecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord | 274

Connecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable | 275

Connecting the MX480 to the Network | 277 Tools and Parts Required for MX480 Router Connections | 277

Connecting the MX480 Router to a Network for Out-of-Band Management | 278

Connecting the MX480 Router to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device | 278

Connecting the MX480 Router to an External Alarm-Reporting Device | 279

Connecting DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC Cables to the MX480 Router | 280

Connecting the Alarm Relay Wires to the MX480 Craft Interface | 283

Initially Configuring the MX480 Router | 283

Maintaining Components

Maintaining MX480 Components | 290

Routine Maintenance Procedures for the MX480 Router | 290

MX480 Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) | 291

Tools and Parts Required to Replace MX480 Hardware Components | 292

Replacing the MX480 Craft Interface | 295

ix
Disconnecting the Alarm Relay Wires from the MX480 Craft Interface | 295 Removing the MX480 Craft Interface | 295 Installing the MX480 Craft Interface | 296 Connecting the Alarm Relay Wires to the MX480 Craft Interface | 297 Replacing the MX480 Cable Management Brackets | 298 Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable on an MX Series Router | 299 Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable on an MX480 Router | 300 Maintaining MX480 Cooling System Components | 301 Maintaining the MX480 Air Filter | 301 Replacing the MX480 Air Filter | 302 Removing the MX480 Air Filter | 302 Installing the MX480 Air Filter | 303 Maintaining the MX480 Fan Tray | 304 Replacing the MX480 Fan Tray | 307 Removing the MX480 Fan Tray | 307 Installing the MX480 Fan Tray | 309 Maintaining MX480 Host Subsystem Components | 310 Maintaining the MX480 Host Subsystem | 310 Replacing an MX480 Routing Engine | 314 Removing an MX480 Routing Engine | 314 Installing an MX480 Routing Engine | 316 Replacing an SSD Drive on an RE-S-1800 | 318 Replacing an SSD Drive on an RE-S-X6-64G | 319 Replacing Connections to MX480 Routing Engine Interface Ports | 324 Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable on an MX Series Router | 325 Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable on an MX480 Router | 325 Upgrading to the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine in a Redundant Host Subsystem | 326 Removing the Routing Engine | 327 Installing the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G | 330 Verifying and Configuring the Upgraded Routing Engine as the Primary | 333

xii

Replacing an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable | 422 Disconnecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable | 423 Connecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable | 423

Maintaining MX480 SFP and XFP Transceivers | 425 Replacing an SFP or XFP Transceiver on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC | 425 Removing an SFP or XFP Transceiver from an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC | 425 Installing an SFP or XFP Transceiver into an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC | 427

Maintaining MX480 Switch Control Boards | 427 Replacing an MX480 Switch Control Board | 428 Removing an MX480 SCB-MX | 428 Installing an MX480 Switch Control Board | 429

Troubleshooting Hardware

Troubleshooting the MX480 | 451

Troubleshooting Resources for MX480 Routers | 451

Troubleshooting the MX480 Cooling System | 454

xiii

Troubleshooting the MX480 DPCs | 455

Troubleshooting the MX480 FPCs | 457

Troubleshooting the MX480 MICs | 461

Troubleshooting the MX480 MPCs | 462

Troubleshooting the MX480 PICs | 465

Troubleshooting the MX480 Power System | 466

Contacting Customer Support and Returning the Chassis or Components

Contacting Customer Support and Returning the Chassis or Components | 471

Displaying MX480 Router Components and Serial Numbers | 471

MX480 Chassis Serial Number Label | 475

MX480 Midplane Serial Number Label | 475

MX480 SCB Serial Number Label | 477

MX480 DPC Serial Number Label | 478

MX480 FPC Serial Number Label | 479

MX480 MIC Serial Number Label | 480

MX480 MPC Serial Number Label | 482

MX480 PIC Serial Number Label | 484

MX480 Fan Serial Number Label | 485

MX480 Power Supply Serial Number Label | 485

MX480 Routing Engine Serial Number Label | 487

Contact Customer Support to Obtain Return Material Authorization | 488

Guidelines for Packing Hardware Components for Shipment | 489

How to Return a Hardware Component to Juniper Networks, Inc. | 490

Packing the MX480 Router for Shipment | 490

Safety and Compliance Information

General Safety Guidelines and Warnings | 494

xv
MX480 Agency Approvals and Compliance Statements | 529 Agency Approvals for MX480 Routers | 529 Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements | 531 Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements | 532 Compliance Statements for NEBS | 532 Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for the MX480 Router | 533
Statements of Volatility for Juniper Network Devices | 533

xvi
About This Guide
Use this guide to install hardware and perform initial software configuration, routine maintenance, and troubleshooting for the MX480 5G Universal Routing Platform. After completing the installation and basic configuration procedures covered in this guide, refer to the Junos OS documentation for information about further software configuration.
RELATED DOCUMENTATION MX480 Quick Start

2
MX480 Router Description
IN THIS SECTION Benefits of the MX480 Router | 2 MX480 Hardware Overview | 3
The MX480 5G Universal Routing Platform is an Ethernet-optimized edge router that provides both switching and carrier-class Ethernet routing. The MX480 router enables a wide range of business and residential applications and services, including high-speed transport and VPN services, next-generation broadband multiplay services, high-speed Internet and data center internetworking.
Benefits of the MX480 Router
� System Capacity--MX480 provides 9 Tbps of system capacity for a wide range of cloud, campus, enterprise, data center, service provider, cable, and mobile service core applications.
� Always-on Infrastructure Base--MX Series routers ensure network and service availability with a broad set of multilayered physical, logical, and protocol-level resiliency aspects. Junos OS Virtual Chassis technology on MX Series routers supports chassis-level redundancy and enables you to manage two routers as a single element. Multichassis link aggregation group (MC-LAG) implementation supports stateful chassis, card, and port redundancy.
� Application-Aware Networking--On MX Series routers you can use deep packet inspection to detect applications, and by using the user-defined policies, you can determine traffic treatment for each application. This feature enables highly customized and differentiated services at scale.
� Programmable Chipset--The chipset implemented in the MX Series routers has a programmable forwarding data structure that allows fast microcode changes in the hardware itself, and a programmable lookup engine that allows inline service processing. the chip's programmable QoS engine supports coarse and fine-grained queuing to address the requirements of core, edge, and aggregation use cases.
� Junos Continuity and Unified In-Service Software Upgrade (Unified ISSU)--With the Junos continuity plug-in package, you can perform a smooth upgrade when new hardware is installed in your MX Series router.

3
Unified in-service software upgrade (unified ISSU) enables software upgrades and changes without disrupting network traffic.
� Junos Telemetry Interface--Using the Junos telemetry interface data, you can stream componentlevel data to monitor, analyze, and enhance the performance of the network. Analytics derived from this streaming telemetry can identify current and trending congestion, resource utilization, traffic volume, and buffer occupancy.
� Integrated Hardware-Based Timing--You do not need to use external clocks because MX Series routers support highly scalable and reliable hardware-based timing, including Synchronous Ethernet for frequency, and the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) for frequency and phase synchronization. Synchronous Ethernet and PTP can be combined in a hybrid mode to achieve a high level of frequency (10 ppb) and phase (<1.5 uS) accuracy.

MX480 Hardware Overview

The MX480 chassis provides redundancy and resiliency. The hardware system is fully redundant, including power supplies, Routing Engines, and Switch Control Boards (SCBs).
The MX480 router is eight rack units (U) tall. Five routers can be stacked in a single floor-to-ceiling rack, for increased port density per unit of floor space. The router provides eight slots that can be populated with up to six Dense Port Concentrators (DPCs) or Modular Port Concentrators (MPCs), three Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs), and two SCBs. Each FPC holds up to two PICs and each MPC holds up to two Modular Interface Cards (MICs).
Fully populated, the MX480 router provides an aggregate switch fabric capacity of up to 5.76 Tbps and line-rate throughput for up to 240 10-Gigabit Ethernet ports, or 24 100-Gigabit Ethernet, or 72 40Gigabit Ethernet ports.
Table 1 on page 3 lists the MX480 router capacity.
Table 1: MX480 Router Capacity

Description

Capacity

System capacity

5.76 Tbps half duplex

Switch fabric capacity per slot

480 Gbps

MPCs and DPCs per chassis

Table 1: MX480 Router Capacity (Continued)
Description Chassis per rack

Capacity 6

Each DPC includes either two or four Packet Forwarding Engines. Each Packet Forwarding Engine enables a throughput of 10 Gbps. Many types of DPCs are available. For a list of the DPCs supported, see the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
The MX480 supports up to 3 FPCs containing up to 6 PICs or up to 6 MPCs containing up to 12 MICs. For a list of the supported line cards, see the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
Four SCBs are available for the MX480 routers--SCB, SCBE, SCBE2, and SCBE3.
Table 2 on page 4 compares the fabric bandwidth capacities of SCBs per MX-series router.
Table 2: Switch Control Board Capacities for MX Series 5G Universal Routing Platforms (Full-Duplex)

Description

Fabric Bandwidth Per Slot

MX240 Fabric Bandwidth

MX480 Fabric Bandwidth

MX960 Fabric Bandwidth

Enhanced MX Switch Control Board (model SCBE3-MX)

Up to 1.5 Tbps (nonredundant fabric configuration with MPC10E line cards); 1 Tbps (redundant fabric configuration with MPC10E line cards)

Up to 6 Tbps

Up to 18 Tbps

Up to 33 Tbps

Enhanced MX Switch Control Board (SCBE2-MX)

Up to 480 Gbps (nonredundant fabric configuration); 340 Gbps (redundant fabric configuration)

Up to 1.92 Tbps

Up to 5.76 Tbps

Up to 10.56 Tbps

Enhanced MX Switch Control Board (SCBE-MX)

Up to 240 Gbps (nonredundant fabric configuration); 160 Gbps (redundant fabric configuration)

Up to 930 Gbps Up to 2.79 Tbps Up to 5.25 Tbps

Table 2: Switch Control Board Capacities for MX Series 5G Universal Routing Platforms (Full-Duplex) (Continued)

Description

Fabric Bandwidth Per Slot

MX240 Fabric Bandwidth

MX480 Fabric Bandwidth

MX960 Fabric Bandwidth

Switch Control Board (SCB-MX)

Up to 240 Gbps (nonredundant fabric configuration); 120 Gbps (redundant fabric configuration)

Up to 465 Gbps Up to 1.39 Tbps Up to 2.6 Tbps

The connections between DPCs, FPCs, MPCs, and SCBs are organized in three groups:
� Switch fabric--Connects the interface cards and provides for packet transport between DPCs, FPCs, and MPCs.
� Control plane--Gigabit Ethernet links between the combined SCBs/Routing Engines and each DPC, FPC, or MPC. All board-to-board information is passed over Ethernet except for low-level status and commands.
� Management signals--Provide for low-level status diagnostic support.

MX480 Chassis

6
MX480 Chassis Description
The router chassis is a rigid sheet metal structure that houses all the other router components (see Figure 1 on page 7, Figure 2 on page 7, and Figure 3 on page 8). The chassis measures 14.0 in. (35.6 cm) high, 17.45 in. (44.3 cm) wide, and 24.5 in. (62.2 cm) deep (from the front to the rear of the chassis). The chassis installs in standard 800-mm (or larger) enclosed cabinets, 19-in. equipment

7 racks, or telco open-frame racks. Up to five routers can be installed in one standard 48-U rack if the rack can handle their combined weight, which can be greater than 818 lb (371.0 kg). Figure 1: Front View of a Fully Configured Router Chassis
Figure 2: Rear View of a Fully Configured AC-Powered Router Chassis

8
Figure 3: Rear View of a Fully Configured DC-Powered Router Chassis
SEE ALSO MX480 Router Physical Specifications | 189
MX480 Component Redundancy
A fully configured router is designed so that no single point of failure can cause the entire system to fail. Only a fully configured router provides complete redundancy. All other configurations provide partial redundancy. The following major hardware components are redundant: � Host subsystem--The host subsystem consists of a Routing Engine functioning together with an SCB.
The router can have one or two host subsystems. If two host subsystems are installed, one functions as the primary and the other functions as the backup. If the primary host subsystem (or either of its components) fails, the backup can take over as the primary. To operate, each host subsystem requires a Routing Engine installed directly into in an SCB. If the Routing Engines are configured for graceful switchover, the backup Routing Engine automatically synchronizes its configuration and state with the primary Routing Engine. Any update to the primary Routing Engine state is replicated on the backup Routing Engine. If the backup Routing Engine assumes primary role, packet forwarding continues through the router without interruption. For more information about graceful switchover, see the Junos OS Administration Library for Routing Devices.

9
� Power supplies--In the low-line (110 V) AC power configuration, the router contains three or four AC power supplies, located horizontally at the rear of the chassis in slots PEM0 through PEM3 (left to right). Each AC power supply provides power to all components in the router. When three power supplies are present, they share power almost equally within a fully populated system. Four AC power supplies provide full power redundancy. If one power supply fails or is removed, the remaining power supplies instantly assume the entire electrical load without interruption. Three power supplies provide the maximum configuration with full power for as long as the router is operational.
In the high-line (220 V) AC power configuration, the router contains two or four AC power supplies located horizontally at the rear of the chassis in slots PEM0 through PEM3 (left to right). Each AC power supply provides power to all components in the router. When two or more power supplies are present, they share power almost equally within a fully populated system. Four AC power supplies provide full power redundancy. If one power supply fails or is removed, the remaining power supplies instantly assume the entire electrical load without interruption. Two power supplies provide the maximum configuration with full power for as long as the router is operational.
In the DC configuration, two power supplies are required to supply power to a fully configured router. One power supply supports approximately half of the components in the router, and the other power supply supports the remaining components. The addition of two power supplies provides full power redundancy. If one power supply fails or is removed, the remaining power supplies instantly assume the entire electrical load without interruption. Two power supplies provide the maximum configuration with full power for as long as the router is operational.
� Cooling system--The cooling system has redundant components, which are controlled by the host subsystem. If one of the fans fails, the host subsystem increases the speed of the remaining fans to provide sufficient cooling for the router indefinitely.

MX480 Router Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping

The MX480 router supports the components in Table 3 on page 9. Table 3: MX480 Router Hardware Components and CLI Terminology

Component

Hardware Model Number

CLI Name

Description

Chassis

CHAS-BP-MX480

MX480

"MX480 Router Physical Specifications" on page 189
"MX480 Chassis Description" on page 6

Table 3: MX480 Router Hardware Components and CLI Terminology (Continued)

Component

Hardware Model Number

CLI Name

Description

Craft Interface Panel CRAFT-MX480-S

Cooling System Fan tray

FFANTRAY-MX480

High-capacity fan tray

FFANTRAY-MX480-HC

Filter kit

FLTR-KIT-MX480

Front Panel Display

"MX480 Craft Interface Description" on page 13

Left Fan tray "MX480 Cooling System Description" on page 21
Enhanced Left Fan Tray
N/A

Host Subsystem

"MX480 Host Subsystem Description" on page 47

Routing Engine

See "Supported Routing Engines by Router" on page 76.

"MX480 Routing Engine Description" on page 50

Switch Control Board SCB-MX SCBE-MX SCBE2-MX SCBE3-MX
Interface Modules

MX SCB

SCB-MX Description

Enhanced MX SCBE

SCBE-MX Description

Enhanced MX SCB 2

SCBE2-MX Description

Enhanced MX SCB 3

SCBE3-MX Description

Table 3: MX480 Router Hardware Components and CLI Terminology (Continued)

Component

Hardware Model Number

CLI Name

Description

DPC

See "DPCs Supported on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers" on page 107 in the MX Series Interface Module Reference.

"MX480 Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) Description" on page 100

FPC

MX-FPC2

MX-FPC3

MX FPC Type 2 MX FPC Type 3

"MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) Description" on page 112

MIC

See "MICs Supported by MX Series Routers" "MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC)

on page 139 in the MX Series Interface

Description" on page 134

Module Reference.

MPC

See "MPCs Supported by MX Series Routers" on page 157 in the MX Series Interface Module Reference.

"MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) Description" on page 153

PIC

See "PICs Supported by MX240, MX480,

"MX480 PIC Description" on page 116

and MX960 Routers" on page 120 in the MX

Series Interface Module Reference.

Interface module

DPC-SCB-BLANK

blank panel

N/A

MIC-BLANK

Transceiver

See MX Series Interface

Module Reference

Xcvr

"Maintaining MX480 Switch Control Boards" on page 427

Power System

"MX480 Power System Description" on page 27

AC power supply

PWR-MX480-AC

AC Power Entry Module

"MX480 AC Power Supply Description" on page 28

Table 3: MX480 Router Hardware Components and CLI Terminology (Continued)

Component

Hardware Model Number

CLI Name

Description

PWR-MX480-1200-AC

PS 1.2-1.7kW 100-240V AC in

PWR-MX480-2520-AC (high-capacity)

PS 1.4-2.52kW; 90-264V AC in

DC power supply

PWR-MX480-DC

DC Power Entry Module

"MX480 DC Power Supply Description" on page 39

PWR-MX480-1600-DC

DC Power Entry Module

PWR-MX480-2400-DC

DC 2.4kW Power Entry Module

Power supply blank PWR-BLANK-MX480

N/A

panel

"MX480 Power System Description" on page 27

SEE ALSO
MX480 DPC Port and Interface Numbering | 103 MX480 MIC Port and Interface Numbering | 135 MX480 PIC Port and Interface Numbering | 117 MX Series Router Interface Names

13
MX480 Craft Interface Description
The craft interface allows you to view status and troubleshooting information at a glance and to perform many system control functions. It is hot-insertable and hot-removable. The craft interface is located on the front of the router above the card cage and contains LEDs for the router components, the alarm relay contacts, and alarm cutoff button. See Figure 4 on page 13. Figure 4: Front Panel of the Craft Interface
NOTE: At least one SCB must be installed in the router for the craft interface to obtain power.
Alarm Relay Contacts on the MX480 Craft Interface
The craft interface has two alarm relay contacts for connecting the router to external alarm devices (see Figure 5 on page 14). Whenever a system condition triggers either the red or yellow alarm on the craft

14
interface, the alarm relay contacts are also activated. The alarm relay contacts are located on the upper right of the craft interface.
Figure 5: Alarm Relay Contacts

Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button on the MX480 Craft Interface

Two large alarm LEDs are located at the upper right of the craft interface. The circular red LED lights to indicate a critical condition that can result in a system shutdown. The triangular yellow LED lights to indicate a less severe condition that requires monitoring or maintenance. Both LEDs can be lit simultaneously.
A condition that causes an LED to light also activates the corresponding alarm relay contact on the craft interface.
To deactivate red and yellow alarms, press the button labeled ACO/LT (for "alarm cutoff/lamp test"), which is located to the right of the alarm LEDs. Deactivating an alarm turns off both LEDs and deactivates the device attached to the corresponding alarm relay contact on the craft interface.
Table 4 on page 14 describes the alarm LEDs and alarm cutoff button in more detail.
Table 4: Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button

Shape

Color

State

Description

Red

On steadily Critical alarm LED--Indicates a critical condition that

can cause the router to stop functioning. Possible

causes include component removal, failure, or

overheating.

Table 4: Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button (Continued)

Shape

Color

State

Description

Yellow

On steadily

Warning alarm LED--Indicates a serious but nonfatal error condition, such as a maintenance alert or a significant increase in component temperature.

�

Alarm cutoff/lamp test button--Deactivates red and

yellow alarms. Causes all LEDs on the craft interface

to light (for testing) when pressed and held.

MX480 Component LEDs on the Craft Interface
IN THIS SECTION Host Subsystem LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface | 15 Power Supply LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface | 16 DPC and MPC LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface | 16 FPC LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface | 17 SCB LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface | 17 Fan LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface | 18
Host Subsystem LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface
Each host subsystem has three LEDs, located on the upper left of the craft interface, that indicate its status. The LEDs labeled RE0 show the status of the Routing Engine in slot 0 and the SCB in slot 0. The LEDs labeled RE1 show the status of the Routing Engine and SCB in slot 1. Table 5 on page 16 describes the functions of the host subsystem LEDs on the craft interface.

Table 5: Host Subsystem LEDs on the Craft Interface

Label

Color

State

Description

MASTER

Green

On steadily

Host is functioning as the primary.

ONLINE

Green

On steadily

Host is online and is functioning normally.

OFFLINE

Red

On steadily

Host is installed but the Routing Engine is offline.

�

Off

Host is not installed.

Power Supply LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface

Each power supply has two LEDs on the craft interface that indicate its status. The LEDs, labeled 0 through 3, are located on the upper left of the craft interface next to the PEM label. Table 6 on page 16 describes the functions of the power supply LEDs on the craft interface.
Table 6: Power Supply LEDs on the Craft Interface

Label

Color

State

Description

PEM

Green

On steadily

Power supply is functioning normally.

Red

On steadily

Power supply has failed or power input has failed.

DPC and MPC LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface
Each DPC or MPC has LEDs on the craft interface that indicate its status. The LEDs, labeled 0 through 5, are located along the bottom of the craft interface. Table 7 on page 17 describes the functions of the LEDs.

Table 7: DPC and MPC LEDs on the Craft Interface

Label

Color

State

Description

Green

On steadily

Card is functioning normally.

Blinking

Card is transitioning online or offline.

�

Off

The slot is not online.

FAIL

Red

On steadily

Card has failed.

FPC LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface

An FPC takes up two DPC slots when installed in an MX Series router. The LEDs, labeled 0 through 5, are located along the bottom of the craft interface. The LED corresponds to the lowest DPC slot number in which the FPC is installed. Table 8 on page 17 describes the functions of the FPC LEDs.
Table 8: FPC LEDs on the Craft Interface

Label

Color

State

Description

Green

On steadily

FPC is functioning normally.

Blinking

FPC is transitioning online or offline.

�

Off

The slot is not online.

FAIL

Red

On steadily

FPC has failed.

SCB LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface
Each SCB has two LEDs on the craft interface that indicates its status. The SCB LEDs, labeled 0 and 1, are located along the bottom of the craft interface. Table 9 on page 18 describes the functions of the SCB LEDs.

Table 9: SCB LEDs on the Craft Interface

Label

Color

State

Description

Green

On steadily

SCB: Fabric and control board functioning normally.

Blinking

SCB is transitioning online or offline.

�

Off

The slot is not online.

FAIL

Red

On steadily

SCB has failed.

Fan LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface

The fan LEDs are located on the top left of the craft interface. Table 10 on page 18 describes the functions of the fan LEDs.
Table 10: Fan LEDs on the Craft Interface

Label

Color

State

Description

FAN

Green

On steadily

Fan is functioning normally.

Red

On steadily

Fan has failed.

MX480 Cable Management Brackets
The cable management brackets (see Figure 6 on page 19 and Figure 7 on page 20) consist of plastic dividers located on the left and right sides of each DPC, FPC, or MPC slot, and SCB slot. The cable

19
management brackets allow you to route the cables outside the router and away from the DPCs, MPCs, MICs, PICs, and SCBs.
Figure 6: Cable Management Brackets

20 Figure 7: Cable Management Brackets Installed on the Router
SEE ALSO Maintaining Cables That Connect to MX480 DPCs, MPCs, MICs, or PICs | 404 Replacing the MX480 Cable Management Brackets | 298
MX480 Cooling System
IN THIS SECTION MX480 Cooling System Description | 21 MX480 Fan LED | 23

21
MX480 Cooling System Description
The cooling system consists of the following components: � Fan tray � Air filter The cooling system components work together to keep all router components within the acceptable temperature range (see Figure 8 on page 21, Figure 9 on page 22, and Figure 10 on page 23). The router has one fan tray and one air filter that install vertically in the rear of the router. The fan tray contains six fans. The MX Series high-capacity fan trays satisfy cooling requirements for high-density DPCs and MPCs, and must be upgraded for proper cooling. The air intake to cool the chassis is located on the side of the chassis next to the air filter. Air is pulled through the chassis toward the fan tray, where it is exhausted out the side of the system. The air intake to cool the power supplies is located in the front of the router above the craft interface. The exhaust for the power supplies is located on the rear bulkhead power supplies.
Figure 8: Airflow Through the Chassis
The host subsystem monitors the temperature of the router components. When the router is operating normally, the fans function at lower than full speed. If a fan fails or the ambient temperature rises above a threshold, the speed of the remaining fans is automatically adjusted to keep the temperature within the acceptable range. If the ambient maximum temperature specification is exceeded and the system

22
cannot be adequately cooled, the Routing Engine shuts down the system by disabling output power from each power supply.
Figure 9: Fan Tray

23 Figure 10: Air Filter
MX480 Fan LED
Each fan has an LED that displays its status. The fan LEDs are located on the top left of the craft interface. For more information, see "Fan LED on the MX480 Craft Interface" on page 15. SEE ALSO
Maintaining the MX480 Fan Tray | 304 Troubleshooting the MX480 Cooling System | 454

24
MX480 Air Deflector Kits

Optional air deflector kits are available that let you install the MX480 routers in a hot aisle/cold aisle ventilation environment. These kits convert the MX480 router from side-to-side ventilation into frontto-back ventilation. The air deflectors contain no additional fans, so they require no additional electrical power.
The air deflector kits consist of four main components: two intake/exhaust boxes and two side plenums. The two intake/exhaust boxes are identical to each other, as are the side plenums.
The intake/exhaust boxes are installed above and below the device to direct intake air from the air space in front of the device into the side plenum mounted on the intake side of the device. The intake air plenum directs air into the device, and the exhaust air plenum collects the exhaust air on the opposite side of the device. The exhaust plenum directs the exhausted air into the intake/exhaust boxes above and below the unit, where it is expelled into the air space behind the router.
The air deflector kit requires additional space around the device, increasing its overall height and width as described in Table 11 on page 24.
Table 11: MX480 Router and Air Deflector Dimensions

Specification

MX480 Router

Router height

8 U (14 in. or 35.6 cm)

Additional height required for air deflector kit

6 U (10.5 in. or 26.7 cm)

Total height of services gateway and air deflector kit

14 U (24.5 in. or 62.2 cm)

Router width

17.5 in. (44.5 cm)

Additional width required for air deflector kit

5.6 in. (14.2 cm) per side 11.2 in. (28.4 cm) total

Total width of router and air deflector kit

28.7 in. (72.9 cm)

25
See Figure 11 on page 25 and Table 12 on page 25 for the list of components that comprise the air deflector kit.
Figure 11: Components of the Air Deflector Kit

Table 12: Air Deflector Kit Components

Number

Component

Two side plenums (one for right and one for left)

2 and 4

Top plenum and bottom plenum

Rear mounting brackets

26 Figure 12 on page 26 shows the MX480 router installed in typical four-post mounting racks with the air deflector kit parts in place. Figure 12: MX480 Router Air Deflector Kit
RELATED DOCUMENTATION MX480 Chassis

27
MX480 Power System Description
The MX480 router uses either AC or DC power supplies. The MX480 router is configurable with two, three, or four AC power supplies or two or four DC power supplies. The power supplies connect to the midplane, which distributes the different output voltages produced by the power supplies to the router components, depending on their voltage requirements. Each power supply is cooled by its own internal cooling system.
CAUTION: The router cannot be powered from AC and DC power supplies simultaneously.
Redundant power supplies are hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in "MX480 FieldReplaceable Units (FRUs)" on page 291.
CAUTION: When you remove a power supply from a router that uses a nonredundant power supply configuration, the router might shut down depending on your configuration.
NOTE: Enhanced AC and DC power supplies are an upgrade for the MX480 router, and satisfy power requirements for higher-density DPCs. When upgrading to enhanced power supplies, always upgrade power supplies in adjacent slots.
NOTE: Routers configured with DC power supplies are shipped with a blank panel installed over the power distribution modules. Routers configured with AC power supplies have no blank panel.
RELATED DOCUMENTATION Connecting Power to an AC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal-Capacity Power Supplies | 267 Connecting Power to a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power Supplies | 270 Replacing an MX480 AC Power Supply | 412 MX480 Chassis Grounding Specifications | 192 MX480 Router Grounding Cable Lug Specifications

28
MX480 AC Power System
IN THIS SECTION MX480 AC Power Supply Description | 28 MX480 AC Power Supply LEDs | 30 AC Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router | 31 AC Power Circuit Breaker Requirements for the MX480 Router | 33 AC Power Cord Specifications for the MX480 Router | 33 Outstanding Issues with the MX480 Router | 36 Errata with the MX480 Router Documentation | 37
MX480 AC Power Supply Description
IN THIS SECTION AC Power Supply Configurations | 30
Each AC power supply weighs approximately 5.0 lb (2.3 kg) and consists of one AC appliance inlet, an AC input switch, a fan, and LEDs to monitor the status of the power supply. Figure 13 on page 29 shows the power supply. For existing power supplies, each inlet requires a dedicated AC power feed and a dedicated 15 A (250 VAC) circuit breaker. For high-capacity power supplies, each inlet requires a dedicated AC power feed and a dedicated 16.0 A @ 100 VAC or 16.0 A @ 200 VAC circuit breaker, or as required by local code.

29 The maximum inrush current for a high-capacity AC power supply is 49A at 264VAC. Figure 13: AC Power Supply
Figure 14: High-Capacity AC Power Supply
WARNING: The router is pluggable type A equipment installed in a restricted-access location. It has a separate protective earthing terminal (sized for UNC 1/4-20 ground lugs) provided on the chassis in addition to the grounding pin of the power supply cord. This separate protective earthing terminal must be permanently connected to earth.

30
NOTE: You can mix the MX480 high-capacity and normal-capacity power supplies only during the PEM upgrade process. We do not recommend using this configuration in any other cases.
AC Power Supply Configurations
The MX480 high-capacity and normal-capacity power supplies each support either of the following AC power configurations:
� In the low-line (110 V) AC power configuration, the MX480 router contains three or four AC power supplies (see Figure 13 on page 29), located horizontally at the rear of the chassis in slots PEM0 through PEM3 (left to right). Each AC power supply provides power to all components in the router. When three power supplies are present, they share power almost equally within a fully populated system. Four AC power supplies provide full power redundancy. If one power supply fails or is removed, the remaining power supplies assume the entire electrical load without interruption. Three power supplies provide the maximum configuration with full power for as long as the router is operational. The low-line configuration requires three power supplies and the fourth power supply provides redundancy. With high-capacity power supplies, you must have a minimum of three power supplies installed in the router.
� In the high-line (220 V) AC power configuration, the MX480 router contains two or four AC power supplies (see Figure 13 on page 29), located horizontally at the rear of the chassis in slots PEM0 through PEM3 (left to right). In a high-line AC power configuration, each AC power supply provides power to all components in the router. When two or more power supplies are present, they share power almost equally within a fully populated system. Four AC power supplies provide full power redundancy. If one power supply fails or is removed, the remaining power supplies assume the entire electrical load without interruption. Two power supplies provide the maximum configuration with full power for as long as the router is operational. In the two-PEM high-line configuration, slots PEM0 and PEM1 or PEM2 and PEM3 are used. The high-line configuration requires two power supplies, with the third and fourth providing redundancy. With high-capacity power supplies, you must have a minimum of two power supplies installed in the router.
MX480 AC Power Supply LEDs
Each AC power supply faceplate contains three LEDs that indicate the status of the power supply (see Table 13 on page 31). The power supply status is also reflected in two LEDs on the craft interface. In addition, a power supply failure triggers the red alarm LED on the craft interface.

Table 13: AC Power Supply LEDs

Label

Color

State

Description

AC OK

Yellow

Off

AC power input voltage is below 78 VAC.

Green

AC power input voltage is within 78�264 VAC.

DC OK

Green

Off

DC power outputs generated by the power supply are not within the normal operating ranges.

DC power outputs generated by the power supply are within the normal

operating ranges.

PS FAIL

Red

Off

Power supply is functioning normally.

Power supply is not functioning normally and its output voltage is out of

regulation limits. Check AC OK and DC OK LEDs for more information.

AC Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router

Table 14 on page 31 lists the AC power supply electrical specifications; Table 15 on page 32 lists the AC power system specifications.
Table 14: AC Power Supply Electrical Specifications

Item

Specification

Normal-Capacity Power Supplies

Maximum output power

1027 W (low line) 1590 W (high line)

AC input voltage

Operating range: 100 � 240 VAC (nominal)

Table 14: AC Power Supply Electrical Specifications (Continued)

Item

Specification

AC input line frequency

50 to 60 Hz (nominal)

AC input current rating

11.0 A @ 200 VAC or 14.5 A @ 110 VAC maximum

Efficiency
NOTE: This value is at full load and nominal voltage.

85% (low line and high line)

High-Capacity Power Supplies

Maximum output power

1167 W (low line) 2050 W (high line)

AC input voltage

Operating range: 100 � 240 VAC (nominal)

AC input line frequency

50 to 60 Hz (nominal)

AC input current rating

16 A @ 110 VAC maximum 15.1 A @ 200 VAC maximum

Efficiency
NOTE: This value is at full load and nominal voltage.

84% (low line) 89% (high line)

Table 15: AC Power System Specifications

Item

Normal Capacity� Normal-Capacity� High-Capacity�Low High-Capacity�

Low Line

High Line

Line

High Line

Redundancy

3+1

2+2

3+1

2+2

Table 15: AC Power System Specifications (Continued)

Item

Normal Capacity� Normal-Capacity� High-Capacity�Low High-Capacity�

Low Line

High Line

Line

High Line

Output power (maximum) per power supply

1027 W

3200 W

1167 W

2050 W

Output power (maximum) per system

3081 W

3200 W

3501 W

4100 W

SEE ALSO Calculating Power Requirements for MX480 Routers | 213
AC Power Circuit Breaker Requirements for the MX480 Router
Each AC power supply has a single AC appliance inlet located on the power supply that requires a dedicated AC power feed. We recommend that you use a customer site circuit breaker rated for 15 A (250 VAC) minimum for each AC power supply, or as required by local code. Doing so enables you to operate the router in any configuration without upgrading the power infrastructure.
AC Power Cord Specifications for the MX480 Router
Each AC power supply has a single AC appliance inlet located on the power supply that requires a dedicated AC power feed. Most sites distribute power through a main conduit that leads to framemounted power distribution panels, one of which can be located at the top of the rack that houses the router. An AC power cord connects each power supply to the power distribution panel. You can order detachable AC power cords, each approximately 8 ft (2.5 m) long that supply AC power to the router. The C19 appliance coupler end of the cord inserts into the AC appliance inlet coupler, type C20 (right angle) as described by International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standard 60320. The plug end of the power cord fits into the power source receptacle that is standard for your geographical location.

Table 16 on page 34 provides specifications and Figure 15 on page 35 depicts the plug on the AC power cord provided for each country or region.
Table 16: AC Power Cord Specifications

Country

Model Number

Electrical Specification

Plug Type

Australia

CBL-M-PWR-RA-AU

240 VAC, 50 Hz AC SAA/3/15

China

CBL-M-PWR-RA-CH

220 VAC, 50 Hz AC CH2-16P

Europe (except Denmark, Italy, Switzerland, and United Kingdom)

CBL-M-PWR-RA-EU

220 or 230 VAC, 50 Hz AC

CEE 7/7

Italy

CBL-M-PWR-RA-IT

230 VAC, 50 Hz AC CEI 23-16/VII

Japan

CBL-PWR-RA-JP15

125 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz AC

JIS 8303

CBL-M-PWR-RA-JP

220 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz AC

NEMA L6-20P

North America

CBL-PWR-RA-US15

125 VAC, 60 Hz AC NEMA 5-15P

CBL-PWR-RA-TWLK-US15 125 VAC, 60 Hz AC NEMA L5-15P

CBL-M-PWR-RA-US

250 VAC, 60 Hz AC NEMA 6-20

CBL-M-PWR-RA-TWLK-US 250 VAC, 60 Hz AC NEMA L6-20P

Table 16: AC Power Cord Specifications (Continued)

Country

Model Number

United Kingdom

CBL-M-PWR-RA-UK

Electrical Specification

Plug Type

240 VAC, 50 Hz AC BS89/13

Figure 15: AC Plug Types

WARNING: The AC power cord for the router is intended for use with the router only and not for any other use. WARNING:
Translation from Japanese: The attached power cable is only for this product. Do not use the cable for another product.

36
NOTE: In North America, AC power cords must not exceed 4.5 m (approximately 14.75 ft) in length, to comply with National Electrical Code (NEC) Sections 400-8 (NFPA 75, 5-2.2) and 210-52, and Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) Section 4-010(3). You can order AC power cords that are in compliance.
WARNING: The router is pluggable type A equipment installed in a restricted-access location. It has a separate protective earthing terminal (sized for UNC 1/4-20 ground lugs) provided on the chassis in addition to the grounding pin of the power supply cord. This separate protective earthing terminal must be permanently connected to earth.
CAUTION: Power cords and cables must not block access to device components or drape where people could trip on them.
SEE ALSO Connecting Power to an AC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal-Capacity Power Supplies | 267 Replacing an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord | 415 Calculating Power Requirements for MX480 Routers | 213
Outstanding Issues with the MX480 Router
This topic lists outstanding hardware issues with the MX480 router. For information about software issues, see the Junos OS Release Notes. � In Junos OS Release 10.0R2, if a third AC supply is inserted in an empty slot (even though the power
supply is turned off and the AC cord is not plugged in), the operational power supplies' output voltage reading in the Junos OS can show an inaccurate number (60-61V instead of 57V) under some conditions, such as when the load is nearly 100% and the operating temperature exceeds 40C. � There is an input mode switch on each MX480 DC high capacity power supply, covered by a small plate. The input mode switch tells the system what capacity feed is connected (60A or 70A), which in turn is used for power inventory management When the input mode switch is set to '0' (zero): expect 60A feeds, with a voltage range of -39V to -72VDC. When the input mode switch is set to '1' (one), expect 70A feeds or 60A feed with minimum voltage range 42V and up. The default setting is 1

37
In Junos OS Releases 10.0R3, 10.1R2, and 10.2R1, the MX480 DC high capacity power supply input mode switch is not operating as expected, though this has no effect on the power supply operations, it will generate alarms incorrectly. [PR532230]
NOTE: � All supplies should have the same feed setting. � Correct usage of the feed setting is required for all supplies in order to get the desired
power inventory management.
� Juniper Networks strongly recommends that you install Junos OS Release 8.4R2 or later before deploying the MX480 router into service.
� The XFP cages and optics on the MX480 router are industry standard parts that have limited tactile feedback for insertion of optics and fiber. You need to insert the optics and fiber firmly until the latch is securely in place. [PR/98055]
� Do not mix AC and DC power supplies on an MX480 router. Mixing of AC supplies and DC supplies may damage your chassis. [PR/233340]
Errata with the MX480 Router Documentation
This topic lists outstanding documentation issues: � The shut-down voltage and start-up voltages as stated in the following note in the MX480 hardware
guides and MX480 Quick Start are not correct under all circumstances: [PR/273771]
NOTE: If the input voltage from the DC power source drops below �36.5 to �38.5 VDC, the router automatically shuts down. During automatic shutdown, the circuit remains active. When the input voltage returns to �40.0 to �41.0 VDC, the router automatically starts up again and the system returns to normal operation within 30 minutes. No operator intervention is required.
� For the cooling system to function properly, the airflow around the chassis must be unrestricted. Allow at least 8 in. (20.3 cm) of clearance between side-cooled routers. Allow 5.5 in. (14 cm) between the side of the chassis and any non-heat-producing surface such as a wall. [PR/258887]

� When installing the router without a mechanical lift, remove and reinstall components from the chassis, first from the rear and then from the front. Components should be removed and reinstalled in the following order: power supplies, fan tray, SCBs, and DPCs.[PR/265034]
� Replace the air filter, located at the left rear of the router, every 6 months for optimum cooling system performance.
� Two threaded inserts (PEM nuts) are provided on the upper rear of the chassis for connecting the router to earth ground. The grounding points fit UNC 1/4�20 screws (American).
� The mounting shelf should be installed on the back of the rail as described in the MX480 Universal Routing Platform Hardware Guide.
� After installing a DC power cable or AC power cord, route the power cable or power cord along the cable restraint towards the left or right corner of the chassis. If needed, thread plastic cable ties, which you must provide, through the openings on the cable restraint to hold the power cord or cables in place.
� Table 17 on page 38 describes the functions of the host subsystem OFFLINE LED.
Table 17: Host Subsystem OFFLINE LED

Label

Color

State

Description

OFFLINE

Red

On steadily Host is installed but the Routing Engine is offline.

Off

Host is not installed.

MX480 DC Power System
IN THIS SECTION MX480 DC Power Supply Description | 39 MX480 DC Power Supply LEDs | 41 DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router | 42 DC Power Circuit Breaker Requirements for the MX480 Router | 44

39
DC Power Source Cabling for the MX480 Router | 45 DC Power Cable Specifications for the MX480 Router | 46
MX480 DC Power Supply Description
IN THIS SECTION DC Power Supply Configurations | 40
Each DC power supply weighs approximately 3.8 lb (1.7 kg) and consists of one DC input (�48 VDC and return), one 40 A (�48 VDC) circuit breaker, a fan, and LEDs to monitor the status of the power supply. Figure 16 on page 40 shows the power supply. Each DC power supply has a single DC input (�48 VDC and return) that requires a dedicated circuit breaker.

40 For high capacity power supplies, we recommend that you provision 60 A or 70 A per feed, depending on the selected DIP switch setting. Figure 16: DC Power Supply
Figure 17: High-Capacity DC Power Supply
NOTE: You can mix the MX480 high-capacity and normal-capacity power supplies only during the PEM upgrade process. We do not recommend using this configuration in any other cases.
DC Power Supply Configurations
In the DC power configuration, the MX480 router contains either two or four DC power supplies (see Figure 16 on page 40) located at the rear of the chassis in slots PEM0 through PEM3 (left to right). You can upgrade your DC power system from two to four power supplies. Four power supplies provide full redundancy. If a DC power supply in a redundant configuration is removed or fails, its redundant power supply takes over without interruption. The DC power supply in

PEM2 serves as redundant to the DC power supply in slot PEM0, and the DC power supply in PEM3 serves as redundant to the DC power supply in slot PEM1. If only two DC power supplies are installed, they must be installed in slots PEM0 and PEM1 or in slots PEM2 and PEM3.

Table 18 on page 41 shows the components that are powered by each DC power supply slot. It applies to existing and high-capacity power supplies.
Table 18: Power Supply Redundancy and Power Distribution

DC Power Supply Slot

Power Supply Provides Power to the Following Components

PEM0

Fan tray, DPC slots 0 and 1, and SCB slots 0 and 1

PEM1

Fan tray and DPC slots 2 through 5

PEM2

Fan tray, DPC slots 0 and 1, and SCB slots 0 and 1

PEM3

Fan tray and DPC slots 2 through 5

MX480 DC Power Supply LEDs
Each DC power supply faceplate contains three LEDs that indicate the status of the power supply (see Table 19 on page 41). The power supply status is also reflected in two LEDs on the craft interface.In addition, a power supply failure triggers the red alarm LED on the craft interface.

NOTE: An SCB must be present for the PWR OK LED to go on.

Table 19: DC Power Supply LEDs

Label

Color

State

Description

PWR OK Green

Off

Power supply is not functioning normally. Check the INPUT OK LED for more information.

Table 19: DC Power Supply LEDs (Continued)

Label

Color

State

Description

Power supply is functioning normally.

Yellow

The main output voltage is out of range (lower limit: 37.5 V to 39.5 V; upper limit: 72.5 V to 76 V).

BRKR ON Green

Off

DC power supply circuit breaker is turned off.

DC power input is present and the DC power supply circuit breaker is

turned on.

INPUT OK Green

Off

DC input to the PEM is not present.

DC input is present and is connected in correct polarity.

Yellow

DC input is present, but not in valid operating range or connected in reverse polarity.

DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router

Table 20 on page 42 lists the DC power supply electrical specifications. Table 21 on page 44 lists the DC power system specifications.
Table 20: Power Supply Electrical Specifications

Item

Specification

Normal-Capacity Power Supplies

Maximum output power

1600 W

DC input current rating

33.3 A @ �48 V nominal operating voltage

Table 20: Power Supply Electrical Specifications (Continued)

Item

Specification

Maximum Input Current

40 A

DC input voltage

Operating Range: �40.5 VDC to �72 VDC Nominal: �48 VDC

Efficiency
NOTE: This value is at full load and nominal voltage.

~98%

Internal Circuit Breaker

40 A

High-Capacity Power Supplies

Maximum Input Current

60 A (DIP=0)

70 A (DIP=1)

Maximum output power

2240 W

2440 W

DC input current rating

50 A @ -48 VDC normal operating voltage

54.2 A @ -48 VDC normal operating voltage

DC input voltage

Operating Range: �40.5 VDC to �72 VDC Nominal: �48 VDC

Efficiency
NOTE: This value is at full load and nominal voltage.

~98%

Table 21: Power System Specifications

Item

Normal-Capacity

Redundancy

2+2

Output power (maximum) per supply

1600 W

Output power (maximum) per system

3200 W

High-Capacity 2+2 60 A (DIP=0) 2240 W

70 A (DIP=1) 2440 W

4480 W

4880 W

SEE ALSO Calculating Power Requirements for MX480 Routers | 213
DC Power Circuit Breaker Requirements for the MX480 Router
Each DC power supply has a single DC input (�48 VDC and return) that requires a dedicated circuit breaker. If you plan to operate a maximally configured DC-powered router with normal-capacity power supplies, we recommend that you use a dedicated customer site circuit breaker rated for 40 A (� 48 VDC) minimum, or as required by local code. If you plan to operate a maximally configured DCpowered router with high-capacity power supplies, we recommend that you use a circuit breaker rated for 70 A (�48 VDC), or as required by local code.
If you plan to operate a DC-powered router at less than the maximum configuration, we recommend that you provision a circuit breaker according to respective National Electrical Code and customer site internal standards to maintain proper level of protection for the current specified above or each DC power supply rated for at least 125% of the continuous current that the system draws at �48 VDC.

45
DC Power Source Cabling for the MX480 Router
Figure 18 on page 45 shows a typical DC source cabling arrangement.
Figure 18: Typical DC Source Cabling to the Router
The DC power supplies in PEM0 and PEM1 must be powered by dedicated power feeds derived from feed A, and the DC power supplies in PEM2 and PEM3 must be powered by dedicated power feeds derived from feed B. This configuration provides the commonly deployed A/B feed redundancy for the system.
CAUTION: You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity. The power source cables might be labeled (+) and (�) to indicate their polarity. There is no standard color coding for DC power cables. The color coding used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on each power supply.
WARNING: For field-wiring connections, use copper conductors only.
CAUTION: Power cords and cables must not block access to device components or drape where people could trip on them.
SEE ALSO In Case of an Electrical Accident Connecting Power to a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power Supplies | 270 Replacing an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable | 422

46
DC Power Cable Specifications for the MX480 Router
DC Power Cable Lug Specifications--The accessory box shipped with the router includes the cable lugs that attach to the terminal studs of each power supply (see Figure 19 on page 46).
Figure 19: DC Power Cable Lug

CAUTION: Before router installation begins, a licensed electrician must attach a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply. A cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the router.

NOTE: The same cable lug is used for the grounding cable.

DC Power Cable Specifications--Table 22 on page 46 summarizes the specifications for the power cables, which you must supply.
Table 22: DC Power Cable Specifications

Cable Type

Quantity and Specification

Power

Eight 6-AWG (13.3 mm2), minimum 60�C wire, or as required by the local code

47
MX480 Host Subsystem
IN THIS SECTION MX480 Host Subsystem Description | 47 MX480 Host Subsystem LEDs | 48 MX480 Midplane Description | 48 MX480 Routing Engine Description | 50 MX480 Routing Engine LEDs | 53 RE-S-1800 Routing Engine Description | 56 RE-S-1800 Routing Engine LEDs | 59 RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Description | 60 RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine LEDs | 62 RE-S-X6-128G Routing Engine Description | 63 Routing Engine Specifications | 67 Supported Routing Engines by Router | 76
MX480 Host Subsystem Description
The host subsystem provides the routing and system management functions of the router. You can install one or two host subsystems on the router. Each host subsystem functions as a unit; the Routing Engine must be installed directly into the Switch Control Board.
NOTE: We recommend that you install two host subsystems for redundant protection. If you install only one host subsystem, we recommend that you install it in slot 0.
Each host subsystem has three LEDs that display its status. The host subsystem LEDs are located in the middle of the craft interface.

48
SEE ALSO Maintaining the MX480 Host Subsystem | 310 Taking an MX480 Host Subsystem Offline
MX480 Host Subsystem LEDs
Each host subsystem has three LEDs that display its status. The host subsystem LEDs are located on the upper left of the craft interface. For more information, see "Host Subsystem LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface" on page 15.
MX480 Midplane Description
The midplane is located toward the rear of the chassis and forms the rear of the card cage (see Figure 20 on page 49). The line cards and SCBs install into the midplane from the front of the chassis, and the power supplies install into the midplane from the rear of the chassis. The cooling system components also connect to the midplane. The midplane performs the following major functions: � Data path--Data packets are transferred across the midplane between the line cards through the
fabric ASICs on the SCBs. � Power distribution--The router power supplies connect to the midplane, which distributes power to
all the router components.

49 � Signal path--The midplane provides the signal path to the line cards, SCBs, Routing Engines, and
other system components for monitoring and control of the system. Figure 20: Midplane
SEE ALSO MX480 Router Description | 2 MX480 Chassis Description | 6 MX480 Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) Description | 100 MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) Description | 153 MX-Series Switch Control Board (SCB) Description | 180 MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) Description | 112 MX480 Power System Description | 27

50
MX480 Routing Engine Description
IN THIS SECTION Routing Engine Components | 52 Routing Engine Interface Ports | 52 Routing Engine Boot Sequence | 52
The Routing Engine is an Intel-based PC platform that runs Junos OS. Software processes that run on the Routing Engine maintain the routing tables, manage the routing protocols used on the router, control the router interfaces, control some chassis components, and provide the interface for system management and user access to the router. You can install one or two Routing Engines in the router. The Routing Engines install into the front of the chassis in horizontal slots in the SCBs labeled 0 and 1. If two Routing Engines are installed, one functions as the primary and the other acts as the backup. If the primary Routing Engine fails or is removed, and the backup is configured appropriately, the backup takes over as the primary. The Routing Engines are hot-pluggable. Each Routing Engine must be installed directly into an SCB. A USB port on the Routing Engine accepts a USB memory card that allows you to load Junos OS. Figure

51
21 on page 51 shows RE-S-1800 Routing Engine and Figure 22 on page 51 shows the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine.
Figure 21: RE-S-1800 Routing Engine

Figure 22: RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Front View

1-- Extractor clips 2-- Auxiliary port (AUX) 3-- Console port (Con) 4-- Management port (MGMT) 5-- LEDs--ONLINE, OK/FAIL, and MASTER

6-- ONLINE/OFFLINE Button 7-- SSD LEDs--DISK1 and DISK2 8-- Ports--USB1 and USB2 9-- RESET Button 10-- SSD card slot cover

Figure 23: RE-S-X6-64G-LT Routing Engine Front View

1-- Extractor clips 2-- Auxiliary port (AUX) 3-- Console port (Con) 4-- Management port (MGMT) 5-- LEDs--ONLINE, OK/FAIL, and MASTER
Routing Engine Components

6-- ONLINE/OFFLINE Button 7-- SSD LEDs--DISK1 and DISK2 8-- Ports--USB1 and USB2 9-- RESET Button 10-- SSD card slot cover

NOTE: For specific information about Routing Engine components (for example, the amount of DRAM), issue the show vmhost hardware command.

Routing Engine Interface Ports
Three ports, located on the right side of the Routing Engine, connect the Routing Engine to one or more external devices on which system administrators can issue Junos OS command-line interface (CLI) commands to manage the router.
The ports with the indicated labels function as follows:
� AUX--Connects the Routing Engine to a laptop, modem, or other auxiliary device through a serial cable with an RJ-45 connector.
� CONSOLE--Connects the Routing Engine to a system console through a serial cable with an RJ-45 connector.
� ETHERNET or MGMT--Connects the Routing Engine through an Ethernet connection to a management LAN (or any other device that plugs into an Ethernet connection) for out-of-band management. The port uses an autosensing RJ-45 connector to support 10-Mbps or 100-Mbps connections. Two small LEDs on the right of the port indicate the connection in use: The LED on the left indicates speed--green for 1000-Mbps, yellow for 100-Mbps and when the LED is dark, it indicates 10-Mbps speed. The LED on the right indicates activity--flashing green when packets are passing through the port.
Routing Engine Boot Sequence
The Routing Engine boots from the storage media in this order: the USB device (if present), then the CompactFlash card, then the hard disk, then the LAN. The disk from which the router boots is called the primary boot device, and the other disk is the alternate boot device.

53
NOTE: If the router boots from an alternate boot device, a yellow alarm lights the LED on the router's craft interface.
Booting in a RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine follows this sequence--the USB device, SSD1, SSD2, and LAN. SSD1 is the primary boot device. Boot sequence is tried twice for SSD1 and SSD2. If the Routing Engines are configured for graceful switchover, the backup Routing Engine automatically synchronizes its configuration and state with the primary Routing Engine. Any update to the primary Routing Engine state is replicated on the backup Routing Engine. If the backup Routing Engine assumes primary role, packet forwarding continues through the router without interruption. For more information about graceful switchover, see the Junos OS Administration Library for Routing Devices.
NOTE: If two Routing Engines are installed, they must both be the same hardware model.
SEE ALSO MX480 Router Description | 2 MX480 Routing Engine LEDs | 53 MX480 Host Subsystem Description | 47 MX-Series Switch Control Board (SCB) Description
MX480 Routing Engine LEDs
IN THIS SECTION Routing Engine LEDs (RE-S-X6-64G) | 55

54
Each Routing Engine has four LEDs that indicate its status. The LEDs, labeled MASTER, HDD, ONLINE, and FAIL, are located directly on the faceplate of the Routing Engine. Table 23 on page 54 and Table 24 on page 55 describe the functions of the Routing Engine LEDs.
Figure 24: RE-S-1800 Routing Engine

Table 23: RE-S-1800 Routing Engine LEDs

Label

Color

State

Description

MASTER

Blue

On steadily

Routing Engine is the primary.

HDD

Green

Blinking

Indicates activity on the hard disk drive.

ONLINE

Green

Blinking

Routing Engine is transitioning online.

On steadily

Routing Engine is functioning normally.

FAIL

Red

On steadily

Routing Engine has failed.

55
Routing Engine LEDs (RE-S-X6-64G)
Figure 25: RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine LEDs

1-- ONLINE LED 2-- OK/FAIL LED 3-- DISK1 LED Table 24: Routing Engine LEDs (RE-S-X6-64G)

4-- DISK2 LED 5-- ONLINE/OFFLINE Button 6-- MASTER LED

Label

Color State

Description

ONLINE Green Blinking slowly Routing Engine is in the process of booting BIOS, and the host OS.

Blinking rapidly Routing Engine is in the process of booting Junos OS.

Off

Routing Engine is not online or not functioning normally

DISK1

Green Blinking

Indicates presence of the disk activity.

Off

DISK2

Green Blinking

There is no disk activity. Indicates presence of the disk activity.

Off

There is no disk activity.

Table 24: Routing Engine LEDs (RE-S-X6-64G) (Continued)

Label

Color State

Description

OK/FAIL Green On steadily

Routing Engine is powering up.

Yellow On steadily

Routing Engine is not powering up indicating failure.

MASTER Blue On steadily

This Routing Engine is the Primary Routing Engine.

SEE ALSO Replacing an MX480 Routing Engine | 314
RE-S-1800 Routing Engine Description
IN THIS SECTION RE-S-1800 Routing Engine Components | 57 RE-S-1800 Routing Engine LEDs | 58 RE-S-1800 Routing Engine Boot Sequence | 58

57
Figure 26 on page 57 shows RE-S-1800 routing engine.
Figure 26: RE-S-1800 Front View
RE-S-1800 Routing Engine Components
Each Routing Engine consists of the following components: � CPU--Runs Junos OS to maintain the router's routing tables and routing protocols.. � DRAM--Provides storage for the routing and forwarding tables and for other Routing Engine
processes. � USB port--Provides a removable media interface through which you can install Junos OS manually.
Junos OS supports USB version 1.0. � CompactFlash card--Provides primary storage for software images, configuration files, and
microcode. The CompactFlash card is fixed and is inaccessible from outside the router. � Solid-state Drive (SSD)--Provides secondary storage for log files, memory dumps, and rebooting the
system if the CompactFlash card fails. � Interface ports--The AUX, CONSOLE, and ETHERNET provide access to management devices. Each
Routing Engine has one 10/100/1000-Mbps Ethernet port for connecting to a management network, and two asynchronous serial ports--one for connecting to a console and one for connecting to a modem or other auxiliary device. � EEPROM--Stores the serial number of the Routing Engine. � RESET button--Reboots the Routing Engine when pressed.

58
� ONLINE/OFFLINE button--Takes the Routing Engine online or offline when pressed. � Extractor clips--Used for inserting and extracting the Routing Engine. � Captive screws--Secure the Routing Engine in place.
NOTE: For specific information about Routing Engine components (for example, the amount of DRAM), issue the show chassis routing-engine command.

RE-S-1800 Routing Engine LEDs

Each Routing Engine has four LEDs that indicate its status. The LEDs, labeled MASTER, STORAGE, ONLINE, and OK/FAIL, are located directly on the faceplate of the Routing Engine. Table 25 on page 58 describes the functions of the Routing Engine LEDs.
Table 25: Routing Engine LEDs

Label

Color

State

Description

MASTER

Blue

On steadily

Routing Engine is the Primary.

STORAGE

Green

Blinking

Indicates activity on the SSD or Compact Flash.

ONLINE

Green

Blinking

Routing Engine is transitioning online.

On steadily

Routing Engine is functioning normally.

OK/FAIL

Red

On steadily

Routing Engine has failed.

RE-S-1800 Routing Engine Boot Sequence
The router is shipped with Junos OS preinstalled on the Routing Engine. There are three copies of software: � One copy on the CompactFlash card in the Routing Engine. � One copy on the hard disk in the Routing Engine. � One copy on a USB flash drive that can be inserted into the slot on the Routing Engine faceplate.

59
The Routing Engine boots from the storage media in this order: the USB device (if present), then the CompactFlash card, then the Solid State Disk (SSD), then the LAN. Normally, the router boots from the copy of the software on the CompactFlash card.
SEE ALSO RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for MX Series Routing Engine AUX and CONSOLE Ports RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for an MX Series Routing Engine ETHERNET Port Replacing an MX960 Routing Engine Supported Routing Engines by Router

RE-S-1800 Routing Engine LEDs

Each Routing Engine has four LEDs that indicate its status. The LEDs, labeled MASTER, STORAGE, ONLINE, and OK/FAIL, are located directly on the faceplate of the Routing Engine. Table 26 on page 59 describes the functions of the Routing Engine LEDs.
Table 26: Routing Engine LEDs

Label

Color

State

Description

MASTER

Blue

On steadily

Routing Engine is the Primary.

STORAGE

Green

Blinking

Indicates activity on the SSD or Compact Flash.

ONLINE

Green

Blinking

Routing Engine is transitioning online.

On steadily

Routing Engine is functioning normally.

OK/FAIL

Red

On steadily

Routing Engine has failed.

SEE ALSO MX240 Routing Engine Description

60 MX480 Routing Engine Description | 50 MX960 Routing Engine Description
RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Description
IN THIS SECTION RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Components | 60 RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Boot Sequence | 61
Figure 27 on page 60 shows the Routing Engine.
Figure 27: RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Front View

1-- Extractor clips 2-- Auxiliary port (AUX) 3-- Console port (CONSOLE) 4-- Management port (MGMT) 5-- LEDs--ONLINE, OK/FAIL, and MASTER

6-- ONLINE/OFFLINE button 7-- SSD LEDs--DISK1 and DISK2 8-- Ports--USB1 and USB2 9-- RESET button 10-- SSD card slot cover

RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Components
In routers with dual Routing Engines, both Routing Engines must be RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engines. Each RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine (shown in Figure 27 on page 60) consists of the following components:

61
� CPU--Runs Junos OS to maintain the routing tables and routing protocols. � EEPROM--Stores the serial number of the Routing Engine. � DRAM--Provides storage for the routing and forwarding tables and for other Routing Engine
processes. � One 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface between the Routing Engine and Switch Control Board. � Two 50-GB slim solid-state drives--SSD1 (primary) and SSD2 (secondary)--Provide storage for
software images, configuration files, microcode, log files, and memory dumps. The Routing Engine reboots from SSD2 when boot from primary SSD fails. � Two USB ports (USB1 and USB2)--Provide a removable media interface through which you can install Junos OS manually. The Junos OS supports USB versions 3.0, 2.0, and 1.1. � Interface ports--The AUX, CONSOLE, and MGMT provide access to management devices. Each Routing Engine has one 10/100/1000-Mbps Ethernet port for connecting to a management network, and two asynchronous serial ports--one for connecting to a console and one for connecting to a modem or other auxiliary device. � RESET button--Reboots the Routing Engine when pressed. � ONLINE/OFFLINE button--Brings the Routing Engine online or takes it offline when pressed.
NOTE: The ONLINE/OFFLINE button must be pressed for a minimum of 4 seconds for the power off or power on to occur.
� Extractor clips--Control the locking system that secures the Routing Engine. � LEDs--RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine LEDs describes the functions of these LEDs.
NOTE: For specific information about Routing Engine components (for example, the amount of DRAM), issue the show vmhost hardware command.
RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Boot Sequence
Booting in a RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine follows this sequence--the USB device, SSD1, SSD2, LAN. SSD1 is the primary boot device. The boot sequence is tried twice for SSD1 and SSD2.

62
SEE ALSO Upgrading to the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine in a Redundant Host Subsystem Upgrading to the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine in a Nonredundant Host Subsystem
RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine LEDs
Each Routing Engine has five LEDs that indicate its status. The LEDs--labeled MASTER, DISK1, DISK2, ONLINE, and OK/FAIL--are located on the faceplate of the Routing Engine. Table 27 on page 62 describes the functions of the Routing Engine LEDs.
Figure 28: RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine LEDs

1-- ONLINE LED 2-- OK/FAIL LED 3-- DISK1 LED Table 27: RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine LEDs

Label

Color State

Description

4-- DISK2 LED 5-- ONLINE/OFFLINE button 6-- MASTER LED

ONLINE Green Blinking slowly Routing Engine is in the process of booting BIOS, and the host OS.

Blinking rapidly Routing Engine is in the process of booting Junos OS.

Off

Routing Engine is not online or not functioning normally.

Table 27: RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine LEDs (Continued)

Label

Color State

Description

On steadily Green

Routing Engine has booted both JunOS and host OS.

DISK1 Green Blinking

Indicates presence of disk activity.

Off

There is no disk activity.

DISK2 Green Blinking

Indicates presence of disk activity.

Off

There is no disk activity.

OK/FAIL Yellow On steadily

Routing Engine is not powering up, which indicates failure.

MASTER Blue On steadily

This Routing Engine is the Primary Routing Engine.

Off

This Routing Engine is the backup Routing Engine, if the ONLINE LED is solid green.

SEE ALSO MX240 Routing Engine Description MX960 Routing Engine Description
RE-S-X6-128G Routing Engine Description
IN THIS SECTION RE-S-X6-128G Routing Engine Components | 64

64 RE-S-X6-128G Routing Engine LEDs | 65 RE-S-X6-128G Routing Engine Boot Sequence | 66
Figure 29 on page 64 shows the Routing Engine. Figure 29: RE-S-X6-128G Routing Engine Front View

1-- Extractor clips 2-- Auxiliary port (AUX) 3-- Console port (CONSOLE) 4-- Management port (MGMT) 5-- LEDs--ONLINE, OK/FAIL, and MASTER

6-- ONLINE/OFFLINE button 7-- SSD LEDs--DISK1 and DISK2 8-- Ports--USB1 and USB2 9-- RESET button 10-- SSD card slot cover

RE-S-X6-128G Routing Engine Components
In routers with dual Routing Engines, both Routing Engines must be RE-S-X6-128G Routing Engines.
Each RE-S-X6-128G Routing Engine (shown in Figure 29 on page 64) consists of the following components:
� CPU--Runs Junos OS to maintain the routing tables and routing protocols.
� EEPROM--Stores the serial number of the Routing Engine.
� DRAM--Provides storage for the routing and forwarding tables and for other Routing Engine processes.
� One 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface between the Routing Engine and Switch Control Board.
� Two 50-GB slim solid-state drives--SSD1 (primary) and SSD2 (secondary)--Provide storage for software images, configuration files, microcode, log files, and memory dumps. The Routing Engine reboots from SSD2 when boot from primary SSD fails.

65
� Two USB ports (USB1 and USB2)--Provide a removable media interface through which you can install Junos OS manually. The Junos OS supports USB versions 3.0, 2.0, and 1.1.
� Interface ports--The AUX, CONSOLE, and MGMT provide access to management devices. Each Routing Engine has one 10/100/1000-Mbps Ethernet port for connecting to a management network, and two asynchronous serial ports--one for connecting to a console and one for connecting to a modem or other auxiliary device.
� RESET button--Reboots the Routing Engine when pressed. � ONLINE/OFFLINE button--Brings the Routing Engine online or takes it offline when pressed.
NOTE: The ONLINE/OFFLINE button must be pressed for a minimum of 4 seconds for the power off or power on to occur.
� Extractor clips--Control the locking system that secures the Routing Engine. � LEDs--Table 28 on page 66 describes the functions of these LEDs.
NOTE: For specific information about Routing Engine components (for example, the amount of DRAM), issue the show vmhost hardware command.
RE-S-X6-128G Routing Engine LEDs
Each Routing Engine has five LEDs that indicate its status. The LEDs--labeled MASTER, DISK1, DISK2, ONLINE, and OK/FAIL--are located on the faceplate of the Routing Engine. Table 28 on page 66 describes the functions of the Routing Engine LEDs.
Figure 30: RE-S-X6-128G Routing Engine LEDs

1-- ONLINE LED 2-- OK/FAIL LED 3-- DISK1 LED Table 28: RE-S-X6-128G Routing Engine LEDs

4-- DISK2 LED 5-- ONLINE/OFFLINE button 6-- MASTER LED

Label

Color State

Description

ONLINE Green Blinking slowly Routing Engine is in the process of booting BIOS, and the host OS.

Blinking rapidly Routing Engine is in the process of booting Junos OS.

Off

Routing Engine is not online or not functioning normally.

DISK1

Green Blinking

Indicates presence of disk activity.

Off

DISK2

Green Blinking

There is no disk activity. Indicates presence of disk activity.

Off

OK/FAIL Green On steadily

Yellow On steadily

MASTER Blue On steadily

There is no disk activity. Routing Engine is powering up. Routing Engine is not powering up, which indicates failure. This Routing Engine is the Primary Routing Engine.

RE-S-X6-128G Routing Engine Boot Sequence
Booting in a RE-S-X6-128G Routing Engine follows this sequence--the USB device, SSD1, SSD2, LAN. SSD1 is the primary boot device. The boot sequence is tried twice for SSD1 and SSD2.

67
SEE ALSO Supported Routing Engines by Router Routing Engine Specifications

Routing Engine Specifications
Table 29 on page 67 lists the current specifications for Routing Engines supported on M Series, MX Series, and T Series routers. Table 30 on page 73 lists the hardware specifications of the Routing Engines with VMHost support. Table 31 on page 75 lists the specifications for end-of-life Routing Engines.

NOTE: For a list of the routing engines that are supported on the M Series, MX Series, T Series, and PTX routers, see Supported Routing Engines by Router.

Table 29: Routing Engine Specifications

Routing Engine

Processor Memory

Connection Disk to PFEs

Media

First Junos OS Support

Switch Control Board

RE-400-76 400-MHz 768 MB

Fast

40 GB 1 GB

9.0

�

Celeron

Ethernet

hard disk CompactFla

sh card

RE-

1.0-GHz

2048 MB Gigabit

40 GB 1 GB

8.1

�

A-1000-20 Pentium

Ethernet

hard disk CompactFla

sh card

RE-

2.0-GHz

4096 MB Gigabit

40 GB 1 GB

8.1

�

A-2000-40 Pentium

Ethernet

hard disk CompactFla

sh card

RES-1300-20 48

1.3-GHz Pentium

2048 MB

Gigabit Ethernet

40 GB 1 GB

8.2

hard disk CompactFla

sh card

SCB, SCBE

Table 29: Routing Engine Specifications (Continued)

Routing Engine

Processor Memory

Connection Disk to PFEs

Media

First Junos OS Support

Switch Control Board

RES-2000-40 96

2.0-GHz Pentium

4096 MB

Gigabit Ethernet

40 GB 1 GB

8.2

hard disk CompactFla

sh card

SCB, SCBE

RE-C1800 1.8-GHz

8 GB

Gigabit

SSD

Ethernet

4 GB CompactFla sh card

T1600 router in a routing matrix: 9.6R2

Standalone T640 or T1600 router:11.2

CB-T for a standalone router.
CB-LCC for a router in a routing matrix.

Table 29: Routing Engine Specifications (Continued)

Routing Engine

Processor Memory

Connection Disk to PFEs

Media

First Junos OS Support

Switch Control Board

1.8 Ghz

16 GB

Gigabit

SSD

Ethernet

4 GB CompactFla sh card

32-bit Junos OS on a standalone T1600 router: 11.4R2 32bit Junos OS on a T1600 router in a routing matrix: 11.4R2

CB-T for a standalone router.
CB-LCC for a router in a routing matrix.

64-bit Junos OS on a standalone T1600 router: 11.4R2 64bit Junos OS on a T1600 router in a routing matrix: 11.4R2

RE-C2600 2.6-GHz

16 GB

Gigabit

SSD

Ethernet

4 GB

TX Matrix �

CompactFla Plus router:

sh card

9.6R2

RE-

1800-MHz 8 GB or 16 Gigabit

32 GB 4 GB

10.4

�

A-1800x2

Ethernet

SSD

CompactFla

sh card

Table 29: Routing Engine Specifications (Continued)

Routing Engine

Processor Memory

Connection Disk to PFEs

Media

First Junos OS Support

Switch Control Board

RES-1800x2

1800-MHz

8 GB or 16 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

32 GB SSD

4 GB CompactFla sh card

10.4

SCB, SCBE, SCBE2, SCBE3

RES-1800x4

1800-MHz

8GB or 16 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

32 GB SSD

4 GB CompactFla sh card

10.4

SCB, SCBE, SCBE2, SCBE3

RE-S-

1.8-GHz

4 GB

Gigabit

�

8 GB

13.2

�

MX104

Ethernet

NAND

Flash

REB-1800x14G

1.73-GHz

4 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

64 GB SSD

4 GB

12.1R2,

�

CompactFla 11.4R4, and

sh card

12.2R1

REMX2000-1 800x4

1.8- GHz

16 GB

Gigabit

32 GB 4 GB Fixed 12.3R2

SFB

Ethernet

SSD

Internal

CompactFla

sh card

RES-1800X432G-S

1.8- Ghz

32 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

32 GB SSD

4 GB Fixed Internal CompactFla sh card

� 12.3R4 � 13.2R1

SCB, SCBE, SCBE2, SCBE3

REMX2K-1 1.8- Ghz 800-32G-S

32 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

32 GB SSD

4GB Fixed � 12.3R4 � Internal
CompactFla � 13.2R1 sh card

Table 29: Routing Engine Specifications (Continued)

Routing Engine

Processor Memory

Connection Disk to PFEs

Media

RE-SX6-64G, RE-SX6-64G-LT

2 Ghz

64 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

Two 50- GB SSDs

REMX2KX8-64G

2.3 Ghz

64 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

Two

100-GB

SSDs

REMX2K- 2.3 Ghz X8-64G-LT

64 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

Two

100-GB

SSDs

REMX2008 2.3 Ghz -X8-64G

64 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

Two 50- � GB SSDs

RES-1600x8

1.6 Ghz

64 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

Two 50- � GB SSDs

REMX2008 2.1 Ghz -X8-64G-LT

64 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

Two

100-GB

SSDs

REMX2008 2.3 Ghz -X8-128G

128 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

Two

200-GB

SSDs

First Junos OS Support

Switch Control Board

� 15.1F4 and 16.1 (RE-SX6-64G )

SCBE2, SCBE3

� 17.2R1 (RE-SX6-64G -LT)

15.1F5-S1, � 16.1R2, and 16.2R1

17.2R1

�

15.1F7

�

17.3R1

�

17.2R1

18.2R1

Table 29: Routing Engine Specifications (Continued)

Routing Engine

Processor Memory

Connection Disk to PFEs

Media

RE-SX6-128G

2.1 Ghz

128 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

Two

200-GB

SSDs

REMX2KX8-128G

2.1 Ghz

128 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

Two

200-GB

SSDs

JNP10003- 1.6-GHz RE1

64 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

Two 100 GB SSDs

JNP10003- 1.6-GHz RE1-LT

64 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

Two 100 GB SSDs

JNP10KRE0

2.5 GhZ

32 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

Two 50 GB SSDs

JNP10KRE1

2.3 GhZ

64 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

Two 200 GB SSDs

JNP10KRE1-LT

2.3 GhZ

64 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

Two 200 GB SSDs

JNP10KRE1-128

2.3 GhZ

128 GB

Gigabit Ethernet

Two 200 GB SSDs

First Junos OS Support

Switch Control Board

18.1R1 (SCBE2)
18.4R1 (SCBE3)

SCBE2, SCBE3

18.1R1

17.3R1

18.1R1

17.2R1

18.2R1

18.3R1

NOTE: Use shielded CAT5e cable for connecting the AUX, CONSOLE, and MGMT ports in RE-SX6-64G, REMX2K-X8-64G, and REMX2008-X8-64G Routing Engines.
Table 30 on page 73 lists the hardware specifications of the Routing Engines with VMHost support.

Table 30: Hardware Specifications of the RE-MX-X6, RE-MX-X8, RE-PTX-X8, RCBPTX, REQFX10002-60C, and RE-PTX10002-60C Routing Engines

Model Number

Supported on Device Specifications

RE-S-X6-64G

MX240, MX480, and MX960

� 6-core Haswell CPU
� Wellsburg PCH-based Routing Engine with 64-GB DRAM and two 64-GB solid-state drives (SSDs)

RE-S-X6-128G

MX240, MX480, and MX960

� 6-core Haswell CPU
� Wellsburg PCH-based Routing Engine with 128-GB DRAM and two 128-GB solid-state drives (SSDs)

REMX2K-X8-64G

MX2020 and MX2010

� 8-core Haswell CPU
� Wellsburg PCH-based Routing Engine with 64-GB DRAM and two 64-GB SSDs

RE-PTX-X8-64G

PTX5000

� 8-core Haswell CPU
� Wellsburg PCH-based Routing Engine with 64-GB DRAM and two 64-GB SSDs
� New Control Board CB2-PTX

RCBPTX

PTX3000

� Wellsburg PCH-based Routing Engine with 64-GB DRAM and two 64-GB SSDs
� Multi-core Haswell CPU
RCB combines the functionality of a Routing Engine, Control Board, and Centralized Clock Generator (CCG)

RE-S-1600x8

MX10003

� High-performance 1.6-GHz Intel 8 Core X86 CPU � 64-GB DDR4 RAM � 100-GB SATA SSD

Table 30: Hardware Specifications of the RE-MX-X6, RE-MX-X8, RE-PTX-X8, RCBPTX, REQFX10002-60C, and RE-PTX10002-60C Routing Engines (Continued)

Model Number

Supported on Device Specifications

RE-S-1600x8

MX204

� High-performance 1.6-GHz Intel 8 Core X86 CPU � 32-GB DDR4 RAM � 100-GB SATA SSD

RE-QFX10002-60C QFX10002-60C

� High-performance 1.6-GHz Intel 8 Core X86 CPU � 32-GB DDR4 RAM � Two 50-GB SATA SSD

RE-PTX10002-60C PTX10002-60C

� High-performance 1.6-GHz Intel 8 Core X86 CPU � 32-GB DDR4 RAM � Two 50-GB SATA SSD

RE-ACX-5448

ACX5448

� High-performance 1.6-GHz Intel 8 Core X86 CPU � 32-GB two DIMM DRAM � Two 100-GB SATA SSD

RE-X10

MX10008

� High-performance 1.6-GHz Intel 10 Core X86 CPU � 64-GB DDR4 RAM � Two 200-GB SATA SSD

Table 31: End-of-Life Routing Engine Specifications

Routing Engine

Processor Memory

Connecti Disk on to PFEs

Media

First Junos OS EOL Details Support

RE-333-25 333-MHz 256 MB

Pentium II

Fast Ethernet

6.4 GB hard disk

80 MB

3.4

CompactFla

sh card

PSN-2003-01 -063

RE-333-76 333-MHz 768 MB

Pentium II

Fast Ethernet

6.4 GB hard disk

80 MB

3.4

CompactFla

sh card

PSN-2003-01 -063

RE-600-51 2

600-MHz Pentium III

512 MB

Fast Ethernet

30 GB hard disk

256 MB

5.4

CompactFla

sh card

PSN-2004-07 -019

RE-600-20 48

600-MHz Pentium III

2048 MB

Fast Ethernet

40 GB hard disk

1 GB

5.3

CompactFla

sh card

PSN-2008-02 -018

RE-850-15 36

850-MHz Pentium III

1536 MB

Fast Ethernet

40 GB hard disk

1 GB

7.2

CompactFla

sh card

PSN-2011-04 -226

RE-M40

200-MHz 256 MB Pentium

Fast Ethernet

6.4 GB hard disk

80 MB

3.2

CompactFla

sh card

FAHW-0101-00 1

REM40-333768

333-MHz 768 MB Pentium II

Fast Ethernet

10 GB hard disk

80 MB

4.2

CompactFla

sh card

PSN-2003-01 -063

REM40-6002048

600-MHz Pentium III

2048 MB

Fast Ethernet

30 GB hard disk

128 MB

5.4

CompactFla

sh card

PSN-2004-11 -020

Table 31: End-of-Life Routing Engine Specifications (Continued)

Routing Engine

Processor Memory

Connecti Disk on to PFEs

Media

First Junos OS EOL Details Support

RE-1600-2 048

1.6-GHz Pentium M

2048 MB Gigabit Ethernet

40 GB hard disk

1 GB

6.2

CompactFla

sh card

PSN-2008-02 -019

NOTE: The memory in Table 29 on page 67 indicates the amount of total memory. To determine the amount of available memory, issue the show chassis routing-engine CLI command.
On routers that accept two Routing Engines, you cannot mix Routing Engine types except for a brief period (one minute or so) during an upgrade or downgrade to two Routing Engines of the same type.
SEE ALSO Supported Routing Engines by Router
Supported Routing Engines by Router
IN THIS SECTION M7i Routing Engines | 77 M10i Routing Engines | 78 M40e Routing Engines | 79 M120 Routing Engines | 79 M320 Routing Engines | 80 MX5, MX10, MX40, and MX80 Routing Engine | 81 MX104 Routing Engines | 81 MX204 Routing Engine | 82

77
MX240 Routing Engines | 82 MX480 Routing Engines | 84 MX960 Routing Engines | 85 MX2008 Routing Engines | 87 MX2010 Routing Engines | 87 MX2020 Supported Routing Engines | 88 MX10003 Routing Engines | 89 MX10008 Routing Engines | 90 PTX1000 Routing Engines | 90 PTX3000 Routing Engines | 91 PTX5000 Routing Engines | 91 PTX10008 and PTX10016 Routing Engines | 92 PTX10001 Routing Engine | 93 PTX10002-60 Routing Engine | 93 T320 Routing Engines | 94 T640 Routing Engines | 94 T1600 Routing Engines | 95 T4000 Routing Engines | 97 TX Matrix Routing Engines | 97 TX Matrix Plus Routing Engines | 98 TX Matrix Plus (with 3D SIBs) Routing Engines | 99
The following tables list the Routing Engines that each router supports, the first supported release for the Routing Engine in the specified router, the management Ethernet interface, and the internal Ethernet interfaces for each Routing Engine.
M7i Routing Engines
Table 32 on page 78 lists the Routing Engines supported by the M7i router. The M7i router supports 32-bit Junos OS only.

Table 32: M7i Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

RE-400-768 (EOL details: RE-5.0 TSB16445)

RE-850-1536 (EOL details: TSB15553)

RE-850

RE-B-1800X1-4G

RE-B-1800x1

First Supported 32bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

9.0

fxp0

fxp1

7.2

fxp0

fxp1

11.4R4

fxp0

em0

12.1R2

M10i Routing Engines

Table 33 on page 78 lists the Routing Engines supported by the M10i router. The M10i router supports 32-bit Junos OS only.
Table 33: M10i Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32- Management bit Junos OS Release Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-400-768 (EOL details: RE-5.0

9.0

TSB16445)

fxp0

fxp1

fxp2

RE-850-1536 (EOL

RE-850

7.2

details: TSB15553)

fxp0

fxp1

fxp2

RE-B-1800X1-4G

RE-B-1800x1

11.4R4

fxp0

em0

12.1R2

M40e Routing Engines

Table 34 on page 79 lists the Routing Engines supported by the M40e router. Table 34: M40e Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output First Supported Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-600-2048 (EOL

RE-3.0 or RE-3.0

5.3

fxp0

fxp1

details: TSB14373)

(RE-600)

fxp2

RE-A-1000-2048

RE-A-1000

8.1

fxp0

fxp1

fxp2

M120 Routing Engines

Table 35 on page 79 lists the Routing Engines supported by the M120 router. Table 35: M120 Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32-bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64-bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-A-1000-2048 RE-A-1000

8.0R2

�

fxp0

fxp1 fxp2

RE-A-2000-4096 RE-A-2000

8.0R2

�

fxp0

em0 bcm0

RE-A-1800X2-8G RE-A-1800x2

� 11.4R5

10.4

fxp0

fxp1

� 12.1R3

fxp2

Table 35: M120 Routing Engines (Continued)

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32-bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64-bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-A-1800X2-16G RE-A-1800x2

� 11.4R5

10.4

fxp0

fxp1

� 12.1R3

fxp2

RE-A-1800X4-16G RE-A-1800x4

� 11.4R5

10.4

fxp0

em0

� 12.1R3

em1

M320 Routing Engines

Table 36 on page 80 lists the Routing Engines supported by the M320 router. Table 36: M320 Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32-bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-1600-2048 (EOL RE-4.0

6.2

details: TSB14374)

�

fxp0

fxp1

fxp2

RE-A-2000-4096

RE-A-2000

8.1

�

fxp0

em0

bcm0

RE-A-1800X2-8G

RE-A-1800x2 � 11.4R5

10.4

fxp0

� 12.1R3

em0 bcm0

Table 36: M320 Routing Engines (Continued)

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32-bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-A-1800X2-16G RE-A-1800x2 � 11.4R5

10.4

fxp0

� 12.1R3

em0 bcm0

RE-A-1800X4-8G

RE-A-1800X4 � 11.4R5

10.4

fxp0

em0

� 12.1R3

em1

� 12.2

MX5, MX10, MX40, and MX80 Routing Engine

Table 37 on page 81 lists the Routing Engines supported by the MX5, MX10, MX40, and MX80 routers.
Table 37: MX5, MX10, MX40, and MX80 Routing Engine

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32-bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64-bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

Built-in

Routing

12.3

Routing

Engine RE-

Engine

MX80

fxp0

em0

em1

NOTE: em1 is used to communicate with the MS-MIC when it is inserted.

MX104 Routing Engines
Table 38 on page 82 lists the Routing Engines supported by MX104 routers.

Table 38: MX104 Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32-bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64-bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

RE-S-MX104 Routing

13.2

�

fxp0

Engine

Internal Ethernet Interface
em0 em1

MX204 Routing Engine

Table 39 on page 82 lists the Routing Engines supported by the MX204 router. Table 39: MX204 Routing Engine

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32-bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64-bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Built-in Routing Engine

RE-S-1600x8

17.4

fxp0

Internal Ethernet Interface
em2 em3 em4

MX240 Routing Engines

Table 40 on page 82 lists the Routing Engines supported by MX240 routers. Table 40: MX240 Supported Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32-bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64-bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-

RE-S-1300

9.0

�

S-1300-2048

(EOL details:

TSB16556

fxp0

fxp1 fxp2

Table 40: MX240 Supported Routing Engines (Continued)

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32-bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64-bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-

RE-S-2000

9.0

�

S-2000-4096

(EOL details:

TSB16735

fxp0

fxp1 fxp2

RE-

RE-S-1800x2

� 11.4R5

10.4

fxp0

em0

S-1800X2-8G

(EOL details:

� 12.1R3

em1

TSB16556

RE-

RE-S-1800x2

� 11.4R5

10.4

fxp0

em0

S-1800x2-16G

(EOL details:

� 12.1R3

em1

TSB16556

RE-

RE-S-1800X4

� 11.4R5

10.4

fxp0

em0

S-1800X4-8G

� 12.1R3

em1

RE-

RE-S-1800x4

� 11.4R5

10.4

fxp0

em0

S-1800X4-16G

� 12.1R3

em1

RE-

RE-S-1800X4

� 12.3R4

fxp0

S-1800X4-32G-

� 13.2R1

em0, em1

RE-S-X6-64G

RE-S-1600x8

�

15.1F4 16.1R1

fxp0

ixlv0, igb0

RE-S-X6-64G- RE-S-1600x8-LT � LT

17.2R1

fxp0

ixlv0, igb0 em0

Table 40: MX240 Supported Routing Engines (Continued)

RE-S-X6-128G

RE-S-1600x8-128

� 18.1R1

fxp0

ixlv0, igb0 em0

MX480 Routing Engines

Table 41 on page 84 lists the Routing Engines supported by MX480 routers. Table 41: MX480 Supported Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32-bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64-bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-

RE-S-1300

8.4

�

S-1300-2048

(EOL details:

TSB16556

fxp0

fxp1 fxp2

RE-

RE-S-2000

8.4

�

S-2000-4096

(EOL details:

TSB16735

fxp0

fxp1 fxp2

RE-

RE-S-1800x2

� 11.4R5

10.4

fxp0

em0

S-1800X2-8G

(EOL details:

� 12.1R3

em1

TSB16556

RE-

RE-S-1800x2

� 11.4R5

10.4

fxp0

em0

S-1800X2-16G

(EOL details:

� 12.1R3

em1

TSB16556

RE-

RE-S-1800X4

� 11.4R5

10.4

fxp0

em0

S-1800X4-8G

� 12.1R3

em1

Table 41: MX480 Supported Routing Engines (Continued)

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32-bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64-bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-

RE-S-1800x4

� 11.4R5

10.4

fxp0

em0

S-1800X4-16G

� 12.1R3

em1

RE-

RE-S-1800X4

� 12.3R4

fxp0

em0

S-1800X4-32G-

� 13.2R1

em1

RE-S-X6-64G

RE-S-1600x8

�

15.1F4 16.1R1

fxp0

ixlv0, igb0

RE-S-X6-64G- RE-S-1600x8-LT � LT

17.2R1

fxp0

ixlv0, igb0 em0

RE-S-X6-128G RE-S-1600x8-128 �

18.1R1

fxp0

ixlv0, igb0 em0

MX960 Routing Engines

Table 42 on page 85 lists the Routing Engines supported by MX960 routers. Table 42: MX960 Supported Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-S-1300-2048 (EOL RE-S-1300

8.2

�

details: TSB16556

fxp0

fxp1 fxp2

Table 42: MX960 Supported Routing Engines (Continued)

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-S-2000-4096 (EOL RE-S-2000

8.2

�

details: TSB16735

fxp0

fxp1 fxp2

RE-S-1800X2-8G

RE-S-1800x2

� 11.4R5

10.4

fxp0

em0

(EOL details:

TSB16556

� 12.1R3

em1

RE-S-1800X2-16G

RE-S-1800x2

� 11.4R5

10.4

fxp0

em0

(EOL details:

TSB16556

� 12.1R3

em1

RE-S-1800X4-8G

RE-S-1800x4

� 11.4R5

10.4

fxp0

em0

� 12.1R3

em1

RE-S-1800X4-16G

RE-S-1800x4

� 11.4R5

10.4

fxp0

em0

� 12.1R3

em1

RE-S-1800X4-32G-S RE-S-1800x4

� 12.3R4

fxp0

em0

� 13.2R1

em1

RE-S-X6-64G

RE-S-1600x8

�

15.1F4 16.1R1

fxp0

ixlv0, igb0

RE-S-X6-64G (For

RE-S-1600x8

�

MX960-VC)

17.2R1

fxp0

ixlv0, igb0

Table 42: MX960 Supported Routing Engines (Continued)

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-S-X6-64G-LT

RE-S-1600x8-LT �

17.2R1

fxp0

ixlv0, igb0 em0

RE-S-X6-128G

RE-S-1600x8-128 �

18.1R1

fxp0

ixlv0, igb0 em0

MX2008 Routing Engines

Table 43 on page 87 lists the Routing Engines supported by MX2008 routers. Table 43: MX2008 Supported Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 64-bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

REMX2008-X8-64G

RE-MX2008X8-64G

15.1F7

fxp0

ixlv0 ixlv1

REMX2008-X8-64G-LT

REMX2008X8-64G-LT

17.2R1

fxp0

ixlv0 ixlv1

REMX2008-X8-128G

RE-MX2008X8-128G

18.2R1

fxp0

ixlv0 ixlv1

MX2010 Routing Engines
Table 44 on page 88 lists the Routing Engines supported by MX2010 routers.

Table 44: MX2010 Supported Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 64-bit Junos OS Release

RE-MX2000-1800X4

RE-S-1800x4

12.3R2

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

fxp0

em0

em1

REMX2K-1800-32G-S

RE-S-1800x4

� 12.3R4 � 13.2R1

fxp0

em0

em1

REMX2K-X8-64G

RE-S-2X00x8

� 15.1F5-S1 � 16.1R2 � 16.2R1

fxp0

ixlv0 ixlv1 em0

REMX2K-X8-64G-LT

RE-S-2X00x8

17.2R1

fxp0

ixlv0 ixlv1 em0

REMX2K-X8-128G

RE-MX200X8-128G 18.1R1

fxp0

ixlv0 ixlv1

MX2020 Supported Routing Engines
Table 45 on page 89 lists the Routing Engines supported by MX2020 routers.

Table 45: MX2020 Supported Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 64-bit Junos OS Release

RE-MX2000-1800X4

RE-S-1800x4

12.3R2

REMX2K-1800-32G-S REMX2K-X8-64G REMX2K-X8-64G-LT

RE-S-1800x4 RE-S-2X00x8 RE-S-2X00x8

� 12.3R4 � 13.2R1
� 15.1F5-S1 � 16.1R2 � 16.2R1
17.2R1

REMX2K-X8-128G

RE-MX200X8-128G 18.1R1

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

fxp0

em0

em1

fxp0

em0

em1

fxp0

ixlv0

ixlv1

em0

fxp0

ixlv0

ixlv1

em0

fxp0

ixlv0

ixlv1

em0

MX10003 Routing Engines
Table 46 on page 90 lists the Routing Engines supported by MX10003 routers.

Table 46: MX10003 Supported Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 64-bit Junos OS Release

JNP10003-RE1

RE-S-1600x8

17.3R1

JNP10003-RE1-LT

RE-S-1600x8

18.1R1

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

fxp0

em3

em4

fxp0

em3

em4

MX10008 Routing Engines

Table 47 on page 90 lists the Routing Engines supported on the MX10008 router. Table 47: MX10008 Routing Engines

Model Number Name in CLI Output First Supported Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Internal Ethernet

Interface

JNP10K-RE1 RE X10

18.2R1

em0

bme0 bme1

PTX1000 Routing Engines
Table 48 on page 91 lists the Routing Engine supported on the PTX1000. NOTE: The PTX1000 supports 64-bit Junos OS only.

Table 48: PTX1000 Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported Junos OS Management Ethernet Internal Ethernet

Release

Interface

Built-in Routing RE-PTX1000

� 16.1X65-D30

em0

Engine

� 17.2R1

em2

bme0 em1

PTX3000 Routing Engines
Table 49 on page 91 lists the Routing Engines supported on the PTX3000.

NOTE: The PTX3000 supports 64-bit Junos OS only.

Table 49: PTX3000 Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-DUOC2600-16G

RE-DUO-2600

13.2R2

em0

ixgbe0

ixgbe1

RCB-PTX-X6-32G RE-PTX-2X00x6

16.1R4

em0

17.1R1

This Routing Engine does not support Junos OS Release 16.2.

ixlv0 ixlv1

PTX5000 Routing Engines
Table 50 on page 92 lists the Routing Engines supported on the PTX5000. NOTE:

� PTX5000 supports 64-bit Junos OS only.
� The PTX5000 router supports two midplanes. The midplane identified as Midplane-8S in the CLI output is supported in Junos OS releases, 12.1X48, 12.3, and 13.2. The enhanced midplane, identified as Midplane-8SeP is supported from Junos OS release 14.1 onwards. The RE-DUO-2600 routing engine with Junos OS 13.2 or earlier is not supported on the PTX5000BASE2 midplane.

Table 50: PTX5000 Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output First Supported Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

RE-DUOC2600-16G

RE-DUO-2600

12.1X48

em0

12.3

13.2

NOTE: The PTX5000 does not support Junos OS Releases 12.1, 12.2, or 13.1.

RE-PTX-X8-64G

RE-PTX-2X00x8

15.1F4

em0

16.1R1

RE-PTX-X8-128G RE-PTX-2X00x8-128G 18.1R1

em0

Internal Ethernet Interface
ixgbe0 ixgbe1
ixlv0 ixlv1 em1 ixlv0 ixlv1 em1

PTX10008 and PTX10016 Routing Engines
Table 51 on page 93 lists the Routing Engines supported on the PTX10008 and PTX10016 routers.

Table 51: PTX10008 and PTX10016 Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output First Supported

Management Ethernet Internal Ethernet

Junos OS Release Interface

Interface

JNP10K-RE0

RE-PTX-2X00x4

17.2R1

em0, em1

bme0 bme1

JNP10K-RE1 (on PTX10008)

RE X10

18.2R1

em0

em1

bme0 bme1

PTX10001 Routing Engine

Table 52 on page 93 lists the Routing Engine supported on the PTX10001 router (JNP10001-20C). Table 52: PTX10001 Routing Engine

Model Number

Name in CLI Output First Supported Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Internal Ethernet

Interface

Built-in Routing Engine

RE-PTX10001-20C

18.4R1

em0, em2

em1 bme0

PTX10002-60 Routing Engine

Table 53 on page 93 lists the Routing Engine supported on the PTX10002-60 router. Table 53: PTX10002-60 Routing Engine

Model Number

Name in CLI Output First Supported Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Internal Ethernet

Interface

Built-in Routing Engine

RE-PTX10002-60C

18.2R1

em0, em2

em1 bme0

T320 Routing Engines

Table 54 on page 94 lists the Routing Engines supported by the T320 router. Table 54: T320 Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32-bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-600-2048 (EOL details: TSB14373)

RE-3.0 or RE-3.0

5.3

(RE-600)

fxp0

fxp1

fxp2

RE-1600-2048 (EOL

RE-4.0

6.2

details: TSB14374

fxp0

fxp1

fxp2

RE-A-2000-4096

RE-A-2000

8.1

fxp0

fxp1

fxp2

The T320 router supports the CB-T control board.

T640 Routing Engines
Table 55 on page 94 lists the Routing Engines supported by the T640 router. Table 55: T640 Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-600-2048

RE-3.0 or

5.3

�

(EOL details:

RE-3.0

TSB14373)

(RE-600)

fxp0

fxp1 fxp2

RE-1600-2048

RE-4.0

6.2

�

(EOL details:

TSB14374

fxp0

fxp1 fxp2

Table 55: T640 Routing Engines (Continued)

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-A-2000-4096 RE-A-2000 8.1

�

fxp0

em0 bcm0

RE-DUOC1800-8G

RE-DUO-1800 32-bit Junos OS on 64-bit Junos OS on em0 a standalone T640 a standalone T640

router: 11.2

router: 11.3

32-bit Junos OS on a T640 router in a routing matrix: 11.4R9

64-bit Junos OS on a T640 router in a routing matrix: 11.4R9

bcm0 em1

RE-DUOC1800-16G

RE-DUO-1800 32-bit Junos OS on 64-bit Junos OS on em0 a standalone T640 a standalone T640

router: 11.4R2

32-bit Junos OS on a T640 router in a routing matrix: 11.4R9

64-bit Junos OS on a T640 router in a routing matrix: 11.4R9

bcm0 em1

The T640 standalone router supports CB-T control board and CB-LCC in a T640 routing matrix.
T1600 Routing Engines
Table 56 on page 96 lists the Routing Engines supported by the T1600 router.
NOTE: (Two RE-DUO-C1800-8G or two RE-DUO-C1800-16G are required to connect to a Routing Matrix)

Table 56: T1600 Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32-bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64-bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-600-2048

RE-3.0 or

8.5

(EOL details:

RE-3.0

TSB14373)

(RE-600)

RE-1600-2048

RE-4.0

8.5

(EOL details:

(RE-1600)

TSB14374

�

fxp0

fxp1

fxp2

�

fxp0

fxp1

fxp2

RE-A-2000-4096 RE-A-2000

8.5

�

fxp0

em0

bcm0

RE-DUOC1800-8G

RE-TXP-LCC or RE-DUO-1800

32-bit Junos OS on a T1600 router in a routing matrix: 9.6

64-bit Junos OS

em0

on a T1600 router

in a routing matrix:

9.6 NOTE: Junos OS

Releases 9.6 through 64-bit Junos OS

10.4 support RE-

on a standalone

DUO-C1800-8G only T1600 router: 11.1

during upgrade to a

line-card chassis (LCC)

in a routing matrix.

32-bit Junos OS on a standalone T1600 router: 11.1

bcm0 em1

RE-DUOC1800-16G

RE-DUO-1800

32-bit Junos OS on a standalone T1600 router: 11.4R2
32-bit Junos OS on a T1600 router in a routing matrix: 11.4R2

64-bit Junos OS

em0

on a standalone

T1600 router:

11.4R2

64-bit Junos OS on a T1600 router in a routing matrix: 11.4R2

bcm0 em1

T4000 Routing Engines
Table 57 on page 97 lists the Routing Engines supported by the T4000 router.

NOTE: The T4000 router supports 64-bit Junos OS only.

Table 57: T4000 Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 64-bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-DUOC1800-8G

RE-DUO-1800

Standalone T4000 router: 12.1 em0
T4000 router in a routing matrix: 13.1

bcm0 em1

RE-DUOC1800-16G

RE-DUO-1800

Standalone T4000 router:

em0

12.1R2

T4000 router in a routing matrix: 13.1

bcm0 em1

The T4000 router supports the CB-LCC control board.

TX Matrix Routing Engines

Table 58 on page 97 lists the Routing Engines supported by the TX Matrix router. Table 58: TX Matrix Routing Engines

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-600-2048 (EOL RE-3.0 or RE-3.0 7.0

�

details: TSB14373)

(RE-600)

fxp0

fxp1

fxp2

Table 58: TX Matrix Routing Engines (Continued)

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-1600-2048 (EOL RE-4.0

7.0

�

details: TSB14374

(RE-1600)

fxp0

fxp1

fxp2

RE-A-2000-4096

RE-A-2000

8.5

�

fxp0

em0 bcm0

RE-DUO-C1800-8G RE-DUO-1800

11.4R9

em0

bcm0 em1

RE-DUOC1800-16G

RE-DUO-1800

11.4R9

em0

bcm0 em1

The TXP router supports two control boards, CB-TX and CB-LCC. The CB-LCC is required for both REDUO-C1800-8G and RE-DUO-C1800-16G Routing Engines.

TX Matrix Plus Routing Engines

Table 59 on page 98 lists the Routing Engines supported by the TX Matrix Plus router. Table 59: TX Matrix Plus Routing Engines

Model Number Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32-bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64-bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-DUOC2600-16G

RE-TXP-SFC or RE-DUO-2600

32-bit Junos OS: 64-bit Junos OS: em0

9.6

11.4

ixgbe0 ixgbe1

The TX Matrix Plus router supports the CB-TXP control board.

TX Matrix Plus (with 3D SIBs) Routing Engines

Table 60 on page 99 lists the Routing Engines supported by the TX Matrix Plus router with 3D SIBs. Table 60: Routing Engines on TX Matrix Plus with 3D SIBs

Model Number

Name in CLI Output

First Supported 32-bit Junos OS Release

First Supported 64-bit Junos OS Release

Management Ethernet Interface

Internal Ethernet Interface

RE-DUOC2600-16G

RE-TXP-SFC or RE- DUO-2600

64-bit Junos OS: em0 11.4

ixgbe0 ixgbe1

SEE ALSO Understanding Internal Ethernet Interfaces
MX480 Interface Modules--DPCs
IN THIS SECTION MX480 Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) Description | 100 MX480 DPC Port and Interface Numbering | 103 MX480 Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) LEDs | 107 DPCs Supported on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers | 107

100
MX480 Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) Description
IN THIS SECTION DPC Components | 102
A Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) is optimized for Ethernet density (see Figure 31 on page 101). The DPC assembly combines packet forwarding and Ethernet interfaces on a single board, with either two or four 10-Gbps Packet Forwarding Engines. Each Packet Forwarding Engine consists of one I-chip for Layer 3 processing and one Layer 2 network processor. The DPCs interface with the power supplies and Switch Control Boards (SCBs). The DPC slots are located in the front of the router (see Figure 31 on page 101). The router has six dedicated DPC slots that are numbered 0 through 5. A DPC can be installed in any DPC slot on the router. You can install any combination of DPC types in the router. If a slot is not occupied by a DPC, a DPC blank panel must be installed to shield the empty slot and to allow cooling air to circulate properly through the router. DPCs are hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in "MX480 Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)" on page 291. When you install a DPC in an operating router, the Routing Engine downloads the DPC software, the DPC runs its diagnostics, and the Packet Forwarding Engines housed on the DPC are enabled. Forwarding on other DPCs continues uninterrupted during this process.

101
Figure 31 on page 101 shows typical DPCs supported on the MX480 router. For more information about DPCs, see the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
Figure 31: Typical DPCs Supported on the Router

102 Figure 32: DPC Installed Horizontally in the Router
DPC Components
Each DPC consists of the following components: � DPC cover, which functions as a ground plane and a stiffener. � Fabric interfaces. � Two Gigabit Ethernet interfaces that allow control information, route information, and statistics to be
sent between the Routing Engine and the CPU on the DPCs. � Two interfaces from the SCBs that enable the DPCs to be powered on and controlled. � Physical DPC connectors. � Two or four Packet Forwarding Engines. � Midplane connectors and power circuitry. � Processor subsystem, which includes a 1.2-GHz CPU, system controller, and 1 GB of SDRAM. � Online button--Takes the DPC online or offline when pressed.

103
� LEDs on the DPC faceplate. For more information about LEDs on the DPC faceplate, see the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
Two LEDs, located on the craft interface above the DPC, display the status of the DPC and are labeled OK and FAIL.
SEE ALSO MX480 Component LEDs on the Craft Interface | 15 Replacing an MX480 DPC | 343
MX480 DPC Port and Interface Numbering
Each port on a DPC corresponds to a unique interface name in the CLI. In the syntax of an interface name, a hyphen (-) separates the media type from the DPC number (represented as an FPC in the CLI). The DPC slot number corresponds to the first number in the interface. The second number in the interface corresponds to the logical PIC number. The last number in the interface matches the port number on the DPC. Slashes (/) separate the DPC number from the logical PIC number and port number. type-fpc/pic/port � type--Media type, which identifies the network device. For example:
� ge--Gigabit Ethernet interface � so--SONET/SDH interface � xe--10-Gigabit Ethernet interface For a complete list of media types, see Interface Naming Overview. � fpc--Slot in which the DPC is installed. On the MX480 router, the DPCs are represented in the CLI as FPC 0 through FPC 5. � pic--Logical PIC on the DPC. The number of logical PICs varies depending on the type of DPC. For example, a: � 20-port Gigabit Ethernet DPC has two logical PICs, numbered 0 through 1. � 40-port Gigabit Ethernet DPC has four logical PICs, numbered 0 through 3. � 2-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet DPC has two logical PICs, numbered 0 through 1.

104 � 4-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet DPC has four logical PICs, numbered 0 through 3. For more information on specific DPCs, see "DPCs Supported on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers" on page 107 in the MX Series Interface Module Reference. � port--Port number. The MX480 router supports up to six DPCs that install horizontally and are numbered 0 through 5 from bottom to top. Figure 33 on page 104 shows a 40-port Gigabit Ethernet DPC with SFP installed in slot 3 on the MX480 router. Figure 33: MX480 DPC Interface Port Mapping
The DPC contains four logical PICs, numbered PIC 0 through PIC 3 in the CLI. Each logical PIC contains 10 ports numbered 0 through 9. The show chassis hardware command output displays a 40-port Gigabit Ethernet DPC with SFP (DPCER-40GE-SFP) installed in DPC slot 3. The DPC (DPCE 40x 1GE R) is shown as FPC 3 in the CLI. The DPC's four logical PICs -- 10x 1GE(LAN) -- are shown as PIC 0 through PIC 3.
user@host> show chassis hardware

105

... FPC 3
CPU PIC 0
Xcvr 0 Xcvr 1 Xcvr 2 Xcvr 3 Xcvr 4 Xcvr 5 Xcvr 6 Xcvr 7 Xcvr 8 Xcvr 9 PIC 1 Xcvr 0 Xcvr 1 Xcvr 2 Xcvr 3 Xcvr 4 Xcvr 5 Xcvr 6 Xcvr 7 Xcvr 8 PIC 2 Xcvr 0 Xcvr 1 Xcvr 2 Xcvr 3 Xcvr 9 PIC 3 Xcvr 0 Xcvr 1 Xcvr 2 Xcvr 3 Xcvr 8 Xcvr 9 ...

REV 07 REV 06
REV 01 REV 01 REV 01 REV 01 REV 01 REV 01 REV 01 REV 01 REV 02 REV 02
REV 01 REV 01 REV 01 REV 01 REV 01 REV 01 REV 01 REV 01 REV 02
REV 01 REV 01 REV 01 REV 01 REV 02
REV 01 REV 01 REV 01 REV 01 REV 02 REV 02

750-018122 710-013713 BUILTIN 740-011782 740-011782 740-011782 740-011782 740-011782 740-011782 740-011613 740-011782 740-011613 740-011613 BUILTIN 740-011782 740-011782 740-011782 740-011782 740-011782 740-011782 740-011782 740-011782 740-011613 BUILTIN 740-011782 740-011782 740-011782 740-011782 740-011613 BUILTIN 740-011782 740-011782 740-011782 740-011782 740-011613 740-011613

KB8222 KA9010 BUILTIN PCH2NU4 PCH2P4R PCH2NYL PCH2UW6 PCH2P4N PCH2UME PCE1H5P PCH2UFG AM0947SEYU2 AM0947SEYTQ BUILTIN PCH2UYF PCH2P4L PCH2UCL PCH2P4X PCH2P1E PCH2UD2 PCH2PLC PCH2UDJ AM0947SEX7S BUILTIN PCH2NV7 PCH2P6Q PCH2NUG PCH2P10 AM0947SEXBT BUILTIN PCH2PL4 PCH2P1K PCH2PLM PCH2UFF AM1003SFV5S AM0947SEXBX

DPCE 40x 1GE R DPC PMB 10x 1GE(LAN) SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX 10x 1GE(LAN) SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX 10x 1GE(LAN) SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX 10x 1GE(LAN) SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX

106

The show interfaces terse command output displays the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces that correspond to the 40 ports located on the DPC.

user@host>show interfaces terse ge-3*

Interface ge-3/0/0 ge-3/0/1 ge-3/0/2 ge-3/0/3 ge-3/0/4 ge-3/0/5 ge-3/0/6 ge-3/0/7 ge-3/0/8 ge-3/0/9 ge-3/1/0 ge-3/1/1 ge-3/1/2 ge-3/1/3 ge-3/1/4 ge-3/1/5 ge-3/1/6 ge-3/1/7 ge-3/1/8 ge-3/1/9 ge-3/2/0 ge-3/2/1 ge-3/2/2 ge-3/2/3 ge-3/2/4 ge-3/2/5 ge-3/2/6 ge-3/2/7 ge-3/2/8 ge-3/2/9 ge-3/3/0 ge-3/3/1 ge-3/3/2 ge-3/3/3 ge-3/3/4 ge-3/3/5

Admin Link Proto up up up down up up up up up up up up up up up up up up up up up down up down up down up down up up up up up up up up up up up down up down up down up down up down up down up down up down up down up down up down up down up down up down up down up down up down

Local

Remote

107

ge-3/3/6 ge-3/3/7 ge-3/3/8 ge-3/3/9

up down up down up down up down

SEE ALSO MX480 Router Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping | 9
MX480 Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) LEDs
Two LEDs, located on the craft interface above the DPC, display the status of the DPC and are labeled OK and FAIL. For more information about the DPC LEDs on the craft interface, see "DPC and MPC LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface" on page 15. Each DPC also has LEDs located on the faceplate. For more information about LEDs on the DPC faceplate, see the "LEDs" section for each DPC in the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
SEE ALSO Maintaining MX480 DPCs | 337 Replacing an MX480 DPC | 343
DPCs Supported on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers
NOTE: These DPCs have all been announced as End of Life (EOL). The End of Support (EOS) milestone dates for each model are published at https://www.juniper.net/support/eol/ mseries_hw.html.
Table 61 on page 108 lists the DPCs supported by the MX240, MX480, and MX960 routers.

Table 61: DPCs Supported in MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers

DPC Name

DPC Model Number

Ports

Gigabit Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet DPC with SFP

DPC-R-40GE-SFP 40
EOL (see PSN-2009-06-400 )

Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced DPC with SFP

DPCE-R-40GE-

SFP

EOL (see PSNTSB16810)

Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Ethernet Services DPC DPCE-X-40GE-

with SFP

SFP

EOL (see PSNTSB16810)

Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing Ethernet Services DPC with SFP

DPCE-X-Q-40GE- 40 SFP
EOL (see PSN-2013-02-851 )

Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing IP Services DPCs with SFP

DPCE-R-Q-20GE- 20 SFP
EOL (see PSN-2013-02-851 )

108

Maximum Throughpu t per DPC

First Junos OS Release

40 Gbps

8.2

40 Gbps 8.4

40 Gbps 8.5

20 Gbps

9.1

109

Table 61: DPCs Supported in MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers (Continued)

DPC Name

DPC Model Number

Ports

Maximum Throughpu t per DPC

First Junos OS Release

Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing IP Services DPCs with SFP

DPCE-R-Q-40GE- 40 SFP
EOL (see PSN-2011-07-314 )

40 Gbps

8.5

10-Gigabit Ethernet DPC with XFP

DPC-R-4XGE-XFP 4
EOL (see PSN-2009-06-400 )

40 Gbps 8.2

10-Gigabit Ethernet 10-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced DPCs with XFP

DPCE-R-2XGE-

XFP

EOL (see PSN-2011-02-314 )

20 Gbps 9.1

10-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced DPCs with XFP

DPCE-R-4XGE-

XFP

EOL (see PSNTSB16810)

40 Gbps 8.4

10-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Ethernet Services

DPCE-X-4XGE-

DPC with XFP

XFP

EOL (see PSNTSB16810)

40 Gbps

8.4

110

Table 61: DPCs Supported in MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers (Continued)

DPC Name

DPC Model Number

Ports

Maximum Throughpu t per DPC

First Junos OS Release

10-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing Ethernet Services DPC with XFP

DPCE-X-Q-4XGE- 4 XFP
EOL (see PSN-2013-02-851 )

40 Gbps

8.5

10-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing IP Services DPCE-R-Q-4XGE- 4

DPC with XFP

XFP

EOL (see PSN-2011-02-314 )

40 Gbps 8.5

Mulit-Rate Ethernet

Multi-Rate Ethernet Enhanced DPC with SFP and DPCE-

XFP

R-20GE-2XGE

EOL (see PSNTSB16810)

40 Gbps 9.2

Multi-Rate Ethernet Enhanced Ethernet Services DPC with SFP and XFP

DPCE-

X-20GE-2XGE

EOL (see PSN-2011-02-314 )

40 Gbps 9.2

Multi-Rate Ethernet Enhanced Queuing IP Services DPCE-R-

DPC with SFP and XFP

Q-20GE-2XGE

EOL (see PSNTSB16810)

40 Gbps

9.3

Tri-Rate Ethernet

111

Table 61: DPCs Supported in MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers (Continued)

DPC Name

DPC Model Number

Ports

Maximum Throughpu t per DPC

First Junos OS Release

Tri-Rate Enhanced DPC

DPCE-R-40GE-TX 40
EOL (see PSN-2013-02-851 )

40 Gbps

9.1

Tri-Rate Enhanced Ethernet Services DPC

DPCE-X-40GE-TX 40
EOL (see PSN-2011-07-315 .)

40 Gbps 9.1

Services Multiservices DPC

MS-DPC

2 (Not

�

9.3

EOL (see PSN-

supported)

TSB16812)

SEE ALSO
Protocols and Applications Supported by DPCs and Enhanced DPCs (DPC and DPCE-R) Protocols and Applications Supported by Enhanced Ethernet Services DPCs (DPCE-X) Protocols and Applications Supported by Enhanced Queuing IP Services DPCs (DPCE-R-Q) Protocols and Applications Supported by Enhanced Queuing Ethernet Services DPCs (DPCE-X-Q) Protocols and Applications Supported by the Multiservices DPC (MS-DPC)

112
MX480 Interface Modules--FPCs and PICs
IN THIS SECTION MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) Description | 112 MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) LEDs | 115 FPCs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers | 116 MX480 PIC Description | 116 MX480 PIC Port and Interface Numbering | 117 MX480 PIC LEDs | 119 PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers | 120
MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) Description
IN THIS SECTION FPC Components | 115
A Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) occupies two DPC slots on an MX Series router. The router has six dedicated DPC slots that are numbered 0 through 5, bottom to top. Up to three FPCs can be installed

113
horizontally on the front of the router (see Figure 34 on page 113). The interface corresponds to the lowest numbered DPC slot for which the FPC is installed.
Figure 34: FPC Installed in the MX480 Router Chassis

114 Figure 35 on page 114 shows the typical FPCs supported on the MX480 router. Figure 35: Typical FPCs Supported on the MX480 Router
If a slot is not occupied by a DPC, an FPC, or an SCB, a blank panel must be installed to shield the empty slot and to allow cooling air to circulate properly through the router. Each FPC supports up to two PICs. On an FPC2, one Packet Forwarding Engine receives incoming packets from the PICs installed on the FPC and forwards them through the switch planes to the appropriate destination port. On an FPC3, two Packet Forwarding Engines receive incoming packets from the PICs installed on the FPC and forwards them through the switch planes to the appropriate destination port. The FPCs interface with the power supplies and SCBs. FPCs are hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in "MX480 Component Redundancy" on page 8. When you install an FPC into a functioning router, the Routing Engine downloads the FPC software, the FPC runs its diagnostics, and the PICs, housed on the FPC, are enabled. Forwarding continues

115
uninterrupted during this process. When you remove or install an FPC, packet forwarding between other DPCs or FPCs is not affected.
FPC Components
Each FPC consists of the following components: � FPC card carrier, which includes two PIC slots � Up to two Packet Forwarding Engines, each consisting of one I-chip for Layer 3 processing and one
Layer 2 network processor � Midplane connectors and power circuitry � Processor subsystem (PMB), which includes a 1.2-GHz CPU, system controller, 1 GB of SDRAM, and
two Gigabit Ethernet interfaces � Two LEDs, located on the craft interface above the FPC, that display the status of the FPC and are
labeled OK and FAIL � FPC online/offline button, located on the craft interface above the FPC
SEE ALSO Maintaining MX480 FPCs | 352 MX480 FPC Terminology Troubleshooting the MX480 FPCs | 457 Replacing an MX480 FPC | 359
MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) LEDs
Two LEDs, located on the craft interface above the FPC, that display the status of the FPC and are labeled OK and FAIL. For more information about the FPC LEDs located on the craft interface, see "MX480 Component LEDs on the Craft Interface" on page 15.

116

FPCs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers

An FPC occupies two slots when installed in an MX240, MX480, or MX960 router. The maximum number of supported FPCs varies per router: � MX960 router--6 FPCs � MX480 router--3 FPCs � MX240 router--1 FPC Table 62 on page 116 lists FPCs supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 routers. Table 62: FPCs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers

FPC Type FPC Name

FPC Model Number

Maximum Number of PICs Supported

Maximum Throughput per FPC (Full-duplex)

First Junos OS Release

FPC3

MX-FPC3

20 Gbps

9.4

FPC2

MX-FPC2

10 Gbps

9.5

SEE ALSO MX Series FPC and PIC Overview PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers High Availability Features
MX480 PIC Description
PICs provide the physical connection to various network media types, receiving incoming packets from the network and transmitting outgoing packets to the network. During this process, each PIC performs framing and line-speed signaling for its media type. Before transmitting outgoing data packets, the PICs encapsulate the packets received from the FPCs. Each PIC is equipped with an ASIC that performs control functions specific to the media type of that PIC.

117
PICs are hot-removable and hot-insertable. Up to two PICs can be installed in the slots in each FPC. Up to three FPCs can be installed in an MX480 router. PICs used in a Type 2 FPC have captive screws at their upper and lower corners. PICs used in a Type 3 FPC have an upper ejector handle and a lower captive screw.
SEE ALSO PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers | 120 Replacing an MX480 PIC | 385
MX480 PIC Port and Interface Numbering
Each port on a PIC corresponds to a unique interface name in the CLI. In the syntax of an interface name, a hyphen (-) separates the media type from the FPC number (represented as an FPC in the CLI). The FPC slot number corresponds to the first number in the interface. The second number in the interface corresponds to the PIC number. The last number in the interface matches the port number on the PIC. Slashes (/) separate the FPC number from the PIC number and port number: type-fpc/pic/port � type--Media type, which identifies the network device. For example:
� ge--Gigabit Ethernet interface � so--SONET/SDH interface � xe--10-Gigabit Ethernet interface For a complete list of media types, see Interface Naming Overview. � fpc--Lowest slot number in which the FPC is installed. On the MX480 router, FPCs occupy two line card slots and are represented in the CLI as FPC 0 through FPC 4. � pic--PIC number, 0 or 1 depending on the FPC slot. For more information on specific PICs, see PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers in the MX Series Interface Module Reference. � port--Port number. The MX480 supports up to three FPCs that install horizontally and are numbered from bottom to top.

118
Figure 36 on page 118 shows a Channelized OC12/STM4 Enhanced IQ (IQE) PIC with SFP installed in PIC slot 0 of an FPC installed in slot 3 and slot 4.
Figure 36: MX480 PIC Interface Port Mapping

The show chassis hardware command output displays a Channelized OC12/STM4 Enhanced IQ (IQE) PIC (4x CHOC12 IQE SONET) installed in MX FPC Type 2.

user@host> show chassis hardware

... FPC 3
CPU PIC 0
Xcvr 0 Xcvr 1

REV 01 REV 03 REV 00 REV 01 REV 01

710-024386 710-022351 750-022630 740-011782 740-011782

JW9571 KE2986 DS1284 PB821SG PB829Q6

MX FPC Type 2 DPC PMB 4x CHOC12 IQE SONET SFP-SX SFP-SX

119

Xcvr 2 Xcvr 3

REV 01 740-011613 P9F15NQ REV 01 740-011782 P7N036X

SFP-SX SFP-SX...

The show interfaces terse command output displays the channelized SONET OC12 interfaces (coc12), that correspond to the four ports located on the PIC.

user@host>show interfaces terse

... coc12-3/0/0 lc-3/0/0 lc-3/0/0.32769 pfe-3/0/0 pfe-3/0/0.16383
pfh-3/0/0 pfh-3/0/0.16383 coc12-3/0/1 coc12-3/0/2 coc12-3/0/3 ...

up up up up up up vpls up up up up inet
inet6 up up up up inet up up up up up up

SEE ALSO MX480 Router Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping | 9
MX480 PIC LEDs
Each PIC has LEDs located on the faceplate. For more information about LEDs on the PIC faceplate, see the "LEDs" section for each PIC in the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
SEE ALSO Replacing an MX480 PIC | 385 Maintaining MX480 PICs | 384

120

PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers

Table 63 on page 120 lists the PICs supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 routers. Table 63: PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers

PIC Name

PIC Model Number

Port Typ First Junos OS Release

Channelized IQ PICs

Channelized OC12/STM4

PB-4CHOC12-STM4-IQE-SFP

9.5

Enhanced IQ (IQE) PIC with SFP

Channelized OC48/STM16 Enhanced IQ (IQE) PIC with SFP

PB-1CHOC48-STM16-IQE

9.5

SONET/SDH PICs
SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 (Multi- PB-4OC3-1OC12-SON2-SFP Rate) PIC with SFP

9.5

SONET/SDH OC12/STM4 (Multi-Rate) PIC with SFP

PB-4OC3-4OC12-SON-SFP

9.5

SONET/SDH OC48/STM16 Enhanced IQ (IQE) PIC with SFP

PC-4OC48-STM16-IQE-SFP

10.4R2

SONET/SDH OC48/STM16 (Multi-Rate) PIC with SFP

PB-1OC48-SON-B-SFP

9.5

SONET/SDH OC48/STM16 PIC with SFP

PC-4OC48-SON-SFP

9.4

SONET/SDH OC192c/STM64 PIC

PC-1OC192-SON-VSR

9.4

121

Table 63: PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers (Continued)

PIC Name

PIC Model Number

Port Typ First Junos OS Release

SONET/SDH OC192c/STM64 PIC with XFP

PC-1OC192-SON-XFP

9.4

SEE ALSO MX Series FPC and PIC Overview FPCs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers High Availability Features
MX480 Interface Modules--MPCs and MICs
IN THIS SECTION MIC/MPC Compatibility | 122 MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) Description | 134 MX480 MIC Port and Interface Numbering | 135 MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) LEDs | 139 MICs Supported by MX Series Routers | 139 MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) Description | 153 MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) LEDs | 157 MPCs Supported by MX Series Routers | 157 MX480 Application Services Modular Line Card Description | 164 MX480 Application Services Modular Storage Card Description | 167 MX480 Application Services Modular Processing Card Description | 168 MX480 AS MSC LEDs | 169 MX480 AS MXC LEDs | 170

122

MIC/MPC Compatibility

The following tables provide a compatibility matrix for the MICs currently supported by MPC1, MPC2, MPC3, MPC6, MPC8, and MPC9 on MX240, MX480, MX960, MX2008, MX2010, MX2020, and MX10003 routers. Each table lists the first Junos OS release in which the MPC supports the MIC. For example, Junos OS Release 10.2 is the first release in which the MX-MPC1-3D supports the Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP. An en dash indicates that the MIC is not supported.
Table 64: MIC/MPC1 Compatibility

MIC Name

MPC1

MPC1E

MPC1 Q

MPC1E Q

MIC-3D-8OC3-2O --

12.1

12.1R4

C12-ATM

(ATM MIC with SFP)

MIC-3D-20GE-SFP 10.2
(Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP)

11.2R4

10.2

11.2R4

MIC-3D-20GE-SFP- 13.2R2 E
(Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP (E))

13.2R2

MIC-3D-2XGE-XFP 10.2
(10-Gigabit Ethernet MICs with XFP)

11.2R4

10.2

11.2R4

MIC-3D-4XGE-XFP --

(10-Gigabit Ethernet MICs with XFP)

123

Table 64: MIC/MPC1 Compatibility (Continued)

MIC Name

MPC1

MPC1E

MIC-3D-40GE-TX 10.2 (Tri-Rate MIC)

11.2R4

MIC-3D-4OC3OC1 11.2 2-1OC48, MIC-3D-8OC3OC1 2-4OC48
(SONET/SDH OC3/ STM1 (Multi-Rate) MICs with SFP)

11.2R4

MIC-3D-4COC3-1C --

OC12-CE

(Channelized OC3/ STM1 (Multi-Rate) Circuit Emulation MIC with SFP)

MIC-3D-1OC192- 12.2 XFP

12.2

(SONET/SDH OC192/STM64 MIC with XFP)

MPC1 Q 10.2
11.2

MPC1E Q 11.2R4
11.2R4

12.2

124

Table 64: MIC/MPC1 Compatibility (Continued)

MIC Name

MPC1

MPC1E

MIC-3D-4CHOC3- --

2CHOC12,

MIC-3D-8CHOC3-

4CHOC12

MIC-4COC3-2COC 12-G, MIC-8COC3-4COC 12-G

(Channelized SONET/SDH OC3/ STM1 (Multi-Rate) MICs with SFP)

MPC1 Q 11.4

MPC1E Q 11.4

MIC-3D-16CHE1- 13.2

13.2

12.3

T1-CE

NOTE: Support for NOTE: Support for

(Channelized E1/T1 Non-Channelized

Non-Channelized

Circuit Emulation

MIC only.

MIC)

MIC-3D-8DS3-E3, 11.4

11.4

MIC-3D-8CHDS3-

E3-B

(DS3/E3 MIC)

NOTE: You cannot run Channelized DS3 (MIC-3D-8CHDS3E3) on non-Q MPCs. Channelized DS3 is supported only on Q and EQbased MPCs.

125

Table 64: MIC/MPC1 Compatibility (Continued)

MIC Name

MPC1

MPC1E

MPC1 Q

MPC1E Q

MICMACSEC-20GE Gigabit Ethernet MIC with 256b-AES MACsec

18.3R1

MS-MIC-16G

13.2

(Multiservices MIC)

Table 65: MIC/MPC2 Compatibility

MIC Name

MPC2

MPC2E MPC2E MPC2

MPC2E MPC2

MPC2E MPC2E MPC2E

NG Q

MIC-3D-8OC --

14.1R4, 12.1

12.1R4 12.1

12.1R4 --

14.1R4,

3-2OC12-

14.2R3

ATM

with

(ATM MIC with SFP)

Junos Continu ity

15.1

MIC-3D-20G 10.1 E-SFP
(Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP)

11.2R4

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continu ity

10.1

15.1

11.2R4 10.1

11.2R4 12.2

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continu ity
15.1

126

Table 65: MIC/MPC2 Compatibility (Continued)

MIC Name

MPC2

MPC2E MPC2E MPC2

MPC2E MPC2

MPC2E MPC2E MPC2E

NG Q

MIC-3D-20G 13.2R2 E-SFP-E
(Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP (E))

13.2R2

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continu ity

13.2R2

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continu ity

15.1

MIC-3D-2XG 10.2 E-XFP
(10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with XFP)

11.2R4

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continu ity

10.2

15.1

11.2R4 10.2

11.2R4 12.2

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continu ity
15.1

MIC-3D-4XG 10.1 E-XFP
(10-Gigabit Ethernet MICs with XFP)

11.2R4

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continu ity

10.1

15.1

11.2R4 10.1

11.2R4 12.2

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continu ity
15.1

MIC-3D-40G 10.2 E-TX
(Tri-Rate MIC)

11.2R4

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continu ity

10.2

15.1

11.2R4 10.2

11.2R4 12.2

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continu ity
15.1

127

Table 65: MIC/MPC2 Compatibility (Continued)

MIC Name

MPC2

MPC2E MPC2E MPC2

MPC2E MPC2

MPC2E MPC2E MPC2E

NG Q

MIC-3D-4OC 11.4

11.4

14.1R4, 11.4

11.4

3OC12-1OC

14.2R3

48,

with

MIC-3D-8OC

Junos

3OC12-4OC

Continu

ity

(SONET/SDH

15.1

OC3/STM1

(Multi-Rate)

MICs with

SFP)

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continu ity
15.1

MIC-3D-4CO --

12.2

14.1R4,

C3-1COC12-

14.2R3

with

(Channelized OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate)

Junos Continu ity

Circuit

15.1

Emulation

MIC with

SFP)

MIC-3D-1OC 12.2

12.2

14.1R4, 12.2

12.2

14.1R4,

192-XFP

14.2R3

(SONET/SDH OC192/ STM64 MIC with XFP)

with Junos Continu ity

15.1

128

Table 65: MIC/MPC2 Compatibility (Continued)

MIC Name

MPC2

MPC2E MPC2E MPC2

MPC2E MPC2

MPC2E MPC2E MPC2E

NG Q

MIC-3D-4CH --

11.4

15.1

OC3-2CHOC

15.1

12,

with

14.1R4,

MIC-3D-8CH

flexible

14.2R3

OC3-4CHOC

queuing

with

option

Junos

Continu

MIC-4COC3-

ity

2COC12-G,

MIC-8COC3-

4COC12-G

(Channelized SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate) MICs with SFP)

MIC-3D-16C 13.2

15.1

12.3

HE1-T1-CE
(Channelized E1/T1 Circuit Emulation

NOTE: Support for NonChannelized MIC only.

with flexible queuing option

MIC)

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continu ity
15.1

129

Table 65: MIC/MPC2 Compatibility (Continued)

MIC Name

MPC2

MPC2E MPC2E MPC2

MPC2E MPC2

MPC2E MPC2E MPC2E

NG Q

MIC-3D-8DS 11.4

11.4

14.1R4, 11.4

11.4

12.2

14.1R4,

3-E3,

14.2R3

MIC-3D-8CH

with

DS3-E3-B

Junos

(DS3/E3 MIC)

Continu ity

15.1 NOTE: You

15.1

cannot run

Channelized

DS3

(MIC-3D-8C

HDS3-E3) on

non-Q MPCs.

Channelized

DS3 is

supported

only on Q

and EQ-

based MPCs.

MS-MIC-16G 13.2

13.2

14.1R4, 13.2

13.2

14.1R4,

(Multiservice s MIC)

14.2R3 with Junos

NOTE: Only one MS-

Continu ity

MIC-16G can

15.1

be installed

15.1

into any

MPC.

MICMACSEC-20 GE Gigabit Ethernet MIC with 256bAES MACsec

18.3R1

130

Table 66: MIC/MPC3 Compatibility MIC Name MIC-3D-8OC3-2OC12-ATM (ATM MIC with SFP)
MIC-3D-20GE-SFP (Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP)
MIC-3D-20GE-SFP-E (Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP (E))
MIC3-3D-1X100GE-CFP (100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with CFP)
MIC-3D-2XGE-XFP (10-Gigabit Ethernet MICs with XFP)
MIC-3D-4XGE-XFP (10-Gigabit Ethernet MICs with XFP)
MIC3-3D-10XGE-SFPP (10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP+ (10 Ports))
MIC3-3D-2X40GE-QSFPP (40-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with QSFP+)

MPC3E MPC3E NG

MPC3E NG Q

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with

Junos Continuity

15.1

12.1

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with

Junos Continuity

15.1

13.2R2 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continuity
15.1

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continuity
15.1

12.1

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with

Junos Continuity

15.1

12.2

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with

Junos Continuity

15.1

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with

Junos Continuity

15.1

12.3

14.1R4, 14.2 R3 and 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with

Junos Continuity

15.1

12.2

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with

Junos Continuity

15.1

131

Table 66: MIC/MPC3 Compatibility (Continued)

MIC Name

MPC3E MPC3E NG

MPC3E NG Q

MIC3-3D-1X100GE-CXP (100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with CXP)

12.2

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with

Junos Continuity

15.1

MIC3-100G-DWDM (100-Gigabit DWDM OTN MIC with CFP2-ACO)

15.1F5 15.1F6 17.1R1

MIC-3D-4OC3OC12-1OC48

13.3

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with

MIC-3D-8OC3OC12-4OC48

Junos Continuity

15.1

(SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate) MICs with

SFP)

MIC-3D-1OC192-XFP (SONET/SDH OC192/STM64 MIC with XFP)

13.3

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with

Junos Continuity

15.1

MIC-3D-4COC3-1COC12-CE
(Channelized OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate) Circuit Emulation MIC with SFP)

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continuity
15.1

MIC-3D-16CHE1-T1-CE (Channelized E1/T1 Circuit Emulation MIC)

15.1 with flexible

15.1

queuing option

132

Table 66: MIC/MPC3 Compatibility (Continued)

MIC Name

MPC3E MPC3E NG

MPC3E NG Q

MS-MIC-16G
(Multiservices MIC)
NOTE: On MPC3E, the installation of the Multiservices MIC (MS-MIC-16G) with MIC3-3D-2X40GE-QSFPP, MIC3-3D-10XGE-SFPP, or MIC3-3D-1X100GE-CFP does not meet the NEBS criteria.
NOTE: Only one MS-MIC-16G can be installed into any MPC.

13.2R2 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continuity
15.1

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continuity
15.1

MIC-3D-40GE-TX Tri-Rate MIC

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with

Junos Continuity

15.1

MIC-3D-4OC3OC12-1OC48, MIC-3D-8OC3OC12-4OC48 SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate) MICs with SFP

12.1

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with

Junos Continuity

15.1

MIC-3D-4CHOC3-2CHOC12,

MIC-3D-8CHOC3-4CHOC12

MIC-4COC3-2COC12-G, MIC-8COC3-4COC12-G

Channelized SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate)

MICs with SFP

15.1 with flexible queuing option

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continuity
15.1

MIC-3D-8DS3-E3, MIC-3D-8CHDS3-E3-B

12.1

DS3/E3 MIC

NOTE: You cannot run Channelized DS3 (MIC-3D-8CHDS3-E3) on non-Q MPCs. Channelized DS3 is supported only on Q and EQ-based MPCs.

14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos Continuity
15.1

MIC-MACSEC-20GE Gigabit Ethernet MIC with 256b-AES MACsec

18.3R1 18.3R1

18.3R1

133

Table 67: MIC/MPC6 Compatibility MIC Name
MIC6-10G 10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP+ (24 Ports)

MIC6-10G-OTN 10-Gigabit Ethernet OTN MIC with SFP+ (24 Ports)

MIC6-100G-CXP 100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with CXP (4 Ports)

MIC6-100G-CFP2 100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with CFP2

Table 68: MIC/MPC8 Compatibility MIC Name

MPC8E

MIC-MRATE MIC MRATE

� 15.1F5 with Junos Continuity � 16.1R1

MIC-MACSEC-MRATE

17.4

Multi-Rate Ethernet MIC

Table 69: MIC/MPC9 Compatibility MIC Name
MIC-MRATE MIC MRATE

MPC9E
� 15.1F5 with Junos Continuity � 16.1R1

MPC6E 13.3R2 13.3R3 13.3R2 13.3R3

134

Table 69: MIC/MPC9 Compatibility (Continued)

MIC Name

MPC9E

MIC-MACSEC-MRATE

17.4

Multi-Rate Ethernet MIC

Table 70: MIC/MPC10003 Compatibility MIC Name

JNP-MIC1 Multi-Rate Ethernet MIC

JNP-MIC1-MACSEC Multi-Rate Ethernet MIC

MPC10003 17.3
17.3R2

MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) Description
Modular Interface Cards (MICs) install into Modular Port Concentrators (MPCs) and provide the physical connections to various network media types. MICs allow different physical interfaces to be supported on a single line card. You can install MICs of different media types on the MPC as long as the MPC supports those MICs. MICs receive incoming packets from the network and transmit outgoing packets to the network. During this process, each MIC performs framing and high-speed signaling for its media type. Before transmitting outgoing data packets through the MIC interfaces, the MPCs encapsulate the packets received. MICs are hot-removable and hot-insertable. You can install up to two MICs in the slots in each MPC.
SEE ALSO Maintaining MX480 MICs | 365 Troubleshooting the MX480 MICs | 461 Replacing an MX480 MIC | 367

135
MX480 MIC Port and Interface Numbering
Each port on a MIC corresponds to a unique interface name in the CLI.
NOTE: Fixed configuration MPCs, that is, MPCs with built-in MICs follow the port numbering of DPCs.
In the syntax of an interface name, a hyphen (-) separates the media type from the MPC number (represented as an FPC in the CLI). The MPC slot number corresponds to the first number in the interface. The second number in the interface corresponds to the logical PIC number. The last number in the interface matches the port number on the MIC. Slashes (/) separate the MPC number from the logical PIC number and port number:
type-fpc/pic/port � type--Media type, which identifies the network device. For example:
� ge--Gigabit Ethernet interface � so--SONET/SDH interface � xe--10-Gigabit Ethernet interface For a complete list of media types, see Interface Naming Overview. � fpc--Slot in which the MPC is installed. On the MX480 router, the MPCs are represented in the CLI as FPC 0 through FPC 5. � pic--Logical PIC on the MIC, numbered 0 or 1 when installed in slot 0, and 2 or 3 when installed in slot 1. The number of logical PICs varies depending on the type of MIC. For example, a: � 20-port Gigabit Ethernet MIC has two logical PICs, numbered 0 and 1 when installed in slot 0, or
2 and 3 when installed in slot 1. � 4-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC has two logical PICs numbered 0 and 1 when installed in slot 0,
or 2 and 3 when installed in slot 1. � 100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with CFP has one logical PIC numbered 0 when installed in slot 0, or 2
when installed in slot 1. For more information on specific MICs, see "MICs Supported by MX Series Routers" on page 139 in the MX Series Interface Module Reference. � port--Port number.

136
NOTE: The MIC number is not included in the interface name.
The MX480 router supports up to six MPCs that install horizontally and are numbered from bottom to top. Each MPC accepts up to two MICs. Figure 37 on page 137 shows a 20-port Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP installed in slot 0of an MPC in slot 3.

137 NOTE: The 20-port Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP-E has a different port numbering. See Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP (E) Figure 37: MX480 MIC Interface Port Mapping
The MIC contains two logical PICs, numbered PIC 0 through PIC 1 in the CLI. Each logical PIC contains 10 ports numbered 0 through 9.

138

The following sample CLI output displays a 20-port Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP -- 3D 20x 1GE(LAN) SFP -- installed in slot 0 of an MPC in slot 3.

user@host> show chassis hardware

... FPC 3
CPU MIC 0
PIC 0 Xcvr 0 Xcvr 1 Xcvr 2 Xcvr 3 Xcvr 4 Xcvr 5 Xcvr 6 Xcvr 7 Xcvr 8
PIC 1 Xcvr 0 Xcvr 1 Xcvr 2
...

REV 28 REV 06 REV 22
REV 01 REV 01 REV 01 REV 02 REV 02 REV 02 REV 02 REV 01 REV 02
REV 01 REV 01 REV 01

750-031090 711-030884 750-028392 BUILTIN 740-011613 740-011782 740-011782 740-011613 740-011613 740-011613 740-011613 740-011613 740-011613 BUILTIN 740-011613 740-011613 740-011613

YH8181 YH9437 YD0439 BUILTIN PCE14D5 P9C280T P9C2512 AM0951SFF3Z AM0951SFF33 AM0951SFF3Y AM0951SFF4B E08H01273 AM0951SFFWK BUILTIN E08H00516 E08G03648 E08H00514

MPC Type 2 3D EQ MPC PMB 2G 3D 20x 1GE(LAN) SFP 10x 1GE(LAN) SFP SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX 10x 1GE(LAN) SFP SFP-SX SFP-SX SFP-SX

The show chassis hardware command output shows an MPC (MPC Type 2 3D EQ) installed in slot 3 and is shown as FPC 3 in the CLI. The MIC's two logical PICs -- 10x 1GE(LAN) SFP -- are shown as PIC 0 and PIC 1.
The show interfaces terse command output displays the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, that correspond to the 20 ports located on the MIC.

user@host>show interfaces terse ge-3*

Interface ge-3/0/0 ge-3/0/1 ge-3/0/2 ge-3/0/3 ge-3/0/4 ge-3/0/5 ge-3/0/6 ge-3/0/7

Admin Link Proto up down up down up down up up up up up up up up up up

Local

Remote

139

ge-3/0/8 ge-3/0/9 ge-3/1/0 ge-3/1/1 ge-3/1/2 ge-3/1/3 ge-3/1/4 ge-3/1/5 ge-3/1/6 ge-3/1/7 ge-3/1/8 ge-3/1/9

up up up down up up up up up up up down up down up down up down up down up down up down

SEE ALSO MX480 Router Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping | 9
MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) LEDs
Each MIC has LEDs located on the faceplate. For more information about LEDs on the MIC faceplate, see the "LEDs" section for each MIC in the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
SEE ALSO Maintaining MX480 MICs | 365 Troubleshooting the MX480 MICs | 461 Replacing an MX480 MIC | 367
MICs Supported by MX Series Routers
The following tables list the first supported Junos OS release for the MX Series. � Table 71 on page 140 lists the first supported Junos OS release for MICs on MX240, MX480,
MX960, and MX2008 routers.

140

� Table 72 on page 144 lists the first supported Junos OS release for MICs on MX2010 and MX2020 routers.
� Table 73 on page 147 list the first supported Junos OS release for MICs on MX5, MX10, and MX40 routers.
� Table 74 on page 150 lists the first supported Junos OS release for MICs on MX80 and MX104 routers.
� Table 75 on page 153 lists the first supported Junos OS release for MICs on MX10003 router.
Table 71: MICs Supported by MX240, MX480, MX960 and MX2008 Routers

MIC Name

MIC Model Number Ports

MX240, MX480,

MX2008 Routers

and MX960 Routers

ATM
ATM MIC with SFP MIC-3D-8OC3-2OC 8 12-ATM

12.1

15.1F7

DS3/E3 DS3/E3 MIC

MIC-3D-8DS3-E3, 8
MIC-3D-8CHDS3E3-B

11.4

15.1F7

Circuit Emulation

Channelized E1/T1 MIC-3D-16CHE1- 16

Circuit Emulation

T1-CE

MIC

12.3

15.1F7

Gigabit Ethernet
Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP

MIC-3D-20GE-SFP 20

10.1

15.1F7

Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP (E)

MIC-3D-20GE-SFP- 20 E

13.3

15.1F7

141

Table 71: MICs Supported by MX240, MX480, MX960 and MX2008 Routers (Continued)

MIC Name

MIC Model Number Ports

MX240, MX480,

MX2008 Routers

and MX960 Routers

Gigabit Ethernet

MIC-

MIC with 256b-AES MACSEC-20GE

MACsec

18.3

10-Gigabit Ethernet
10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC-3D-2XGE-XFP 2 MICs with XFP

10.2

15.1F7

10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC-3D-4XGE-XFP 4 MICs with XFP

10.1

15.1F7

10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC3-3D-10XGE- 10 MIC with SFP+ (10 SFPP Ports)

12.3

15.1F7

10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC6-10G

MIC with SFP+ (24

Ports)

15.1F7

10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC6-10G-OTN

OTN MIC with SFP+

(24 Ports)

15.1F7

40-Gigabit Ethernet

40-Gigabit Ethernet MIC3-3D-2X40GE- 2

MIC with QSFP+

QSFPP

12.2

15.1F7

100-Gigabit Ethernet

100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with CFP

MIC3-3D-1X100GE 1 -CFP

12.1

15.1F7

142

Table 71: MICs Supported by MX240, MX480, MX960 and MX2008 Routers (Continued)

MIC Name

MIC Model Number Ports

MX240, MX480,

MX2008 Routers

and MX960 Routers

100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with CXP

MIC3-3D-1X100GE 1 -CXP

12.2

15.1F7

100-Gigabit

MIC6-100G-CXP

15.1F7

Ethernet MIC with

CXP (4 Ports)

100-Gigabit

MIC6-100G-CFP2 2

15.1F7

Ethernet MIC with

CFP2

100-Gigabit DWDM OTN

100-Gigabit DWDM MIC3-100G-

OTN MIC with

DWDM

CFP2-ACO

15.1F5 15.1F6 17.1R1

15.1F7

Multi-Rate
SONET/SDH OC3/ MIC-3D-4OC3OC1 4 STM1 (Multi-Rate) 2-1OC48 MICs with SFP

11.2

15.1F7

SONET/SDH OC3/ MIC-3D-8OC3OC1 8 STM1 (Multi-Rate) 2-4OC48 MICs with SFP

11.2

15.1F7

Channelized SONET/SDH OC3/ STM1 (Multi-Rate) MICs with SFP

MIC-3D-4CHOC3-2 4 CHOC12

11.4

15.1F7

143

Table 71: MICs Supported by MX240, MX480, MX960 and MX2008 Routers (Continued)

MIC Name

MIC Model Number Ports

MX240, MX480,

MX2008 Routers

and MX960 Routers

Channelized SONET/SDH OC3/ STM1 (Multi-Rate) MICs with SFP

MIC-3D-8CHOC3-4 8 CHOC12

11.4

15.1F7

Channelized OC3/ STM1 (Multi-Rate) Circuit Emulation MIC with SFP

MIC-3D-4COC3-1C 4 OC12-CE

12.2

15.1F7

MIC MRATE (12-

MIC-MRATE

Port Multi-Rate MIC

with QSFP+)

15.1F7

Multi-Rate Ethernet MIC-MACSEC-

17.4

MIC (12-Port Multi- MRATE

Rate MACsec MIC

with QSFP+)

Tri-Rate Tri-Rate MIC

MIC-3D-40GE-TX 40

10.2

15.1F7

Services

Multiservices MIC MS-MIC-16G

13.2

15.1F7

SONET/SDH

MIC-3D-1OC192- 1

OC192/STM64 MIC XFP

with XFP

12.2

15.1F7

144

Table 72: MICs Supported by MX2010 and MX2020 Routers

MIC Name

MIC Model Number

Ports

MX2010 Routers MX2020 Routers

ATM ATM MIC with SFP

MIC-3D-8OC3-2 8 OC12-ATM

12.3

DS3/E3 DS3/E3 MIC

MIC-3D-8DS3-E3, 8
MIC-3D-8CHDS3 -E3-B

12.3

Circuit Emulation

Channelized E1/T1 Circuit MIC-3D-16CHE1- 16

�

Emulation MIC

T1-CE

Gigabit Ethernet

Gigabit Ethernet MIC with MIC-3D-20GE-

SFP

12.3

Gigabit Ethernet MIC with MIC-3D-20GE-

SFP (E)

SFP-E

13.3

10-Gigabit Ethernet

10-Gigabit Ethernet MICs MIC-3D-2XGE- 2

with XFP

XFP

12.3

10-Gigabit Ethernet MICs MIC-3D-4XGE- 4

with XFP

XFP

12.3

145

Table 72: MICs Supported by MX2010 and MX2020 Routers (Continued)

MIC Name

MIC Model Number

Ports

MX2010 Routers MX2020 Routers

10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP+ (10 Ports)

MIC3-3D-10XGE- 10 SFPP

12.3

10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC

MIC6-10G

with SFP+ (24 Ports)

13.3R2

10-Gigabit Ethernet OTN MIC with SFP+ (24 Ports)

MIC6-10G-OTN 24

13.3R3

40-Gigabit Ethernet
40-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with QSFP+

MIC3-3D-2X40G 2 E-QSFPP

12.3

100-Gigabit Ethernet

100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC MIC3-3D-1X100 1

with CFP

GE-CFP

12.3

100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC MIC3-3D-1X100 1

with CXP

GE-CXP

12.3

100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with CXP (4 Ports)

MIC6-100G-CXP 4

13.3R2

100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with CFP2

MIC6-100G-CFP2 2

13.3R3

100-Gigabit DWDM OTN

100-Gigabit DWDM OTN MIC3-100G-

MIC with CFP2-ACO

DWDM

15.1F5 15.1F6 17.1R1

146

Table 72: MICs Supported by MX2010 and MX2020 Routers (Continued)

MIC Name

MIC Model Number

Ports

MX2010 Routers MX2020 Routers

Multi-Rate
SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 MIC-3D-4OC3OC 4 (Multi-Rate) MICs with SFP 12-1OC48

12.3

SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 MIC-3D-8OC3OC 8 (Multi-Rate) MICs with SFP 12-4OC48

12.3

Channelized SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate) MICs with SFP

MIC-3D-4CHOC3 4 -2CHOC12

12.3

Channelized SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate) MICs with SFP

MIC-3D-8CHOC3 8 -4CHOC12

12.3

Channelized OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate) Circuit Emulation MIC with SFP

MIC-3D-4COC3-1 4 COC12-CE

12.3

MIC MRATE (12-Port

MIC-MRATE

Multi-Rate MIC with QSFP

� 15.1F5 with Junos Continuity
� 16.1R1 and later

Multi-Rate Ethernet MIC

MIC-MACSEC-

(12-Port Multi-Rate

MRATE

MACsec MIC with QSFP+)

17.4

Tri-Rate Tri-Rate MIC

MIC-3D-40GE-TX 40

12.3

147

Table 72: MICs Supported by MX2010 and MX2020 Routers (Continued)

MIC Name

MIC Model Number

Ports

MX2010 Routers MX2020 Routers

Services Multiservices MIC

MS-MIC-16G

13.2

SONET/SDH
SONET/SDH OC192/ STM64 MIC with XFP

MIC-3D-1OC192- 1 XFP

12.3

Table 73: MICs Supported by MX5, MX10, and MX40 Routers

MIC Name

MIC Model Number

Ports

MX5

MX10

MX40

ATM

ATM MIC with SFP

MIC-3D-8OC3- 8 2OC12-ATM

12.1

DS3/E3 DS3/E3 MIC

MIC-3D-8DS3- 8 E3,
MIC-3D-8CHDS 3-E3-B

11.4

Circuit Emulation

Channelized E1/T1 Circuit Emulation MIC

MIC-3D-16CHE 16 1-T1-CE

13.2R2

148

Table 73: MICs Supported by MX5, MX10, and MX40 Routers (Continued)

MIC Name

MIC Model Number

Ports

MX5

MX10

Channelized

MIC-3D-16CHE 16

�

E1/T1 Circuit 1-T1-CE-H

Emulation MIC

(H)

Gigabit Ethernet
Gigabit Ethernet MIC-3D-20GE- 20 MIC with SFP SFP

11.2R4

Gigabit Ethernet MIC-3D-20GE- 20 MIC with SFP SFP-E (E)

13.2R2

Gigabit Ethernet MIC-3D-20GE- 20

�

MIC with SFP SFP-EH

(EH)

10-Gigabit Ethernet

10-Gigabit Ethernet MICs with XFP

MIC-3D-2XGE- 2 XFP

11.2R4

Multi-Rate

SONET/SDH

MIC-3D-4OC3 4

OC3/STM1

OC12-1OC48

(Multi-Rate)

MICs with SFP

11.2R4

SONET/SDH

MIC-3D-8OC3 8

OC3/STM1

OC12-4OC48

(Multi-Rate)

MICs with SFP

11.2R4

MX40 �
11.2R4 13.2R2 �
11.2R4
11.2R4 11.2R4

149

Table 73: MICs Supported by MX5, MX10, and MX40 Routers (Continued)

MIC Name

MIC Model Number

Ports

MX5

MX10

Channelized SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate) MICs with SFP

MIC-3D-4CHO 4 C3-2CHOC12

11.4

MX40 11.4

Channelized SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate) MICs with SFP

MIC-3D-8CHO 8 C3-4CHOC12

11.4

Channelized OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate) Circuit Emulation MIC with SFP

MIC-3D-4COC3 4 -1COC12-CE

Channelized OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate) Circuit Emulation MIC with SFP (H)

MIC-4COC3-1C OC12-CE-H

12.2

Tri-Rate

Tri-Rate MIC

MIC-3D-40GE- 40

�

11.2R4

Services

Multiservices

MS-MIC-16G

MIC

13.2 Rear slot only.

150

Table 73: MICs Supported by MX5, MX10, and MX40 Routers (Continued)

MIC Name

MIC Model Number

Ports

MX5

MX10

SONET/SDH OC192/STM64 MIC with XFP

MIC-3D-1OC19 1 2-XFP

12.2

Table 74: MICs Supported by MX80 and MX104 Routers

MIC Name

MIC Model Number Ports

MX80

ATM

ATM MIC with SFP MIC-3D-8OC3-2OC 8

12.1

12-ATM

DS3/E3 DS3/E3 MIC

MIC-3D-8DS3-E3, 8
MIC-3D-8CHDS3E3-B

11.4

Circuit Emulation

Channelized E1/T1 MIC-3D-16CHE1- 16

Circuit Emulation

T1-CE

MIC

13.2R2

Channelized E1/T1 MIC-3D-16CHE1- 16

�

Circuit Emulation

T1-CE-H

MIC (H)

Gigabit Ethernet

MIC-3D-20GE-SFP 20

10.2

MIC with SFP

MX40 12.2 MX104 13.3 13.3
13.2R2 13.2R2 13.2R2

151

Table 74: MICs Supported by MX80 and MX104 Routers (Continued)

MIC Name

MIC Model Number Ports

MX80

Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP (E)

MIC-3D-20GE-SFP- 20 E

13.2R2

Gigabit Ethernet

MIC-3D-20GE-SFP- 20

�

MIC with SFP (EH) EH

Gigabit Ethernet

MIC-

18.3

MIC with 256b-AES MACSEC-20GE

MACsec

10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC-3D-2XGE-XFP 2

10.2

MICs with XFP

Multi-Rate

SONET/SDH OC3/ MIC-3D-4OC3OC1 4

11.2

STM1 (Multi-Rate) 2-1OC48

MICs with SFP

SONET/SDH OC3/ MIC-3D-8OC3OC1 8

11.2

STM1 (Multi-Rate) 2-4OC48

MICs with SFP

Channelized

MIC-3D-4CHOC3-2 4

11.4

SONET/SDH OC3/ CHOC12

STM1 (Multi-Rate)

MICs with SFP

Channelized

MIC-3D-8CHOC3-4 8

11.4

SONET/SDH OC3/ CHOC12

STM1 (Multi-Rate)

MICs with SFP

MX104 13.2R2 13.2R2 18.3 13.2R2
13.3 13.3 13.3
13.3

152

Table 74: MICs Supported by MX80 and MX104 Routers (Continued)

MIC Name

MIC Model Number Ports

MX80

Channelized OC3/ MIC-3D-4COC3-1C 4

12.2

STM1 (Multi-Rate) OC12-CE

Circuit Emulation

MIC with SFP

MX104 13.2R2

Channelized OC3/ MIC-4COC3-1COC -

13.2R2

STM1 (Multi-Rate) 12-CE-H

Circuit Emulation

MIC with SFP (H)

Tri-Rate

Tri-Rate MIC

MIC-3D-40GE-TX 40

10.2

13.2R2

Services

Multiservices MIC MS-MIC-16G

13.2

13.3R2

Rear slot only. Supported on the modular MX80 and fixed MX80-48T

NOTE: Starting From Junos OS 13.3R3, 14.1R2, and 14.2R1, MX104 supports only two Multiservices MICs.

SONET/SDH

MIC-3D-1OC192- 1

OC192/STM64 MIC XFP

with XFP

12.2

13.3

153

Table 75: MICs Supported by MX10003 Router

MIC Name

MIC Model Number

Multi-Rate
Multi-Rate Ethernet MIC (12-Port Multi-Rate MIC with QSFP+)

JNP-MIC1

Multi-Rate Ethernet MIC (12-Port Multi-Rate MACsec MIC with QSFP+)

JNP-MIC1-MACSEC

Ports 12 12

MX10003 17.3 17.3R2

SEE ALSO MX Series MIC Overview MIC/MPC Compatibility
MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) Description
IN THIS SECTION MPC Components | 156
Modular Port Concentrators (MPCs) provide packet forwarding services. The MPCs are inserted into a slot in a router. Modular Interface Cards (MICs) provide the physical interfaces and install into the MPCs. You can install up to two MICs of different media types on the same MPC as long as the MPC supports those MICs. A specialized fixed configuration MPC provides higher port density over MICs and combines packet forwarding and Ethernet interfaces onto a single line card. The fixed configuration MPC is inserted into a slot in a router and contains no slots for MICs.

154
MICs receive incoming packets from the network and transmit outgoing packets to the network. During this process, each MIC performs framing and high-speed signaling for its media type. Before transmitting outgoing data packets through the MIC interfaces, the MPCs encapsulate the packets received. Each MPC is equipped with up to four Junos Trio chipsets, which perform control functions tailored to the MPC's media type. The MPCs interface with the power supplies and Switch Control Boards (SCBs). You must install redundant SCBs to support full line-rate.
The MX480 router supports up to six MPCs. You must install a high-capacity fan tray to use an MPC. For power requirements, see "Calculating Power Requirements for MX480 Routers" on page 213.
The router has six dedicated line card slots for DPCs, MPCs, or FPCs that are numbered 0 through 5 bottom to top. An MPC can be installed in any slot on the router that supports MPCs. You can install any combination of line card types in the router.
When a slot is not occupied by an MPC or other line card, you must insert a blank DPC panel to fill the empty slot and ensure proper cooling of the system.
MPCs are hot-removable and hot-insertable. When you install an MPC in an operating router, the Routing Engine downloads the MPC software, the MPC runs its diagnostics, and the Packet Forwarding Engines housed on the MPC are enabled. Forwarding on other MPCs continues uninterrupted during this process.

155
Figure 39 on page 156 shows a typical MPC supported on the MX480 router. For more information about MPCs, see the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
Figure 38: Typical MPC Supported on the MX Series Router

156 Figure 39: MPC Installed Horizontally in the MX480 Router
MPC Components
Each MPC consists of the following components: � MPC card carrier, which includes two MIC slots (excludes the fixed configuration MPC). � Fabric interfaces. � Two Gigabit Ethernet interfaces that allow control information, route information, and statistics to be
sent between the Routing Engine and the CPU on the MPCs. � Two interfaces from the SCBs that enable the MPCs to be powered on and controlled. � Physical MPC connectors. � Up to four Junos Trio chipsets, which perform control functions tailored to the MPC's media type. � Midplane connectors and power circuitry. � Processor subsystem, which includes a 1.5-GHz CPU, system controller, and 1 GB of SDRAM. � Online button which takes the MPC online or offline when pressed.

157
� OK/Fail LED on the MPC faceplate. For more information about LEDs on the MPC faceplate, see the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
Two LEDs, located on the craft interface above the MPC, display the status of the line cards and are labeled OK and FAIL.
SEE ALSO MX480 Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) | 291 Replacing an MX480 MPC | 379
MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) LEDs
Two LEDs, located on the craft interface above the MPC, display the status of the line cards and are labeled OK and FAIL. For more information about the line card LEDs on the craft interface, see "DPC and MPC LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface" on page 15. Each MPC also has LEDs located on the faceplate. For more information about LEDs on the MPC faceplate, see the "LEDs" section for each MPC in the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
SEE ALSO Maintaining MX480 MPCs | 376 Troubleshooting the MX480 MPCs | 462 Replacing an MX480 MPC | 379
MPCs Supported by MX Series Routers
Table 76 on page 158 lists the MPCs and their first supported Junos OS release on MX240, MX480, MX960, MX2008, MX2010, MX2020, and MX10003 routers.

158

Table 76: MPCs Supported by MX240, MX480, MX960, MX2008, MX2010, MX2020, and MX10003 Routers

MPC Name

MPC Model Number

First Junos OS Release on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX2008 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX2010 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX2020 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX1000 3 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX1000 8 Routers

Fixed Configuration MPCs

MPC-3D-16X MPC-3D-

10.0R2

15.1F7 12.3

12.3

�

GE-SFPP

16XGE-SFP

Multiservices MS-MPC

13.2R4

15.1F7 15.1

15.1

�

MPC

32x10GE

MPC4E-3D- 12.3R2

15.1F7 12.3R2

12.3R2

�

MPC4E

32XGE-SFPP

2x100GE + MPC4E-3D- 12.3R2

15.1F7 12.3R2

12.3R2

�

8x10GE MPC4E

2CGE-8XGE

6x40GE +

MPC5E-40G1 13.3R2

15.1F7 13.3R2

13.3R2

�

24x10GE

MPC5E

6x40GE +

MPC5EQ-40 13.3R2

15.1F7 13.3R2

13.3R2

�

24x10GE

G10G

MPC5EQ

2x100GE + MPC5E-100G 13.3R3

15.1F7 13.3R3

13.3R3

�

4x10GE

10G

MPC5E

159

Table 76: MPCs Supported by MX240, MX480, MX960, MX2008, MX2010, MX2020, and MX10003 Routers (Continued)

MPC Name

MPC Model Number

First Junos OS Release on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX2008 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX2010 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX2020 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX1000 3 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX1000 8 Routers

2x100GE + MPC5EQ-100 13.3R3

15.1F7 13.3R3

13.3R3

�

4x10GE

G10G

MPC5EQ

MPC7E-

� 15.1F4

15.1F7 � 15.1F4 � 15.1F4 �

�

MRATE

with

Junos

Continuity

Continu

� 16.1R1

ity

and later

� 16.1R1 � 16.1R1

and

later

MPC7E-10G MPC7E-10G � 15.1F5

15.1F7 � 15.1F5 � 15.1F5 �

�

with

Junos

Continuity

Continu

� 16.1R1

ity

and later

� 16.1R1 � 16.1R1

and

later

MPC10E-10C -MRATE

19.2R1

�

MPC10E-15C -MRATE

19.1R1

�

MPCs

160

Table 76: MPCs Supported by MX240, MX480, MX960, MX2008, MX2010, MX2020, and MX10003 Routers (Continued)

MPC Name

MPC Model Number

First Junos OS Release on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX2008 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX2010 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX2020 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX1000 3 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX1000 8 Routers

MPC1

MXMPC1-3D

10.2

15.1F7 12.3

12.3

�

MPC1E

MXMPC1E-3D

11.2R4

15.1F7 12.3

12.3

�

MPC1 Q

MXMPC1-3D-Q

10.2

15.1F7 12.3

12.3

�

MPC1E Q

MXMPC1E-3D-Q

11.2R4

15.1F7 12.3

12.3

�

MPC2

MXMPC2-3D

10.1

15.1F7 12.3

12.3

�

MPC2E

MXMPC2E-3D

11.2R4

15.1F7 12.3

12.3

�

MPC2 Q

MXMPC2-3D-Q

10.1

15.1F7 12.3

12.3

�

MPC2E Q

MXMPC2E-3D-Q

11.2R4

15.1F7 12.3

12.3

�

MPC2 EQ

MX-

10.1

MPC2-3D-EQ

15.1F7 12.3

12.3

�

161

Table 76: MPCs Supported by MX240, MX480, MX960, MX2008, MX2010, MX2020, and MX10003 Routers (Continued)

MPC Name

MPC Model Number

First Junos OS Release on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX2008 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX2010 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX2020 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX1000 3 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX1000 8 Routers

MX-

MPC2E EQ MPC2E-3D- 11.2R4

15.1F7 12.3

12.3

�

MPC2E P

MXMPC2E-3D-P

12.2

15.1F7 12.3

12.3

�

MPC2E NG MX-

14.1R4,

MPC2E-3D- 14.2R3 and

14.2R3 and 14.2R3 and

Junos

15.1F7 Junos

Junos

�

Continuity

Continuity Continuity

15.1

MPC2E NG Q MX-

14.1R4,

MPC2E-3D- 14.2R3 and

14.2R3 and 14.2R3 and

NG-Q

Junos

15.1F7 Junos

Junos

�

Continuity

Continuity Continuity

15.1

MPC3E

MXMPC3E-3D

12.1

15.1F7 12.3

12.3

�

MPC3E-3D- MX-

14.1R4,

MPC3E-3D- 14.2R3 and

14.2R3 and 14.2R3 and

Junos

15.1F7 Junos

Junos

�

Continuity

Continuity Continuity

15.1

162

Table 76: MPCs Supported by MX240, MX480, MX960, MX2008, MX2010, MX2020, and MX10003 Routers (Continued)

MPC Name

MPC Model Number

First Junos OS Release on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX2008 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX2010 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX2020 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX1000 3 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX1000 8 Routers

MPC3E-3D- MX-

14.1R4,

NG-Q

MPC3E-3D- 14.2R3 and

14.2R3 and 14.2R3 and

NG-Q

Junos

15.1F7 Junos

Junos

�

Continuity

Continuity Continuity

15.1

MPC6E

MX2KMPC6E

�

15.1F7 13.3R2

13.3R2

�

MPC8E

MX2KMPC8E

�

� 15.1F5 � 15.1F5

with

Junos

Continu

15.1F7

ity

�

� 16.1R1 and later

MPC9E

MX2KMPC9E

�

� 15.1F5 � 15.1F5

with

Junos

Continu

15.1F7

ity

�

� 16.1R1 and later

163

Table 76: MPCs Supported by MX240, MX480, MX960, MX2008, MX2010, MX2020, and MX10003 Routers (Continued)

MPC Name

MPC Model Number

First Junos OS Release on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX2008 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX2010 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX2020 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX1000 3 Routers

First Junos OS Release on MX1000 8 Routers

MX10003

MX10003-

MPC (Multi- LC2103

�

Rate)

�

17.3

MX2KMPC11E Modular Port Concentrator

MX2KMPC11E

� 19.3R2 and later 19.3 releases

� 20.1R1 � 20.1R1

NOTE:

The

MX2K-

MX2K- -

MPC11

E MPC

is not

support

ed in

any

19.4

releases

SEE ALSO
MX Series MPC Overview MX Series MPC Overview MX Series MIC Overview MICs Supported by MX Series Routers

164
MIC/MPC Compatibility Pathfinder: Hardware Supported by Junos Continuity Software
MX480 Application Services Modular Line Card Description
IN THIS SECTION MX480 AS MLC Function | 165 AS MLC Components | 166 MX480 SCB, Power Supply, and Cooling System Requirements for AS MLC | 166
The Application Services Modular Line Card (AS MLC) is an X86-based card for MX960, MX480, and MX240 routers to deliver integrated application service solutions. The first application that network operators can take advantage of is the Junos Content Encore system, a high-throughput, solid state storage platform for media rich content delivery. Additionally, the AS MLC can serve as the platform for Juniper Networks JunosV App Engine, powering a host of network applications directly embedded into your MX Series 5G Universal Routing Platforms.

165 The AS MLC is modular and decouples CPU and storage in individual field-upgradeable units. The AS MLCs are designed to enable application throughput up to 50 Gbps and a storage capacity of 400 gigabytes (GB) of NAND Flash. Figure 40: Application Services Modular Line Card (AS MLC)
MX480 AS MLC Function
The AS MLC provides modular processing and modular storage. Installed on the AS MLC, the Junos Content Encore system operates as a caching application, in either HTTP reverse proxy mode or HTTP transparent proxy mode, to manage client requests for content and the distribution of the content to clients from origin servers. In the future, the AS MLC will run other Juniper Networks router services and applications, and serve as a virtualized platform for third-party applications. The AS MLC provides Ethernet switching and high-speed fabric interface to MX routers. Graceful Routing Engine switchover is also supported on the AS MLC.

166
Integrated with application forwarding on MX Series routers, the AS MLC provides increased service flexibility with reduced power and space requirements for the network infrastructure.
AS MLC Components
Each AS MLC consists of the following components: � AS MLC Modular Carrier Card (AS MCC), which fits horizontally in front of the MX480 router,
includes two slots for the Application Services Modular Storage Card (AS MSC) and Application Services Modular Processing Card (AS MXC) � AS MXC with 64 GB RAM for processing � AS MSC with 400 GB of NAND Flash capacity for modular storage
NOTE: The AS MCC, AS MXC, and AS MSC are hot-removable and hot-insertable.
� Switch fabric interfaces to the chassis � XM ASIC chip, which owns and manages the packet data memory built from external DDR3 memory
chips, the fabric queuing system, a portion of the WAN queuing system, and the host queuing system � LU ASIC chip, which performs all functions relating to header processing including input processing,
route lookup, classification, filtering, policing, accounting, encapsulation, and statistics � Midplane connectors and power circuitry � Processor Mezzanine Board (PMB), which contains the host processor and supporting peripherals. � LED on the AS MCC, which displays the status of the AS MLC
MX480 SCB, Power Supply, and Cooling System Requirements for AS MLC
Each MX480 router requires specific SCB, power supply, and cooling system models to run the AS MLC: � SCB--Enhanced MX Switch Control Board (SCBE-MX). See MX480 SCBE-MX Description for details � Power supply:
� 2520W AC power supply--Model PWR-MX480-2520-AC � 2400W DC power supply--Model PWR-MX480-2400-DC � Power requirement for AS MLC: � AS MCC--191W

167
� AS MXC--259W � AS MSC--50W � Cooling system--Required fan and fan tray models: � Fans:
� For AC power supply: PWR-FAN-MX480-AC-HC-U and PWR-MX480-2520-AC-S � For DC power supply: PWR-FAN-MX480-DC-HC-U and PWR-MX480-2520-DC-S � Fan tray--FFANTRAY-MX480-HC
SEE ALSO Replacing an MX480 AS MLC | 391 Replacing an MX480 AS MSC | 395 Replacing an MX480 AS MXC | 400
MX480 Application Services Modular Storage Card Description
Application Services Modular Storage Card (AS MSC) is a NAND Flash��based card that is inserted into the upper slot of the Application Services Modular Line Card (AS MLC). The AS MSC (see Figure 41 on page 168) serves as the second tier caching storage for platforms such as the Junos Content Encore system. This card is equivalent to a PIC or a Modular Interface Card (MIC) and provides a maximum of 3.6 Gbps read and 2 Gbps of write memory. The AS MSC has the following features: � 400 GB NAND Flash memory � Up to 48K of write cycle � Multilevel cell (MLC) NAND memory support � Best-in-class NAND controller for maximum performance and reliability AS MSCs are hot-removable and hot-insertable. One AS MSC can be installed in the top slot of each AS MLC. Each AS MSC has these components: � SATA-3 controller--An eight-port, 6 Gbps SAS/SATA controller.

168 � NAND Flash controller-- NAND Flash and NAND Flash controller are used in an AS MSC. � Control plane--Inter-integrated circuit control plane that allows Peripheral Component Interconnect
Express (PCIe) control. � LEDs--Two LEDs display the status of the AS MSC and storage. � Online/offline button--To power on or power off the AS MSC. Figure 41: Application Services Modular Storage Card
SEE ALSO Replacing an MX480 AS MSC | 395
MX480 Application Services Modular Processing Card Description
The Application Services Modular Processing Card (AS MXC) is a pluggable X86-based card that can be inserted into the lower slot of the Application Services Modular Line Card (AS MLC). The AS MXC serves as the processing card for the Junos Content Encore system and contains the two X86, Intel 8-core processors with interface ability greater than 80 Gbps. The AS MXC (see Figure 42 on page 169) is equivalent to a PIC or MIC (Modular Interface Card). AS MXCs are hot-removable and hot-insertable. One MXC can be installed in the lower slot of each AS MLC. Each MXC has these components:

169
� Two 8-core Intel processors--Contains eight execution cores with Ring Interconnect architecture. Each core supports two threads, up to 16 threads per socket.
� 64 GB DRAM--On DIMM sockets. � LEDs--Two LEDs on the faceplate display the CPU and application status.
Figure 42: Application Services Modular Processing Card (AS MXC)

SEE ALSO Replacing an MX480 AS MXC | 400

MX480 AS MSC LEDs

Two LEDs (CPU and AP) indicate the status of the AS MSC and are located on the AS MSC. Table 77 on page 169 describes the functions of the AS MSC LEDs.
Table 77: AS MSC LEDs

Label

Color

State

Description

CPU

Green

On steadily

AS MSC operates normally.

170

Table 77: AS MSC LEDs (Continued)

Label

Color

State

Description

Red

On steadily

AS MSC has an error or has failed.

�

Off

AS MSC is offline.

Green

On steadily

AS MSC storage operation is normal.

Red

On steadily

AS MSC storage operation has an error.

�

Off

AS MSC storage operation is not activated.

SEE ALSO Replacing an MX480 AS MSC | 395

MX480 AS MXC LEDs

Two LEDs (CPU and AP) indicate the status of the AS MXC and are located on the AS MXC. Table 78 on page 170 describes the functions of the AS MXC LEDs.
Table 78: AS MXC LEDs

Label

Color

State

Description

CPU

Green

On steadily

AS MXC operates normally.

Red

On steadily

AS MXC has an error or has failed.

�

Off

AS MXC is offline.

171

Table 78: AS MXC LEDs (Continued)

Label

Color

State

Description

Green

On steadily

AS MXC applications operation is normal.

Red

On steadily

AS MXC applications operation has an error.

�

Off

AS MXC applications are not activated.

SEE ALSO Replacing an MX480 AS MXC | 400
Services Processing Card--MX-SPC3 Services Card
IN THIS SECTION MX-SPC3 Services Card Overview and Support on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers | 171 MX-SPC3 Services Card | 173

MX-SPC3 Services Card Overview and Support on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers
The MX-SPC3 Services Card is a Services Processing Card (SPC) that provides additional processing power to run Next Gen Services. The MX-SPC3 contains two Services Processing Units (SPUs) with 128 GB of memory per SPU. Line cards such as DPCs, MPCs, and MICs, intelligently distribute all traffic traversing the router to the SPUs to have services processing applied to it. Next Gen Services provide the best of both routing and security features on MX Series routers MX240, MX480, and MX960. All Next Gen Services are provided by the MX-SPC3 Services Card. Next Gen Services provide capabilities for manipulating traffic before it's delivered to its destination.

172

NOTE: The only services card that supports Next Gen Services is the MX-SPC3.

Table 79 on page 172 shows the SPC and its first supported Junos OS release on MX240, MX480, and MX960, routers.
Table 79: MX-SPC3 Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers

SPC Name

SPC Model Number First Junos OS Release on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers

MX-SPC3 Services Card JNP-SPC3

19.3R2

The MX-SPC3 services card is compatible end-to-end with the MX Series Switch Fabrics, Routing Engines and MPC line cards for MX240, MX480, and MX960 routers. See Table 80 on page 172
Table 80: MX-SPC3 Services Card Compatibility with MX Series Switch Fabrics, Routing Engines and MPC Line Cards

Switch Fabric

Route Engine

MPC Line Cards

SCBE

RE-S-1800X4-16G-UPG-BB RE-S-1800X4-32G-UB

MPC2E-3D MPC2-3D-NG MPC3E and MPC3E-3D-NG MPC4E-3D MPC-3D-16XGE

173

Table 80: MX-SPC3 Services Card Compatibility with MX Series Switch Fabrics, Routing Engines and MPC Line Cards (Continued)

Switch Fabric

Route Engine

MPC Line Cards

SCBE2

RE-S-1800X4-16G-UPG-BB RE-S-1800X4-32G-UB RE-S-X6-64G-UB RE-S-X6-64G-S RE-S-X6-64G-S-R RE-S-X6-64G-S-BB RE-S-X6-128G-S-S RE-S-X6-128G-S-R RE-S-X6-128G-S-BB

MPC2E-3D MPC2-3D-NG MPC3E and MPC3E-3D-NG MPC4E-3D MPC5E and MPC5EQ MPC7E and MPC7EQ MPC-3D-16XGE

SEE ALSO Protocols and Applications Supported by MX-SPC3 Services Card
MX-SPC3 Services Card
The MX-SPC3 Services Card is supported on MX240, MX480, and MX960 routers. It provides additional processing power to run the Next Gen Services. It contains two Services Processing Units (SPUs) with 128 GB of memory per SPU. Line cards such as DPCs, MICs, and MPCs intelligently distribute all traffic traversing the router to the SPUs to have services processing applied to it (see Figure 43 on page 174).

174
You can install the MX-SPC3 in any of the slots that are not reserved for Switch Control Board (SCB). If a slot is not occupied by a card, you must install a blank panel to shield the empty slot and to allow cooling air to circulate properly through the device.
Figure 43: MX-SPC3 Services Card

Software release

� Junos OS Release 19.3R2 and later

Description

Services Processing Card (SPC) with two SPUs of 256 GB memory. � Power requirement: 650 W maximum � Weight: Approximately 18 lb (8.3 kg)

175

Hardware features

� Two 10�Gigabit Ethernet small form-factor pluggable plus (SFP+) chassis cluster control ports for connecting multiple devices into a redundant chassis cluster.
� Fabric interfaces � One Gigabit Ethernet switch that provides control connectivity to the Routing
Engine. � Two interfaces from the SCBs that enable the boards to be powered on and
controlled. � Physical SPC connectors � Midplane connectors and power circuitry � Each SPU includes:
� Two 2.3-GHz CPUs � One Crypto Engine � 128 GB memory � Two 128 GB solid state-drives (SSDs). � LEDs on the faceplate that indicate the SPC and SPU status.

Supported Slots

� MX240�Any slot, except the bottom slot 0 ( ) which is reserved for SCB/RE.

� MX480�Any slot, except the bottom slots 0 ( SCB/RE.

) or 1 (

) which are reserved for

� MX960�Any slot, except slot 11 ( reserved for SCB/RE.

) , and slots 0 (

) or 1 (

) which are

Compatibility

The MX-SPC3 services card is compatible end-to-end with the MX Series Switch Fabrics, Routing Engines and MPC line cards. See Table 81 on page 177:

LEDs

176
OK/FAIL LED, one bicolor: � Steady green�The SPC is operating normally. � Red�The SPC has failed and is not operating normally. � Off�The SPC is powered down. STATUS LED, one tricolor for each SPU SPU 0 and SPU 1: � Off�The SPU is offline. � Blinking Amber�The SPU is initializing. � Green�The SPU initialization is done and it is operating normally. � Red�The SPU has encountered an error or a failure. SERVICE LED, one tricolor for each SPU SPU 0 and SPU 1: � Off�The SPU is offline. � Blinking Red�The SPU initialization is done. � Blinking Amber�Service is initializing on the SPU. � Green�Service is running on the SPU under acceptable load. � Solid Red�Service encountered an error or a failure. HA LED, one tricolor: � Green�Clustering is operating normally. All cluster members and monitored links are
available, and no error conditions are detected. � Red�A critical alarm is present on clustering. A cluster member is missing or
unreachable, or the other node is no longer part of a cluster because it has been disabled by the dual membership and detection recovery process in reaction to a control-link or fabric-link failure. � Amber�All cluster members are present, but an error condition has compromised the performance and resiliency of the cluster. The reduced bandwidth could cause packets to be dropped or could result in reduced resiliency because a single point of failure might exist. The error condition might be caused by: � The loss of chassis cluster links which causes an interface monitoring failure.

177

� An error in an SPU or NPU.
� Failure of the spu-monitoring or cold-sync-monitoring processes.
� A chassis cluster IP monitoring failure.
� Off�The node is not configured for clustering or it has been disabled by the dual membership and detection recovery process in reaction to a control link or fabric link failure.
LINK/ACT LED, one for each of the two ports CHASSIS CLUSTER CONTROL 0 and CHASSIS CLUSTER CONTROL 1:
� Green�Chassis cluster control port link is active.
� Off�No link.

Table 81: MX-SPC3 Services Card Compatibility with MX Series Switch Fabrics, Routing Engines and MPC Line Cards

Switch Fabric

Route Engine

MPC Line Cards

SCBE

RE-S-1800X4-16G-UPG-BB RE-S-1800X4-32G-UB

MPC2E-3D MPC2-3D-NG MPC3E and MPC3E-3D-NG MPC4E-3D MPC-3D-16XGE

178

Table 81: MX-SPC3 Services Card Compatibility with MX Series Switch Fabrics, Routing Engines and MPC Line Cards (Continued)

Switch Fabric

Route Engine

MPC Line Cards

SCBE2

RE-S-1800X4-16G-UPG-BB RE-S-1800X4-32G-UB RE-S-X6-64G-UB RE-S-X6-64G-S RE-S-X6-64G-S-R RE-S-X6-64G-S-BB RE-S-X6-128G-S-S RE-S-X6-128G-S-R RE-S-X6-128G-S-BB

MPC2E-3D MPC2-3D-NG MPC3E and MPC3E-3D-NG MPC4E-3D MPC5E and MPC5EQ MPC7E and MPC7EQ MPC-3D-16XGE

Table 82 on page 178 provides a summary of Next Gen Services supported by MX-SPC3. Table 82: Next Gen Services Supported by MX-SPC3 Services Card
Next Gen Services Supported by MX-SPC3 Services Card

19.3R2

Basic-NAT44

Basic-NAT66

Dynamic-NAT44

Carrier Grade NAT

Static Destination NAT Basic-NAT-PT

NAPT-PT

NAPT44

179

Table 82: Next Gen Services Supported by MX-SPC3 Services Card (Continued)
Next Gen Services Supported by MX-SPC3 Services Card

NAPT66

Port Block Allocation

Deterministic-nat44 and nat64

End Point Independent Mapping (EIM)/End Point

Independent Filtering (EIF)

Persistent NAT � Application Pool Pairing (APP)

Twice-NAT44 � Basic, Dynamic and NAPT

NAT64

XLAT-464

NPTv6

20.1R1

Port Control Protocol (PCP) � v1 and v2

20.2R1

DS-Lite

NAT46

Stateful Firewall Services

19.3R2

180

Table 82: Next Gen Services Supported by MX-SPC3 Services Card (Continued)
Next Gen Services Supported by MX-SPC3 Services Card

Intrusion Detection Services (IDS)

Traffic Load Balancer

DNS Request Filtering

Aggregated Multiservices Interfaces

Inter-chassis High Availability

19.3R2

CGNAT, Stateful Firewall, and IDS Flows

URL Filtering

20.1R1

See Protocols and Applications Supported by MX-SPC3 Services Card for information about the protocols and applications that this SPC3 supports.

SEE ALSO MX-SPC3 Services Card Overview and Support on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers
MX-Series Switch Control Board (SCB) Description
IN THIS SECTION CLI Identification | 183 Power Requirements for Switch Control Boards | 185

181
At the heart of the MX Series 5G Universal Routing Platform is the Switch and Control Board (SCB). The SCB is a single-slot card and has a carrier for the routing engine in the front. It has three primary functions: switch data between the line cards, control the chassis, and house the routing engine.
The MX-Series SCB:
� Controls power to MPCs
� Manages clocking, resets and boots
� Monitors and controls systems functions, such as the fan speed, Power Distribution Module (PDM) status, and the system front panel.
The switch fabric is Integrated into the SCB, interconnecting all the DPCs and MPCs within the chassis and supporting up to 48 Packet Forwarding Engines. The routing engine installs directly into the SCB.
The number of SCBs supported varies, depending on the MX chassis and the level of redundancy. The MX240 and MX480 require two SCBs for 1+1 redundancy, whereas the MX960 requires three SCBs for 2+1 redundancy.
There are four generations of SCBs for the MX Series 5G Universal Routing Platform: SCB-MX, SCBEMX, SCBE2-MX, and SCBE3-MX.
� SCB-MX is the first-generation switch control board. The SCB-MX is designed to work with firstgeneration DPC line cards.
� The SCBE-MX is the second generation switch control board and is designed specifically for use with MPC3E line cards to provide full line-rate performance and redundancy without a loss of bandwidth.
� The SCBE2-MX provides improved fabric performance for high-capacity line cards using the third generation fabric XF2 chip (MPC4E, MPC5E, MPC2/3 NG, and MPC7E).
� The SCBE3-MX Enhanced Switch Control Board provides improved fabric performance and bandwidth capabilities for high-capacity line cards using the ZF-based switch fabric.
Table 83 on page 182 compares the SCB capacities of the MX Series 5G Universal Routing Platforms.
Table 84 on page 183 lists the supported routing engines per SCB.

182

Table 83: Switch Control Board Capacities for MX Series 5G Universal Routing Platforms (Full-Duplex)

Description

Fabric Bandwidth Per Slot

MX240 Fabric Bandwidth

MX480 Fabric Bandwidth

MX960 Fabric Bandwidth

Enhanced MX Switch Control Board (SCBE3-MX)

Up to 1.5 Tbps (nonredundant fabric configuration with MPC10E line cards); 1 Tbps (redundant fabric configuration with MPC10E line cards)

Up to 6 Tbps

Up to 18 Tbps

Up to 33 Tbps

Enhanced MX Switch Control Board (SCBE2-MX)

Up to 480 Gbps (nonredundant fabric configuration); 340 Gbps (redundant fabric configuration)

Up to 1.92 Tbps Up to 5.76 Tbps Up to 10.56 Tbps

Enhanced MX Switch Control Board (SCBE-MX)

Up to 240 Gbps (nonredundant fabric configuration); 160 Gbps (redundant fabric configuration)

Up to 930 Gbps Up to 2.79 Tbps Up to 5.25 Tbps

Switch Control Board (SCB-MX)

Up to 240 Gbps (nonredundant fabric configuration); 120 Gbps (redundant fabric configuration)

Up to 465 Gbps Up to 1.39 Tbps Up to 2.6 Tbps

183

Table 84: Supported Routing Engines for MX Series 5G Universal Routing Platforms Switch Control Boards

Switch Control Board

First Supported Routing Engines

SCBE3-MX

RE-S-1800x2 RE-S-1800x4 RE-S-X6-64G RE-S-X6-128G RE-S-X6-64G-LT

SCBE2-MX

RE-S-1300 (EOLed) RE-S-2000 (EOLed) RE-S-1800 (all variants) RE-S-X6-64G RE-S-X6-128G

SCBE-MX

RE-S-1300 (EOLed) RE-S-2000 (EOLed) RE-S-1800 (all variants)

SCB-MX

RE-S-1300 (EOLed) RE-S-2000 (EOLed) RE-S-1800

CLI Identification
The SCBs are identified in the CLI as:

184

SCB Model SCB-MX SCBE-MX SCBE2-MX SCBE3-MX

CLI Identification MX SCB Enhanced MX SCB SCBE2-MX-S SCBE3-MX-S

user@host> show chassis hardware | match SCB

Item Version Part Number Serial Number Description

CB0 REV 07 710-021523 ABBC8281

MX SCB

CB1 REV 07 710-021523 ABBC8323

MX SCB

CB2 REV 07 710-021523 ABBD1410

MX SCB

user@host> show chassis hardware models | match SCBE

Item Version Part Number Serial Number Description

CB0 REV 02 750-031391 YE8505

Enhanced MX SCB

CB1 REV 07 710-031391 YL6769

Enhanced MX SCB

CB2 REV 07 710-031391 YE8492

Enhanced MX SCB

user@host> show chassis hardware models | match SCBE2

Item Version Part Number Serial Number Description

CB0 REV 01 750-062572 CAGN2123

SCBE2-MX-S

CB1 REV 07 750-062572 CAGN2456

SCBE2-MX-S

CB2 REV 07 750-062572 CAGN2789

SCBE2-MX-S

user@host> show chassis hardware models | match SCBE3

Item

Version Part number Serial number

CB 0

REV 23 750-070866 CALH6007

FRU model number SCBE3-MX-S

185

CB 1

REV 23 750-070866 CALH6017

SCBE3-MX-S

CB 2

REV 23 750-070866 CALH6015

SCBE3-MX-S

Power Requirements for Switch Control Boards

Component SCB-MX SCBE-MX SCBE2-MX SCBE3-MX

Part Number SCB-MX (applies to MX240, MX480, and MX960) SCBE-MX (applies to MX240, MX480, and MX960) SCBE2-MX (applies to MX240, MX480, and MX960) SCBE3-MX (applies to MX240, MX480, and MX960)

Maximum Power Requirement
185 W at 55� C 160 W at 40� C 155 W at 25� C
160 W at 55� C 130 W at 40� C 120 W at 25� C
185 W at 55� C 160 W at 40� C 155 W at 25� C
275 W at 55� C 260 W at 40� C 245 W at 25 C�

2 CHAPTER
Site Planning, Preparation, and Specifications
MX480 Site Preparation Checklist | 187 MX480 Site Guidelines and Requirements | 188 MX480 Power Planning | 201 MX480 Network Cable and Transceiver Planning | 218 MX480 Management, and Console Port Specifications and Pinouts | 223

187
MX480 Site Preparation Checklist

The checklist in Table 85 on page 187 summarizes the tasks you must perform when preparing a site for router installation.
Table 85: Site Preparation Checklist

Item or Task

For More Information

Performed By Date

Verify that environmental factors such as temperature and humidity do not exceed router tolerances.

"MX480 Router Environmental Specifications" on page 191

Select the type of rack or cabinet.

"MX480 Router Rack Requirements" on page 197, "MX480 Router Cabinet Size and Clearance Requirements" on page 200

Plan rack or cabinet location, including required space clearances.

"MX480 Router Rack Requirements" on page 197, "MX480 Router Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance" on page 199, "MX480 Router Cabinet Size and Clearance Requirements" on page 200

If a rack is used, secure rack to floor and building structure.

"MX480 Router Rack Requirements" on page 197

Acquire cables and connectors.

188

Table 85: Site Preparation Checklist (Continued)

Item or Task

For More Information

Performed By Date

Locate sites for connection of system grounding.

"MX480 Chassis Grounding Specifications" on page 192, MX480 Router Grounding Cable Lug Specifications, MX480 Router Grounding Cable Specifications

Measure distance between external power sources and router installation site.

Calculate the optical power budget and optical power margin.

"Calculating Power Budget and Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cables" on page 218

RELATED DOCUMENTATION MX480 Router Rack Requirements | 197 MX480 Router Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance | 199 MX480 Router Cabinet Size and Clearance Requirements | 200
MX480 Site Guidelines and Requirements
IN THIS SECTION MX480 Router Physical Specifications | 189 MX480 Router Environmental Specifications | 191 MX480 Chassis Grounding Specifications | 192 MX480 Router Rack Requirements | 197 MX480 Router Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance | 199

189
MX480 Router Cabinet Size and Clearance Requirements | 200 MX480 Router Cabinet Airflow Requirements | 200

MX480 Router Physical Specifications

Table 86 on page 189 summarizes the physical specifications for the router chassis. Table 86: Physical Specifications

Description

Weight

Width

Depth

Height

Chassis dimensions

Chassis with midplane, fan tray, air filter, and cable management brackets: 65.5 lb (29.7 kg)
Maximum configuration: 221.03 lb (100.26 kg)

17.45 in. (44.3 cm)

24.5 in. (62.2 cm) (from front to chassis rear)
Total depth (including cable management brackets) 27.75 in. (70.5 cm)

14.0 in. (35.6 cm)

Routing Engine (RE-S-1800)

2.4 lb (1.1 kg)

11 in (27.9 cm)

7.75 in (19.7 cm)

1.25 in (3.2 cm)

Routing Engine (RE-S-X6-64G)

2.69 lb (1.18 kg)

10.7 in (27.18 cm) 7.47 in (18.97 cm) 1.19 in (3.02 cm)

SCB

9.6 lb (4.4 kg) (with 17 in (43.2 cm)

22 in (55.9 cm)

1.25 in (3.2 cm)

Routing Engine

installed)

SCBE

9.6 lb (4.4 kg) (with Routing Engine installed)

17 in (43.2 cm)

22 in (55.9 cm)

1.25 in (3.2 cm)

190

Table 86: Physical Specifications (Continued)

Description

Weight

Width

Depth

Height

SCBE2

9.6 lb (4.4 kg) (with Routing Engine installed)

17 in (43.2 cm)

22 in (55.9 cm)

1.25 in (3.2 cm)

DPC

Maximum up to 14.5 lb (6.6 kg)

17 in (43.2 cm)

Blank panel in DPC slot: 9 lb

22 in (55.9 cm)

1.25 in (3.2 cm)

FPC

FPC2: 13 lb (5.9 kg) 17 in (43.2 cm)

22 in (55.9 cm)

2.5 in (6.4 cm)

FPC3: 14 lb (6.5 kg)

PIC

2 lb (0.9 kg)

7.75 in (28.3 cm)

11.125 in (19.7 cm) 4.125 in (10.5 cm)

MPC (fixed configuration)

18.35 lb (8.3 kg)

17 in (43.2 cm)

22 in (55.9 cm)

1.25 in (3.2 cm)

MPC (without MICs)

14 lb (6.4 kg)

17 in (43.2 cm)

22 in (55.9 cm)

1.25 in (3.2 cm)

MIC

Maximum up to 1.2 6.25 in (15.9 cm)

6.8 in (17.3 cm)

1.25 in (3.2 cm)

lb (0.54 kg)

Craft interface

1.1 lb (0.5 kg)

21.25 in (54 cm)

8.5 in (21.6 cm)

6.25 in (15.9 cm)

Fan tray

6.8 lb (3.08 kg)

17 in (43.2 cm)

22 in (55.9 cm)

1.5 in (3.8 cm)

Air filter

1.0 lb (0.5 kg)

0.31 in (0.8 cm)

22.23 in (56.5 cm) 10.1 in (25.6 cm)

Cable management brackets

0.3 lb (0.14 kg)

0.25 in (0.6 cm)

4.5 in (11.4 cm)

9.9 in (25.0 cm)

DC power supply

3.8 lb (1.7 kg)

14.5 in (36.8 cm)

4 in (10.2 cm)

1.75 in (4.4 cm)

Table 86: Physical Specifications (Continued)

Description

Weight

High-capacity DC power supply 6.2 lb (2.81 kg)

AC power supply

5.0 lb (2.3 kg)

High-capacity AC power supply 6.6 lb (2.99 kg)

Width

Depth

14.5 in (36.8 cm)

4 in (10.2 cm)

14.5 in (36.8 cm)

4 in (10.2 cm)

14.5 in (36.8 cm)

4 in (10.2 cm)

191
Height 1.75 in (4.4 cm) 1.75 in (4.4 cm) 1.75 in (4.4 cm)

SEE ALSO
MX480 Chassis Lifting Guidelines | 501 MX480 Router Description | 2 MX480 Chassis Description | 6

MX480 Router Environmental Specifications

Table 87 on page 191 specifies the environmental specifications required for normal router operation. In addition, the site should be as dust-free as possible.
Table 87: Router Environmental Specifications

Description

Value

Altitude

No performance degradation to 10,000 ft (3048 m)

Relative humidity

Normal operation ensured in relative humidity range of 5% to 90%, noncondensing

Temperature

Normal operation ensured in temperature range of 32�F (0�C) to 104�F (40�C)
Nonoperating storage temperature in shipping container: �40�F (�40�C) to 158�F (70�C)

192

Table 87: Router Environmental Specifications (Continued)

Description

Value

Seismic

Designed to meet Telcordia Technologies Zone 4 earthquake requirements

Maximum thermal output

AC power: 11,322 BTU/hour (3,318 W) DC power: 9,632 BTU/hour (2,823 W) NOTE: These specifications are estimates and subject to change.

NOTE: Install the router only in restricted areas, such as dedicated equipment rooms and equipment closets, in accordance with Articles 110-16, 110-17, and 110-18 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70.

SEE ALSO Tools and Parts Required to Maintain the MX480 Router In Case of an Electrical Accident
MX480 Chassis Grounding Specifications
IN THIS SECTION MX480 Chassis Grounding Points Specifications | 193 MX480 Router Grounding Cable Lug Specifications | 195 MX480 Router Grounding Cable Specifications | 196

193
MX480 Chassis Grounding Points Specifications
To meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements and to ensure proper operation, the router must be adequately grounded before power is connected. To ground AC-powered and DCpowered routers, you must connect a grounding cable to earth ground and then attach it to the chassis grounding points using the two screws provided.
Two threaded inserts (PEM nuts) are provided on the upper rear of the chassis for connecting the router to earth ground. The grounding points fit UNC 1/4�20 screws (American). The grounding points are spaced at 0.625-in. (15.86-mm) centers (see Figure 44 on page 194 or Figure 45 on page 195).
NOTE: Additional grounding is provided to an AC-powered router when you plug its power supplies into grounded AC power receptacles.
You must install the MX480 router in a restricted-access location and ensure that the chassis is always properly grounded. The MX480 router has a two-hole protective grounding terminal provided on the chassis. See Figure 44 on page 194 or Figure 45 on page 195. We recommend that you use this protective grounding terminal as the preferred method for grounding the chassis regardless of the power supply configuration.However, if additional grounding methods are available, you can also use those methods. For example, you can use the grounding wire in the AC power cord or use the grounding

194
terminal or lug on a DC power supply.This tested system meets or exceeds all applicable EMC regulatory requirements with the two-hole protective grounding terminal.
Figure 44: Connecting AC Power to the Router

195 Figure 45: Connecting DC Power to the Router
MX480 Router Grounding Cable Lug Specifications
The accessory box shipped with the router includes one cable lug that attaches to the grounding cable (see Figure 46 on page 195) and two UNC 1/4�20 screws used to secure the grounding cable to the grounding points. Figure 46: Grounding Cable Lug

196

NOTE: The same cable lug is used for the DC power cables.

MX480 Router Grounding Cable Specifications

The grounding cable that you provide must meet the specifications in Table 88 on page 196. Table 88: Grounding Cable Specifications

Cable Type

Quantity and Specification

Grounding

One 6-AWG (13.3 mm2), minimum 60�C wire, or as required by the local code

WARNING: The router is pluggable type A equipment installed in a restricted-access location. It has a separate protective earthing terminal (sized for UNC 1/4-20 ground lugs) provided on the chassis in addition to the grounding pin of the power supply cord. This separate protective earthing terminal must be permanently connected to earth.
SEE ALSO Tools and Parts Required for MX480 Router Grounding and Power Connections | 266 Grounding the MX480 Router | 266 Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router | 499

197
MX480 Router Rack Requirements
IN THIS SECTION Rack Size and Strength | 197 Spacing of Mounting Bracket Holes | 198 Connection to Building Structure | 198
The router can be installed in a rack. Many types of racks are acceptable, including four-post (telco) racks and open-frame racks. An example of an open-frame rack appears in Figure 47 on page 198.
Rack Size and Strength
The router is designed for installation in a 19-in. rack as defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment (document number EIA-310-D) published by the Electronic Components Industry Association (ECIA) (http://www.ecianow.org). With the use of adapters or approved wing devices to narrow the opening between the rails, the router fits into a 600-mm-wide rack or cabinet , as defined in the four-part Equipment Engineering (EE); European telecommunications standard for equipment practice (document number ETSI EN 300 119) published by the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (http://www.etsi.org). The rack rails must be spaced widely enough to accommodate the router chassis's external dimensions: 14.0 in. (356 mm) high, 24.5 in. (622 mm) deep, and 17.45 in. (443 mm) wide. The spacing of rails and adjacent racks must also allow for the clearances around the router and rack that are specified in "MX480 Router Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance" on page 199. In general, a center-mount rack is preferable to a front-mount rack because the more even distribution of weight in the center-mount rack provides greater stability. For instructions about installing the mounting hardware, see "Installing the MX480 Router Mounting Hardware for a Rack or Cabinet" on page 233. The chassis height of 14.0 in. (35.6 cm) is approximately 8 U. A U is the standard rack unit defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment (document number EIA-310-D) published by the Electronic Components Industry Association (ECIA) (http://www.ecianow.org). You can stack five MX480 routers in a rack that has at least 48 U (84 in. or 2.13 m) of usable vertical space.

198 The rack must be strong enough to support the weight of the fully configured router, up to 163.5 lb (74.2 kg). If you stack five fully configured routers in one rack, it must be capable of supporting up to 818 lb (371.0 kg). Figure 47: Typical Open-Frame Rack
Spacing of Mounting Bracket Holes
The router can be mounted in any rack that provides holes or hole patterns spaced at 1 U (1.75 in.) increments. The mounting brackets used to attach the chassis to a rack are designed to fasten to holes spaced at those distances.
Connection to Building Structure
Always secure the rack to the structure of the building. If your geographical area is subject to earthquakes, bolt the rack to the floor. For maximum stability, also secure the rack to ceiling brackets. SEE ALSO
Installation Safety Warnings for Juniper Networks Devices

199
MX480 Router Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance
When planning the installation site, you need to allow sufficient clearance around the rack (see Figure 48 on page 199):
� For the cooling system to function properly, the airflow around the chassis must be unrestricted. Allow at least 8 in. (20.3 cm) of clearance between side-cooled routers. Allow 5.5 in. (14 cm) between the side of the chassis and any non-heat-producing surface such as a wall.
� For service personnel to remove and install hardware components, there must be adequate space at the front and back of the router. At least 24 in. (61 cm) is required both in front of and behind the router. NEBS GR-63 recommends that you allow at least 30 in. (72.6 cm) in front of the rack and 24 in. (61.0 cm) behind the rack.
Airflow must always be from front to back with respect to the rack. If the device has side to rear airflow, then provisions must be made to ensure that fresh air from the front of the rack is supplied to the inlets, and exhaust exits the rear of the rack. The device must not interfere with the cooling of other systems in the rack. Fillers must be used as appropriate in the rack to ensure there is no recirculation of heated exhaust air back to the front of the rack. Care must also be taken around cables to ensure that no leakage of air in situations where recirculation may result.
Figure 48: Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for an MX480 Router Chassis

200
SEE ALSO Installation Safety Warnings for Juniper Networks Devices
MX480 Router Cabinet Size and Clearance Requirements
The minimum size cabinet that can accommodate the router is 482 mm wide and 800 mm deep. A cabinet larger than the minimum requirement provides better airflow and reduces the chance of overheating. To accommodate a single router, the cabinet must be at least 13 U high. If you provide adequate cooling air and airflow clearance, you can stack five routers in a cabinet that has at least 48 U (84 in. or 2.13 m) of usable vertical space. The minimum front and rear clearance requirements depend on the mounting configuration you choose. The minimum total clearance inside the cabinet is 30.7 in. between the inside of the front door and the inside of the rear door.
SEE ALSO Installation Safety Warnings for Juniper Networks Devices
MX480 Router Cabinet Airflow Requirements
Before you install the router in a cabinet, you must ensure that ventilation through the cabinet is sufficient to prevent overheating. Consider the following requirements to when planning for chassis cooling: � Ensure that the cool air supply you provide through the cabinet can adequately dissipate the thermal
output of the router. � Ensure that the cabinet allows the chassis hot exhaust air to exit from the cabinet without
recirculating into the router. An open cabinet (without a top or doors) that employs hot air exhaust extraction from the top allows the best airflow through the chassis. If the cabinet contains a top or doors, perforations in these elements assist with removing the hot air exhaust. For an illustration of chassis airflow, see Figure 49 on page 201. � Install the router as close as possible to the front of the cabinet so that the cable management brackets just clear the inside of the front door. This maximizes the clearance in the rear of the cabinet for critical airflow.

201 � Route and dress all cables to minimize the blockage of airflow to and from the chassis. Figure 49: Airflow Through the Chassis
SEE ALSO MX480 Site Preparation Checklist | 187 Installation Safety Warnings for Juniper Networks Devices
MX480 Power Planning
IN THIS SECTION Power Requirements for an MX480 Router | 201 Calculating Power Requirements for MX480 Routers | 213
Power Requirements for an MX480 Router
The following tables list the MX480 component power requirements. Table 89 on page 202 lists the MX480 base system power requirements. Table 90 on page 202 lists the Switch Control Board (SCB) power requirements. Table 91 on page 203 lists the FRU power requirements for Routing Engines,

202

Modular Port Concentrators (MPCs), Modular Interface Cards (MICs), and Dense Port Concentrators (DPCs).
Table 89: MX480 Router Common Component Power Requirements

Component

Power Requirement (Watts)

Base system

40 W

Normal-capacity cooling system

110 W

High-capacity cooling system

160 W

NOTE: The power for the cooling system comes from a different tap on the power supply, reserved for the cooling system only. The cooling system power requirement does not need to be deducted from the output power budget of the power supply.

Table 90: Power Requirements for MX480 SCBs

Component

Ambient Temperature Maximum Power Requirement

SCB-MX

131� F (55� C) 104� F (40� C) 77� F (25� C)

185 W 160 W 155 W

SCBE-MX

131� F (55� C) 104� F (40� C) 77� F (25� C)

160 W 130 W 120 W

SCBE2-MX

131� F (55� C) 104� F (40� C) 77� F (25� C)

185 W 160 W 155 W

203

Table 90: Power Requirements for MX480 SCBs (Continued)

Component

Ambient Temperature Maximum Power Requirement

SCBE3-MX

131� F (55� C) 104� F (40� C) 77� F (25� C)

295 W (SCB 0 (Primary); 425 W SCB 1 (Backup) 200 W (SCB 0 (Primary); 400 W SCB 1 (Backup) 265 W (SCB 0 (Primary); 385 W SCB 1 (Backup)

Table 91: FRU Power Requirements

Component

Part Number

Maximum Power Requirement

Routing Engines

RE-S-X6-64G RE-S-X6-128G

110 W

RE-S-1300-2048 (EOL'd) RE-S-2000-4096 (EOL'd) RE-S-1800 (all variants)

90 W

Fixed Configuration Modular Port Concentrators (MPC)

MPC-3D-16XGE-SFPP MPC-3D-16XGE-SFPP MPC-3D-16XGE-SFPP-R-B

440 W at 131� F (55� C) ambient
423 W at 77� F (25� C) ambient

Multiservices MPC

MS-MPC-128G

590 W

Table 91: FRU Power Requirements (Continued)

Component

Part Number

32x10GE MPC4E

MPC4E-3D-32XGE-SFPP

2x100GE + 8x10GE MPC4E

MPC4E-3D-2CGE-8XGE

6x40GE + 24x10GE MPC5E
6x40GE + 24x10GE MPC5EQ

MPC5E-40G10G MPC5EQ-40G10G

2x100GE + 4x10GE MPC5E
2x100GE + 4x10GE MPC5EQ

MPC5E-100G10G MPC5EQ-100G10G

204
Maximum Power Requirement
610 W With optics: 607 W at 131� F (55� C), with SFPP ZR optics 584 W at 40� C, with SFPP ZR optics 565 W at 77� F (25� C), with SFPP ZR optics
610 W With optics: 607 W at 131� F (55� C), with SFPP ZR and CFP LR4 optics 584 W at 104� F (40� C), with SFPP ZR and CFP LR4 optics 565 W at 77� F (25� C), with SFPP ZR and CFP LR4 optics
With optics: 607 W at 131� F (55� C) 541 W at 104� F (40� C) 511 W at 77� F (25� C)
With optics: 607 W at 131� F (55� C) 541 W at 104� F (40� C) 511 W at 77� F (25� C)

Table 91: FRU Power Requirements (Continued)

Component

Part Number

MPC7E-MRATE

MPC10E-10C-MRATE MPC10E-10C-MRATE

MPC10E-15C-MRATE MPC10E-15C-MRATE

Modular Port Concentrators (MPC)

MPC1 MPC1E

MX-MPC1-3D MX-MPC1E-3D

MPC1 Q MPC1E Q

MX-MPC1-3D-Q MX-MPC1E-3D-Q

205
Maximum Power Requirement
With optics: 545 W at 131� F (55� C) 465 W at 104� F (40� C) 440 W at 77� F (25� C)
620 W at 131� F (55� C) 590 W at 104� F (40� C) 545 W at 77� F (25� C)
785 W at 104� F (40� C): 720 W at 77� F (25� C)
165 W With MICs and optics: 239 W at 131� F (55� C) 227 W at 104� F (40� C) 219 W at 77� F (25� C)
175 W With MICs and optics: 249 W at 131� F (55� C) 237 W at 104� F (40� C) 228 W at 77� F (25� C)

Table 91: FRU Power Requirements (Continued)

Component

Part Number

MPC2 MPC2E

MX-MPC2-3D MX-MPC2E-3D

MPC2 Q MPC2E Q MPC2 EQ MPC2E EQ
MPC2E P

MX-MPC2-3D-Q MX-MPC2E-3D-Q MX-MPC2-3D-EQ MX-MPC2E-3D-EQ
MX-MPC2E-3D-P

MPC2E NG

MPC2E-3D-NG

206
Maximum Power Requirement
274 W With MICs and optics: 348 W at 131� F (55� C) 329 W at 104� F (40� C) 315 W at 77� F (25� C)
294 W With MICs and optics: 368 W at 131� F (55� C) 347 W at 104� F (40� C) 333 W at 77� F (25� C)
294 W With MICs and optics: 368 W at 131� F (55� C) 347 W at 104� F (40� C) 333 W at 77� F (25� C)
474 W With MICs and optics: 474 W at 131� F (55� C) 417 W at 104� F (40� C) 400 W at 77� F (25� C)

Table 91: FRU Power Requirements (Continued)

Component

Part Number

MPC2E NG Q

MPC2E-3D-NG-Q

MPC3E

MX-MPC3E-3D

MPC3E-3D-NG

MPC3E-3D-NG-Q

207
Maximum Power Requirement
529 W With MICs and optics: 529 W at 131� F (55� C) 460 W at 104� F (40� C) 438 W at 77� F (25� C)
440W With MICs and optics: 500 W at 131� F (55� C), two 40 W MICs 485 W at 104� F (40� C), two CFP MICs with LR4 optics 473 W at 77� F (25� C), two CFP MICs with LR4 optics
534 W With MICs and optics: 534 W at 131� F (55� C) 485 W at 104� F (40� C) 461 W at 77� F (25� C)
583 W With MICs and optics: 583 W at 131� F (55� C) 532 W at 104� F (40� C) 503 W at 77� F (25� C)

Table 91: FRU Power Requirements (Continued)

Component

Part Number

Modular Interface Cards (MIC)

ATM MIC with SFP

MPC4E-3D-2CGE-8XGE

Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP

MIC-3D-20-GE-SFP

10-Gigabit Ethernet MICs with XFP

2-Port: MIC-3D-2XGE-XFP 4-Port: MIC-3D-4XGE-XFP

40-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with QSFP+

MIC3-3D-2X40GE-QSFPP

100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with CFP

MIC3-3D-1X100GE-CFP

100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with CFP2

MIC6-100G-CFP2

100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with CXP

MIC3-3D-1X100GE-CXP

208
Maximum Power Requirement
610 W With optics: 607 W at 131� F (55� C), with SFPP ZR and CFP LR4 optics 584 W at 40� C, with SFPP ZR and CFP LR4 optics 565 W at 77� F (25� C), with SFPP ZR and CFP LR4 optics
37 W
2-Port: 29 W 4-Port: 37 W
18 W
40 W
104 W
20 W

Table 91: FRU Power Requirements (Continued)

Component

Part Number

100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC6-100G-CXP MIC with CXP (4 Ports)

100-Gigabit DWDM OTN MIC with CFP2

MIC3-100G-DWDM

100-Gigabit DWDM OTN MIC with CFP2ACO

MIC3-100G-DWDM

Multiservices MIC

MS-MIC-16G

SONET/SDH OC3/ STM1 (Multi-Rate) MICs with SFP

4-Port: MIC-3D-4OC3OC12-1OC48

8-Port: MIC-3D-8OC3OC12-4OC48

SONET/SDH OC192/ STM64 MIC with XFP

MIC-3D-1OC192-XFP

209
Maximum Power Requirement
57 W
With optics: 91 W at 131� F (55� C) 83 W at 77� F (25� C)
With optics: 91 W at 131� F (55� C) 83 W at 77� F (25� C)
60 W
4-Port: 24 W at 131� F (55� C) 22.75 W at 40� C 21.5 W at 77� F (25� C)
8-Port: 29 W at 131� F (55� C) 27.75 W at 40� C 26.5 W at 77� F (25� C)
41 W at 131� F (55� C) 38.5 W at 40� C 36 W at 77� F (25� C)

Table 91: FRU Power Requirements (Continued)

Component

Part Number

Channelized SONET/SDH OC3/ STM1 (Multi-Rate) MICs with SFP

4-Port: MIC-3D-4CHOC3-2CHOC12

8-Port: MIC-3D-8CHOC3-4CHOC12

Tri-Rate MIC DS3/E3 MIC

MIC-3D-40GE-TX
MIC-3D-8DS3-E3 MIC-3D-8CHDS3-E3-B

Channelized E1/T1 Circuit Emulation MIC

MIC-3D-16CHE1-T1-CE

Channelized OC3/ STM1 (Multi-Rate) Circuit Emulation MIC with SFP

MIC-3D-4COC3-1COC12-CE

Dense Port Concentrators (DPC)

210
Maximum Power Requirement
4-Port: 41 W at 131� F (55� C) 40 W at 40� C 39 W at 77� F (25� C)
8-Port: 52 W at 131� F (55� C) 50.5 W at 40� C 49 W at 77� F (25� C)
41 W
36 W at 131� F (55� C) 35 W at 40� C 34 W at 77� F (25� C)
29.08 W at 131� F (55� C) 27.84 W at 40� C 26.55 W at 77� F (25� C)
36.48 W at 131� F (55� C) 35.04 W at 40� C 33.96 W at 77� F (25� C)

Table 91: FRU Power Requirements (Continued)

Component

Part Number

Gigabit Ethernet DPC with SFP

DPC-R-40GE-SFP

Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced DPC with SFP

DPCE-R-40GE-SFP DPCE-X-40GE-SFP

Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing IP Services DPCs with SFP Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing Ethernet Services DPC with SFP

DPCE-R-Q-40GE-SFP DPCE-X-Q-40GE-SFP

Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing IP Services DPCs with SFP

DPCE-R-Q-20GE-SFP

10-Gigabit Ethernet DPC with XFP

DPC-R-4XGE-XFP

10-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced DPC with XFP

DPCE-R-2XGE-XFP

10-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced DPCs with XFP

DPCE-R-4XGE-XFP DPCE-X-4XGE-XFP

211 Maximum Power Requirement 335 W 335 W 365 W
200 W
310 W 175 W 310 W

Table 91: FRU Power Requirements (Continued)

Component

Part Number

10-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing Ethernet Services DPC with XFP

DPCE-R-Q-4XGE-XFP DPCE-X-Q-4XGE-XFP

Multi-Rate Ethernet Enhanced Ethernet Services DPC with SFP and XFP

DPCE-R-20GE-2XGE DPCE-X-20GE-2XGE

Multi-Rate Ethernet Enhanced Queuing IP Services DPC with SFP and XFP

DPCE-R-Q-20GE-2XGE

Tri-Rate Enhanced DPC or Tri-Rate Enhanced Ethernet Services DPC

DPCE-R-40GE-TX DPCE-X-40GE-TX

Multiservices DPC

MS-DPC

Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPC)

FPC Type 2

MX-FPC2

FPC Type 3

MX-FPC3

212
Maximum Power Requirement 330 W
333 W
335 W
320 W
265 W
190 W (with PICs and optics) 265 W (with PICs and optics)

SEE ALSO DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router | 42 AC Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router | 31

213

Calculating Power Requirements for MX480 Routers

The information in this topic helps you determine which power supplies are suitable for various configurations, as well as which power supplies are not suitable because output power is exceeded. You determine suitability by subtracting the total power draw from the maximum output of the power supplies. Afterward, the required input power is calculated. Finally, you calculate the thermal output. A sample configuration is provided in Table 93 on page 214.
We recommend that you provision power according to the maximum input current listed in the power supply electrical specifications (see "AC Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router" on page 31and "DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router" on page 42).
Use the following procedures to calculate the power requirement:
1. Calculate the power requirement.
2. Evaluate the power budget.
3. Calculate input power.
4. Calculate thermal output (BTUs) for cooling requirements.
Both normal-capacity and high-capacity MX480 chassis with DC power supplies are zoned, meaning that certain components are powered by specific power supplies (see Table 92 on page 213 for information on zoning). When calculating power requirements, be sure that there is adequate power for each zone.
For an AC-powered chassis, there is one overall zone. Two AC power supplies are mandatory for highline, and three AC power supplies are mandatory for low-line power.
Table 92: MX480 DC Zoning

Zone

Power Supply (PEM)

Components Receiving Power

Zone 0

PEM 0 or 2

� Fan Tray � DPC/MPC slots 0 and 1 � SCB slots 0 and 1

Zone 1

PEM 1 or 3

� Fan Tray � DPC slots 2 through 5

214

The following sample configuration shows a DC-powered MX480 with: � Two 16-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet MPCs with SFP+(slots 0 and 1) � Two SCBs with two (redundant) RE-1800x2 routing engines (SCB slot 0 and SCB slot 1) � One DPCE-R-4XGE-XFP (slot 3) � High-capacity cooling system
NOTE: The high-capacity cooling system satisfies cooling requirements of MPCs, and must be used for proper cooling.

1. Calculate the power requirements (usage) using the values in "Power Requirements for an MX480 Router" on page 201 as shown in Table 93 on page 214.
Table 93: Sample Power Requirements for an MX480 Router

Chassis Component

Part Number

Power Requirement

Zone

Base system

MX480BASE-DCHIGH

40 W

Zone 0 and Zone 1

High-capacity cooling system

FFANTRAYMX480-HC

160 W

Zone 0 and Zone 1

MPC - Slot 2

MPC-3D-16XGESFPP-R-B

440 W

Zone 1

MPC - Slot 1

MPC-3D-16XGESFPP-R-B

440 W

Zone 0

SCB 1

SCBE2-MX with RE-S-1800X2-8G

185 W 90 W

Zone 0

SCB 0

SCBE2 with RE-S-1800X2-8G

185 W 90 W

Zone 0

215

Table 93: Sample Power Requirements for an MX480 Router (Continued)

Chassis Component

Part Number

Power Requirement

Zone

DPC - Slot 3

DPCE-R-4XGEXFP

310 W

Zone 1

Zone 0 total output power Zone 1 total output power

1090 W 850 W

Zone 0 total output power (excluding cooling system)
Zone 1 total output power (excluding cooling system)

1010 W 770 W

2. Evaluate the power budget. In the case of a DC-powered chassis, evaluate the budget for each zone. In this step, we check the required power against the maximum output power of available power supply options.

Table 94 on page 215 lists the power supplies, their maximum output power, and unused power (or a power deficit) for MX480 AC chassis.Table 95 on page 216 lists the power supplies, their maximum output power, and unused power (or a power deficit) for MX480 DC chassis. See "AC Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router" on page 31 and "DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router" on page 42 for more information about the MX480 power supply electrical specifications.
Table 94: Calculating Power Budget for a MX480 AC Chassis

Power Supply

Maximum System Output Power

Unused Power1

MX480 AC Normal-capacity (low-line)

3081 W

2071 W

216

Table 94: Calculating Power Budget for a MX480 AC Chassis (Continued)

Power Supply

Maximum System Output Power

MX480 AC Normal-capacity (high-line)

3200 W

MX480 AC High-capacity (low-line)

3501 W

MX480 AC High-capacity (high-line)

4100 W

Unused Power1 2190 W 2491 W 3090 W

1 For this configuration, output power excluding the cooling system is 1360 W. Table 95: Calculating Power Budget for a MX480 DC Chassis

Power Supply

Maximum System Output Power

Zone 0 Unused Power1

Zone 1 Unused Power2

MX480 DC Normal-capacity

3200 W

2190 W

2430 W

MX480 DC High-capacity (DIP=0)
NOTE: The DIP switch position is expected input current; the correct feeds must be present to obtain the desired output power.

4800 W

3790 W

4030 W

MX480 DC High-capacity (DIP=1)
NOTE: The DIP switch position is expected input current; the correct feeds must be present to obtain the desired output power.

5200 W

4190W

4430W

1 For this configuration, output power excluding the cooling system is 1010 W.
2 For this configuration, output power excluding the cooling system is 770 W.
3. Calculate input power. In this step, the input power requirements for the example configuration are calculated. To do this, divide the total output requirement by the efficiency of the power supply as shown in Table 96 on page 217.

217

Table 96: Calculating Input Power Examples

Power Supply

Power Supply Efficiency1

Input Power Requirement2

MX480 AC Normal-capacity (high-line)

85 %

1282 W

MX480 AC High-capacity (high-line)

89 %

1225 W

MX480 DC Normal-capacity

~98 %

1112 W3

MX480 DC High-capacity

~98 %

1112 W3

1 These values are at full load and nominal voltage. 2 For this configuration, total power is 1090 W. 3 Zone 0 requirement. 4. Calculate thermal output (BTUs). To calculate this, multiply the input power requirement (in watts) by 3.41. Table 97: Calculating Thermal Output

Power Supply

Thermal Output (BTUs per hour)

MX480 AC Normal-capacity (high-line)

1282 * 3.41 = 4372 BTU/hr

MX480 AC High-capacity (high-line)

1225 * 3.41 = 4177 BTU/hr

MX480 DC Normal-capacity

1112 * 3.41 = 3792 BTU/hr1

MX480 DC High-capacity

1112 * 3.41 = 3792 BTU/hr1

1 Zone 0 output.

218 SEE ALSO
AC Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router | 31 DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router | 42
MX480 Network Cable and Transceiver Planning
IN THIS SECTION Calculating Power Budget and Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cables | 218 Understanding Fiber-Optic Cable Signal Loss, Attenuation, and Dispersion | 221 Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications for MX Series Routers | 222
Calculating Power Budget and Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cables
IN THIS SECTION How to Calculate Power Budget for Fiber-Optic Cable | 219 How to Calculate Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cable | 219
Use the information in this topic and the specifications for your optical interface to calculate the power budget and power margin for fiber-optic cables.
TIP: You can use the Hardware Compatibility Tool to find information about the pluggable transceivers supported on your Juniper Networks device. To calculate the power budget and power margin, perform the following tasks:

219

How to Calculate Power Budget for Fiber-Optic Cable
To ensure that fiber-optic connections have sufficient power for correct operation, you need to calculate the link's power budget, which is the maximum amount of power it can transmit. When you calculate the power budget, you use a worst-case analysis to provide a margin of error, even though all the parts of an actual system do not operate at the worst-case levels. To calculate the worst-case estimate of power budget (PB), you assume minimum transmitter power (PT) and minimum receiver sensitivity (PR):
PB = PT � PR
The following hypothetical power budget equation uses values measured in decibels (dB) and decibels referred to one milliwatt (dBm):
PB = PT � PR
PB = �15 dBm � (�28 dBm)
PB = 13 dB
How to Calculate Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cable
After calculating a link's power budget, you can calculate the power margin (PM), which represents the amount of power available after subtracting attenuation or link loss (LL) from the power budget (PB). A worst-case estimate of PM assumes maximum LL:
PM = PB � LL
PM greater than zero indicates that the power budget is sufficient to operate the receiver.
Factors that can cause link loss include higher-order mode losses, modal and chromatic dispersion, connectors, splices, and fiber attenuation. Table 98 on page 219 lists an estimated amount of loss for the factors used in the following sample calculations. For information about the actual amount of signal loss caused by equipment and other factors, refer to vendor documentation.
Table 98: Estimated Values for Factors Causing Link Loss

Link-Loss Factor

Estimated Link-Loss Value

Higher-order mode losses

Single mode--None Multimode--0.5 dB

220

Table 98: Estimated Values for Factors Causing Link Loss (Continued)

Link-Loss Factor

Estimated Link-Loss Value

Modal and chromatic dispersion Single mode--None
Multimode--None, if product of bandwidth and distance is less than 500 MHzkm

Connector

0.5 dB

Splice

0.5 dB

Fiber attenuation

Single mode--0.5 dB/km Multimode--1 dB/km

The following sample calculation for a 2-km-long multimode link with a power budget (PB) of 13 dB uses the estimated values from Table 98 on page 219 to calculate link loss (LL) as the sum of fiber attenuation (2 km @ 1 dB/km, or 2 dB) and loss for five connectors (0.5 dB per connector, or 2.5 dB) and two splices (0.5 dB per splice, or 1 dB) as well as higher-order mode losses (0.5 dB). The power margin (PM) is calculated as follows:
PM = PB � LL
PM = 13 dB � 2 km (1 dB/km) � 5 (0.5 dB) � 2 (0.5 dB) � 0.5 dB
PM = 13 dB � 2 dB � 2.5 dB � 1 dB � 0.5 dB
PM = 7 dB
The following sample calculation for an 8-km-long single-mode link with a power budget (PB) of 13 dB uses the estimated values from Table 98 on page 219 to calculate link loss (LL) as the sum of fiber attenuation (8 km @ 0.5 dB/km, or 4 dB) and loss for seven connectors (0.5 dB per connector, or 3.5 dB). The power margin (PM) is calculated as follows:
PM = PB � LL
PM = 13 dB � 8 km (0.5 dB/km) � 7(0.5 dB)
PM = 13 dB � 4 dB � 3.5 dB
PM = 5.5 dB

221
In both examples, the calculated power margin is greater than zero, indicating that the link has sufficient power for transmission and does not exceed the maximum receiver input power.
Understanding Fiber-Optic Cable Signal Loss, Attenuation, and Dispersion
IN THIS SECTION Signal Loss in Multimode and Single-Mode Fiber-Optic Cables | 221 Attenuation and Dispersion in Fiber-Optic Cable | 221
To determine the power budget and power margin needed for fiber-optic connections, you need to understand how signal loss, attenuation, and dispersion affect transmission. The MX10008 router uses various types of network cables, including multimode and single-mode fiber-optic cables.
Signal Loss in Multimode and Single-Mode Fiber-Optic Cables
Multimode fiber is large enough in diameter to allow rays of light to reflect internally (bounce off the walls of the fiber). Interfaces with multimode optics typically use LEDs as light sources. However, LEDs are not coherent light sources. They spray varying wavelengths of light into the multimode fiber, which reflect the light at different angles. Light rays travel in jagged lines through a multimode fiber, causing signal dispersion. When light traveling in the fiber core radiates into the fiber cladding (layers of lower refractive index material in close contact with a core material of higher refractive index), higher-order mode loss occurs. Together, these factors reduce the transmission distance of multimode fiber compared to that of single-mode fiber. Single-mode fiber is so small in diameter that rays of light reflect internally through one layer only. Interfaces with single-mode optics use lasers as light sources. Lasers generate a single wavelength of light, which travels in a straight line through the single-mode fiber. Compared to multimode fiber, singlemode fiber has a higher bandwidth and can carry signals for longer distances. It is consequently more expensive.
Attenuation and Dispersion in Fiber-Optic Cable
An optical data link functions correctly provided that modulated light reaching the receiver has enough power to be demodulated correctly. Attenuation is the reduction in strength of the light signal during

222
transmission. Passive media components such as cables, cable splices, and connectors cause attenuation. Although attenuation is significantly lower for optical fiber than for other media, it still occurs in both multimode and single-mode transmission. An efficient optical data link must transmit enough light to overcome attenuation.
Dispersion is the spreading of the signal over time. The following two types of dispersion can affect signal transmission through an optical data link:
� Chromatic dispersion, which is the spreading of the signal over time caused by the different speeds of light rays.
� Modal dispersion, which is the spreading of the signal over time caused by the different propagation modes in the fiber.
For multimode transmission, modal dispersion, rather than chromatic dispersion or attenuation, usually limits the maximum bit rate and link length. For single-mode transmission, modal dispersion is not a factor. However, at higher bit rates and over longer distances, chromatic dispersion limits the maximum link length.
An efficient optical data link must have enough light to exceed the minimum power that the receiver requires to operate within its specifications. In addition, the total dispersion must be within the limits specified for the type of link in the Telcordia Technologies document GR-253-CORE (Section 4.3) and International Telecommunications Union (ITU) document G.957.
When chromatic dispersion is at the maximum allowed, its effect can be considered as a power penalty in the power budget. The optical power budget must allow for the sum of component attenuation, power penalties (including those from dispersion), and a safety margin for unexpected losses.
Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications for MX Series Routers
Table 99 on page 223 lists the specifications for the cables that connect to management ports and the wires that connect to the alarm relay contacts.
NOTE: In routers where the Routing Engine (RE) and Control Board (CB) are integrated into a single board, a CB-RE is known as Routing and Control Board (RCB). The RCB is a single FRU that provides RE and CB functionality.

223

Table 99: Cable and Wire Specifications for Routing Engine and RCB Management and Alarm Interfaces

Port

Cable Specification Cable/Wire

Maximum Length

Router Receptacle

Supplied

Routing Engine console or auxiliary interface

RS-232 (EIA-232) serial cable

1.83-m length with RJ-45/DB-9 connectors

1.83 m

RJ-45 socket

Routing Engine Ethernet interface

Category 5 cable or equivalent suitable for 100Base-T operation

One 4.57-m length with RJ-45/RJ-45 connectors

100 m

RJ-45 autosensing

Alarm relay contacts Wire with gauge

between 28-AWG

and 14-AWG (0.08

and 2.08 mm2)

None

MX480 Management, and Console Port Specifications and Pinouts
IN THIS SECTION RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for an MX Series Routing Engine ETHERNET Port | 223 RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for MX Series Routing Engine AUX and CONSOLE Ports | 224

RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for an MX Series Routing Engine ETHERNET Port
The port on the Routing Engine labeled ETHERNET is an autosensing 10/100-Mbps Ethernet RJ-45 receptacle that accepts an Ethernet cable for connecting the Routing Engine to a management LAN (or

224

other device that supports out-of-band management). Table 100 on page 224 describes the RJ-45 connector pinout.
Table 100: RJ-45 Connector Pinout for the Routing Engine ETHERNET Port

Signal

TX+

TX�

RX+

Termination network

RX�

Termination network

RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for MX Series Routing Engine AUX and CONSOLE Ports
The ports on the Routing Engine labeled AUX and CONSOLE are asynchronous serial interfaces that accept an RJ-45 connector. The ports connect the Routing Engine to an auxiliary or console management device. Table 101 on page 225 describes the RJ-45 connector pinout.

225

Table 101: RJ-45 Connector Pinout for the AUX and CONSOLE Ports

Signal

Description

RTS

Request to Send

DTR

Data Terminal Ready

TXD

Transmit Data

Ground

Signal Ground

Ground

Signal Ground

RXD

Receive Data

DSR/DCD

Data Set Ready

CTS

Clear to Send

227
Installing an MX480 Router Overview
To install the router:
1. Prepare the installation site. See "MX480 Site Preparation Checklist" on page 187.
2. Review the safety guidelines and warnings. � General Safety Guidelines for Juniper Networks Devices
� General Safety Warnings for Juniper Networks Devices 3. Unpack the router and verify that all parts have been received.
a. See "Unpacking the MX480 Router" on page 228.
b. See "Verifying the MX480 Router Parts Received" on page 230. 4. Install the mounting hardware.
See "Installing the MX480 Router Mounting Hardware for a Rack or Cabinet" on page 233. 5. Install the router.
See "Installing the MX480 Router Using a Mechanical Lift" on page 243. 6. Connect cables to external devices.
See Connecting the MX480 Router to Management and Alarm Devices. 7. Connect the grounding cable.
See "Grounding the MX480 Router" on page 266. 8. Connect the power cables.
� "Connecting Power to an AC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal-Capacity Power Supplies" on page 267
� "Connecting Power to a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power Supplies" on page 270
9. Power on the router. � "Powering On an AC-Powered MX480 Router" on page 269
� "Powering On a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power Supplies" on page 272
10. Perform the initial system configuration. See "Initially Configuring the MX480 Router" on page 283.

228
Unpacking the MX480
IN THIS SECTION Tools and Parts Required to Unpack the MX480 Router | 228 Unpacking the MX480 Router | 228 Verifying the MX480 Router Parts Received | 230
Tools and Parts Required to Unpack the MX480 Router
To unpack the router and prepare for installation, you need the following tools: � Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2 � 1/2-in. or 13-mm open-end or socket wrench to remove bracket bolts from the shipping pallet � Blank panels to cover any slots not occupied by a component
Unpacking the MX480 Router
The router is shipped in a wooden crate. A wooden pallet forms the base of the crate. The router chassis is bolted to this pallet. Quick Start installation instructions and a cardboard accessory box are also included in the shipping crate. The shipping container measures 21 in. (53.3 cm) high, 23.5 in. (60.0 cm) wide, and 32.5 in. (82.5 cm) deep. The total weight of the container containing the router and accessories can range from 93 lb (42.2 kg) to 169 lb (76.7 kg).
NOTE: The router is maximally protected inside the shipping crate. Do not unpack it until you are ready to begin installation.
To unpack the router (see Figure 50 on page 229):

229
1. Move the shipping crate to a staging area as close to the installation site as possible, where you have enough room to remove the components from the chassis. While the chassis is bolted to the pallet, you can use a forklift or pallet jack to move it.
2. Position the shipping crate with the arrows pointing up. 3. Open all the latches on the shipping crate. 4. Remove the front door of the shipping crate cover and set it aside. 5. Slide the remainder of the shipping crate cover off the pallet. 6. Remove the foam covering the top of the router. 7. Remove the accessory box and the Quick Start installation instructions. 8. Verify the parts received against the lists. 9. Remove the vapor corrosion inhibitor (VCI) packs attached to the pallet, being careful not to break
the VCI packs open. 10. To remove the brackets holding the chassis on the pallet, use a 1/2-in. socket wrench and a
number 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the bolts and screws from the brackets. 11. Store the brackets and bolts inside the accessory box. 12. Save the shipping crate cover, pallet, and packing materials in case you need to move or ship the
router at a later time.
Figure 50: Contents of the Shipping Crate

230

Verifying the MX480 Router Parts Received

A packing list is included in each shipment. Check the parts in the shipment against the items on the packing list. The packing list specifies the part numbers and descriptions of each part in your order.
If any part is missing, contact a customer service representative.
A fully configured router contains the router chassis with installed components, listed in Table 102 on page 230, and an accessory box, which contains the parts listed in Table 103 on page 231. The parts shipped with your router can vary depending on the configuration you ordered.
Table 102: Parts List for a Fully Configured Router

Component

Quantity

Chassis, including midplane, craft interface, and center-mounting 1 brackets

DPCs

Up to 6

FPCs

Up to 3

MPCs

Up to 6

MICs

Up to 12

PICs

Up to 6

Routing Engines

1 or 2

SCBs

1 or 2

Power supplies

Up to 4

Fan tray

Air filter

231

Table 102: Parts List for a Fully Configured Router (Continued)

Component

Quantity

Air filter tray

Quick start installation instructions

Small mounting shelf

Blank panels for slots without components installed

One blank panel for each slot not occupied by a component

Table 103: Accessory Box Parts List Part

Quantity

Screws to mount chassis and small shelf

DC power terminal Lugs, 6-AWG

RJ-45-to-DB-9 cable to connect the router through the serial port 1

Cable management brackets

Terminal block plug, 3�pole, 5.08 mm spacing, 12A, to connect the 2 router alarms

Label, accessories contents, MX480

USB flash drive with Junos OS

Read me first document

Affidavit for T1 connection

232

Table 103: Accessory Box Parts List (Continued)
Part

Quantity

Juniper Networks Product Warranty

End User License Agreement

Document sleeve

3 in. x 5 in. pink bag

9 in. x 12 in. pink bag, ESD

Accessory Box, 19 in. x 12 in. x 3 in.

Ethernet cable, RJ-45/RJ-45, 4-pair stranded UTP, Category 5E,

15'

ESD wrist strap with cable

Installing the MX480
IN THIS SECTION Installing the MX480 Router Mounting Hardware for a Rack or Cabinet | 233 Moving the Mounting Brackets for Center-Mounting the MX480 Router | 236 Tools Required to Install the MX480 Router with a Mechanical Lift | 237 Removing Components from the MX480 Router Before Installing It with a Lift | 237 Installing the MX480 Router Using a Mechanical Lift | 243 Reinstalling Components in the MX480 Router After Installing It with a Lift | 245

233
Tools Required to Install the MX480 Router Without a Mechanical Lift | 250 Removing Components from the MX480 Router Before Installing It Without a Lift | 251 Installing the MX480 Chassis in the Rack Manually | 256 Reinstalling Components in the MX480 Router After Installing It Without a Lift | 259 Installing the MX480 Router Cable Management Bracket | 264

Installing the MX480 Router Mounting Hardware for a Rack or Cabinet

The router can be installed in a four-post rack or cabinet or an open-frame rack. Install the mounting hardware on the rack before installing the router.
Install the mounting shelf, which is included in the shipping container, before installing the router. We recommend that you install the mounting shelf because the weight of a fully loaded chassis can be up to 128 lb (58.1 kg).
Table 104 on page 233 specifies the holes in which you insert cage nuts and screws to install the mounting hardware required (an X indicates a mounting hole location). The hole distances are relative to one of the standard U divisions on the rack. The bottom of all mounting shelves is at 0.04 in. (0.02 U) above a "U" division.
Table 104: Four-Post Rack or Cabinet Mounting Hole Locations

Hole Distance Above U Division

Mounting Shelf

2.00 in. (5.1 cm)

1.14 U

1.51 in. (3.8 cm)

0.86 U

0.88 in. (2.2 cm)

0.50 U

0.25 in. (0.6 cm)

0.14 U

To install the mounting shelf on the front rails of a four-post rack or cabinet, or the rails of an openframe rack:
1. If needed, install cage nuts in the holes specified in Table 104 on page 233.

234
2. On the back of each rack rail, partially insert a mounting screw into the lowest hole specified in Table 104 on page 233.
3. Install the small shelf on the back of the rack rails. Rest the bottom slot of each flange on a mounting screw.
4. Partially insert the remaining screws into the open holes in each flange of the small shelf (see Figure 51 on page 235 or Figure 52 on page 236).

235 5. Tighten all the screws completely. Figure 51: Installing the Front-Mounting Hardware for a Four-Post Rack or Cabinet

236
Figure 52: Installing the Mounting Hardware for an Open-Frame Rack
Moving the Mounting Brackets for Center-Mounting the MX480 Router
Two removable mounting brackets are attached to the mounting holes closest to the front of the chassis. You can move the pair of brackets to another position on the side of the chassis for center-mounting the router. To move the mounting brackets from the front of the chassis toward the center of the chassis: 1. Remove the three screws at the top and center of the bracket. 2. Pull the top of the bracket slightly away from the chassis. The bottom of the bracket contains a tab
that inserts into a slot in the chassis. 3. Pull the bracket away from the chassis so that the tab is removed from the chassis slot. 4. Insert the bracket tab into the slot in the bottom center of the chassis. 5. Align the bracket with the two mounting holes located toward the top center of the chassis.
There is no mounting hole in the center of the chassis that corresponds to the hole in the center of the bracket. 6. Insert the two screws at the top of the bracket and tighten each partially. Two screws are needed for mounting the bracket on the center of the chassis. You do not need the third screw. 7. Tighten the two screws completely. 8. Repeat the procedure for the other bracket.

237
Tools Required to Install the MX480 Router with a Mechanical Lift
To install the router, you need the following tools: � Mechanical lift � Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2 � 7/16-in. (11 mm) nut driver � ESD grounding wrist strap
Removing Components from the MX480 Router Before Installing It with a Lift
IN THIS SECTION Removing the Power Supplies Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 237 Removing the Fan Tray Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 238 Removing the SCBs Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 239 Removing the DPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 240 Removing the FPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 241
To make the router light enough to install with a lift, you must first remove most components from the chassis. The procedures for removing components from the chassis are for initial installation only, and assume that you have not connected power cables to the router. The following procedures describe how to remove components from the chassis, first from the rear and then from the front:
Removing the Power Supplies Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
Remove the leftmost power supply first and then work your way to the right. To remove the AC or DC power supplies for each power supply (see Figure 3): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an
approved site ESD grounding point. See the instructions for your site.

238 2. On an AC-powered router, switch the AC input switch on each power supply to the off (O) position.
On a DC-powered router, Move the DC circuit breaker on each DC power supply to the off (O) position. We recommend this even though the power supplies are not connected to power sources. 3. Loosen the captive screws on the bottom edge of the power supply faceplate. 4. Pull the power supply straight out of the chassis. Figure 53: Removing a Power Supply Before Installing the Router
Removing the Fan Tray Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
To remove the fan tray (see Figure 54 on page 239 ): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an
approved site ESD grounding point. See the instructions for your site. 2. Loosen the captive screws on the fan tray faceplate. 3. Grasp the fan tray handle, and pull it out approximately 1 to 3 inches. 4. Press the latch located on the inside of the fan tray to release it from the chassis.

239 5. Place one hand under the fan tray to support it, and pull the fan tray completely out of the chassis. Figure 54: Removing the Fan Tray
Removing the SCBs Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
To remove the SCBs (see Figure 55 on page 240): 1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface. 2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an
approved site ESD grounding point. See the instructions for your site. 3. Rotate the ejector handles simultaneously counterclockwise to unseat the SCB. 4. Grasp the ejector handles, and slide the SCB about halfway out of the chassis. 5. Place one hand underneath the SCB to support it, and slide it completely out of the chassis. Place it
on the antistatic mat.

240
CAUTION: Do not stack hardware components on one another after you remove them. Place each component on an antistatic mat resting on a stable, flat surface. 6. Repeat the procedure for each SCB. Figure 55: Removing an SCB
Removing the DPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
To remove a DPC (see Figure 56 on page 241): 1. Have ready an antistatic mat for the DPC. Also have ready rubber safety caps for each DPC using an
optical interface on the DPC that you are removing. 2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an
approved site ESD grounding point. See the instructions for your site. 3. Simultaneously turn both the ejector handles counterclockwise to unseat the DPC. 4. Grasp the handles, and slide the DPC straight out of the card cage halfway.

241 5. Place one hand around the front of the DPC and the other hand under it to support it. Slide the DPC
completely out of the chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.
CAUTION: The weight of the DPC is concentrated in the back end. Be prepared to accept the full weight--up to 13.1 lb (5.9 kg)--as you slide the DPC out of the chassis. When the DPC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles, bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight. Do not stack DPC on top of one another after removal. Place each one individually in an electrostatic bag or on its own antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
Figure 56: Removing a DPC
Removing the FPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
To remove an FPC (see Figure 57 on page 242): 1. Have ready an antistatic mat for the FPC. Also have ready rubber safety caps for each PIC using an
optical interface on the PIC that you are removing. 2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an
approved site ESD grounding point. See the instructions for your site. 3. Simultaneously turn both the ejector handles counterclockwise to unseat the FPC.

242
4. Grasp the handles, and slide the FPC straight out of the card cage halfway. 5. Place one hand around the front of the FPC and the other hand under it to support it. Slide the FPC
completely out of the chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.
CAUTION: The weight of the FPC is concentrated in the back end. Be prepared to accept the full weight--up to 18 lb (8.2 kg)--as you slide the FPC out of the chassis. When the FPC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles, bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight.
Figure 57: Removing an FPC

243
Installing the MX480 Router Using a Mechanical Lift
Because of the router's size and weight--up to 163.5 lb (74.2 kg) depending on the configuration--we strongly recommend that you install the router using a mechanical lift. To make the router light enough to install with a lift, you must first remove most components from the chassis.
CAUTION: Before front mounting the router in a rack, have a qualified technician verify that the rack is strong enough to support the router's weight and is adequately supported at the installation site.
To install the router using a lift (see Figure 58 on page 244):
1. Ensure that the rack is in its permanent location and is secured to the building. Ensure that the installation site allows adequate clearance for both airflow and maintenance.
2. Load the router onto the lift, making sure it rests securely on the lift platform. 3. Using the lift, position the router in front of the rack or cabinet, centering it in front of the mounting
shelf. 4. Lift the chassis approximately 0.75 in. above the surface of the mounting shelf and position it as
close as possible to the shelf. 5. Carefully slide the router onto the mounting shelf so that the bottom of the chassis and the
mounting shelf overlap by approximately two inches. 6. Slide the router onto the mounting shelf until the mounting brackets contact the rack rails. The shelf
ensures that the holes in the mounting brackets of the chassis align with the holes in the rack rails. 7. Move the lift away from the rack. 8. Install a mounting screw into each of the open mounting holes aligned with the rack, starting from
the bottom.

244 9. Visually inspect the alignment of the router. If the router is installed properly in the rack, all the
mounting screws on one side of the rack should be aligned with the mounting screws on the opposite side and the router should be level. Figure 58: Installing the Router in the Rack
NOTE: This illustration depicts the router being installed in an open-frame rack. For an illustration of the mounting hardware required for a four-post rack or cabinet.

245
SEE ALSO MX480 Site Preparation Checklist | 187 Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router | 499
Reinstalling Components in the MX480 Router After Installing It with a Lift
IN THIS SECTION Reinstalling the Power Supplies After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 245 Reinstalling the Fan Tray After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 246 Reinstalling the SCBs After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 247 Reinstalling the DPCs After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 248 Reinstalling the FPCs After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift | 249
After the router is installed in the rack, you reinstall the removed components before booting and configuring the router. The following procedures describe how to reinstall components in the chassis, first in the rear and then in the front:
Reinstalling the Power Supplies After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
Reinstall the rightmost power supply first and then work your way to the left. To reinstall the AC or DC power supplies, follow this procedure for each power supply (see Figure 9, which shows the installation of the DC power supplies): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. On an AC-powered router, switch the AC input switch on each power supply to the off (O) position.
On a DC-powered router, Move the DC circuit breaker on each DC power supply to the off (O) position. We recommend this even though the power supplies are not connected to power sources. 3. Using both hands, slide the power supply straight into the chassis until the power supply is fully seated in the chassis slot. The power supply faceplate should be flush with any adjacent power supply faceplate or blank installed in the power supply slot.

246 4. Tighten the captive screws. Figure 59: Reinstalling a Power Supply
Reinstalling the Fan Tray After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
To reinstall the fan tray (see Figure 60 on page 247): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Grasp the fan tray on each side, and insert it straight into the chassis. Note the correct orientation by
the "this side up" label on the top surface of the fan tray.

247 3. Tighten the captive screws on the fan tray faceplate to secure it in the chassis. Figure 60: Reinstalling a Fan Tray
Reinstalling the SCBs After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
To reinstall an SCB (see Figure 61 on page 248): CAUTION: Before removing or replacing an SCB, ensure that the ejector handles are stored vertically and pressed toward the center of the SCB.
1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD grounding point.
2. Carefully align the sides of the SCB with the guides inside the chassis. 3. Slide the SCB into the chassis until you feel resistance, carefully ensuring that it is correctly aligned. 4. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them simultaneously clockwise until the SCB is fully seated.

248 5. Place the ejector handles in their proper position, horizontally and toward the center of the board. To
avoid blocking the visibility of the LEDs position the ejectors over the PARK icon. Figure 61: Reinstalling an SCB
Reinstalling the DPCs After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
To reinstall a DPC (see Figure 62 on page 249): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Place the DPC on an antistatic mat, or remove it from its electrostatic bag. 3. Identify the slot on the router where it will be installed. 4. Verify that each fiber-optic transceiver is covered by a rubber safety cap. If it does not, cover the
transceiver with a safety cap. 5. Orient the DPC so that the faceplate faces you. 6. Lift the DPC into place, and carefully align the sides of the DPC with the guides inside the card cage. 7. Slide the DPC all the way into the card cage until you feel resistance.

249 8. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them clockwise simultaneously until the DPC is fully seated. Figure 62: Reinstalling a DPC
Reinstalling the FPCs After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
To reinstall an FPC (see Figure 63 on page 250): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Place the FPC on an antistatic mat, or remove it from its electrostatic bag. 3. Identify the two DPC slots on the router where the FPC will be installed. 4. Verify that each fiber-optic transceiver on the PIC is covered by a rubber safety cap. If it does not,
cover the transceiver with a safety cap. 5. Orient the FPC so that the faceplate faces you. 6. Lift the FPC into place, and carefully align the sides of the FPC with the guides inside the card cage. 7. Slide the FPC all the way into the card cage until you feel resistance.

250 8. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them clockwise simultaneously until the FPC is fully seated. Figure 63: Reinstalling an FPC
RELATED DOCUMENTATION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router | 499
Tools Required to Install the MX480 Router Without a Mechanical Lift
To install the router, you need the following tools and parts: � Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2 � 7/16-in. (11 mm) nut driver � ESD grounding wrist strap

251
Removing Components from the MX480 Router Before Installing It Without a Lift
IN THIS SECTION Removing the Power Supplies Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 251 Removing the Fan Tray Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 252 Removing the SCBs Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 253 Removing the DPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 254 Removing the FPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 255
If you cannot use a mechanical lift to install the router (the preferred method), you can install it manually. To make the router light enough to install manually, you first remove most components from the chassis. The procedures for removing components from the chassis are for initial installation only, and assume that you have not connected power cables to the router. The following procedures describe how to remove components from the chassis, first from the rear and then from the front:
Removing the Power Supplies Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
Remove the leftmost power supply first and then work your way to the right. To remove the AC or DC power supplies for each power supply (see Figure 14): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. On an AC-powered router, switch the AC input switch on each power supply to the off (O) position.
On a DC-powered router, Move the DC circuit breaker on each DC power supply to the off (O) position. We recommend this even though the power supplies are not connected to power sources. 3. Loosen the captive screws on the bottom edge of the power supply faceplate.

252 4. Pull the power supply straight out of the chassis. Figure 64: Removing a Power Supply Before Installing the Router
Removing the Fan Tray Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
To remove the fan tray (see Figure 65 on page 253 ): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an
approved site ESD grounding point. See the instructions for your site. 2. Loosen the captive screws on the fan tray faceplate. 3. Grasp the fan tray handle, and pull it out approximately 1 to 3 inches. 4. Press the latch located on the inside of the fan tray to release it from the chassis.

253 5. Place one hand under the fan tray to support it, and pull the fan tray completely out of the chassis. Figure 65: Removing the Fan Tray
Removing the SCBs Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
To remove the SCBs (see Figure 66 on page 254): 1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface. 2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an
approved site ESD grounding point. See the instructions for your site. 3. Rotate the ejector handles simultaneously counterclockwise to unseat the SCB. 4. Grasp the ejector handles, and slide the SCB about halfway out of the chassis. 5. Place one hand underneath the SCB to support it, and slide it completely out of the chassis. Place it
on the antistatic mat.

254
CAUTION: Do not stack hardware components on one another after you remove them. Place each component on an antistatic mat resting on a stable, flat surface. 6. Repeat the procedure for each SCB. Figure 66: Removing an SCB
Removing the DPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
To remove a DPC (see Figure 67 on page 255): 1. Have ready an antistatic mat for the DPC. Also have ready rubber safety caps for each DPC using an
optical interface on the DPC that you are removing. 2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an
approved site ESD grounding point. See the instructions for your site. 3. Simultaneously turn both the ejector handles counterclockwise to unseat the DPC. 4. Grasp the handles, and slide the DPC straight out of the card cage halfway.

255
5. Place one hand around the front of the DPC and the other hand under it to support it. Slide the DPC completely out of the chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.
CAUTION: The weight of the DPC is concentrated in the back end. Be prepared to accept the full weight--up to 13.1 lb (5.9 kg)--as you slide the DPC out of the chassis. When the DPC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles, bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight. Do not stack DPC on top of one another after removal. Place each one individually in an electrostatic bag or on its own antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
Figure 67: Removing a DPC
Removing the FPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
To remove an FPC (see Figure 68 on page 256): 1. Have ready an antistatic mat for the FPC. Also have ready rubber safety caps for each PIC using an
optical interface on the PIC that you are removing. 2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 3. Simultaneously turn both the ejector handles counterclockwise to unseat the FPC. 4. Grasp the handles, and slide the FPC straight out of the card cage halfway. 5. Place one hand around the front of the FPC and the other hand under it to support it. Slide the FPC
completely out of the chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

256 CAUTION: The weight of the FPC is concentrated in the back end. Be prepared to accept the full weight--up to 18 lb (8.2 kg)--as you slide the FPC out of the chassis. When the FPC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles, bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight. Figure 68: Removing an FPC
Installing the MX480 Chassis in the Rack Manually
To install the router in the rack (see Figure 69 on page 258): CAUTION: If you are installing more than one router in a rack, install the lowest one first. Installing a router in an upper position in a rack or cabinet requires a lift.

257
CAUTION: Before front mounting the router in a rack, have a qualified technician verify that the rack is strong enough to support the router's weight and is adequately supported at the installation site.
CAUTION: Lifting the chassis and mounting it in a rack requires two people. The empty chassis weighs approximately 65.5 lb (29.7 kg).
1. Ensure that the rack is in its permanent location and is secured to the building. Ensure that the installation site allows adequate clearance for both airflow and maintenance.
2. Position the router in front of the rack or cabinet, centering it in front of the mounting shelf. Use a pallet jack if one is available.
3. With one person on each side, hold onto the bottom of the chassis and carefully lift it onto the mounting shelf.
WARNING: To prevent injury, keep your back straight and lift with your legs, not your back. Avoid twisting your body as you lift. Balance the load evenly, and be sure that your footing is solid. 4. Slide the router onto the mounting shelf until the mounting brackets contact the rack rails. The shelf ensures that the holes in the mounting brackets of the chassis align with the holes in the rack rails. 5. Install a mounting screw into each of the open mounting holes aligned with the rack, starting from the bottom.

258 6. Visually inspect the alignment of the router. If the router is installed properly in the rack, all the
mounting screws on one side of the rack should be aligned with the mounting screws on the opposite side and the router should be level. Figure 69: Installing the Router in the Rack
NOTE: This illustration depicts the router being installed in an open-frame rack.

259
Reinstalling Components in the MX480 Router After Installing It Without a Lift
IN THIS SECTION Reinstalling the Power Supplies After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 259 Reinstalling the Fan Tray After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 260 Reinstalling the SCBs After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 261 Reinstalling the DPCs After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 262 Reinstalling the FPCs After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift | 263
After the router is installed in the rack, you reinstall the removed components before booting and configuring the router. The following procedures describe how to reinstall components in the chassis, first in the rear and then in the front:
Reinstalling the Power Supplies After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
Reinstall the rightmost power supply first, and then work your way to the left. To reinstall the AC or DC power supplies, follow this procedure for each power supply (see Figure 20, which shows the installation of the DC power supplies): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. On an AC-powered router, switch the AC input switch on each power supply to the off (O) position.
On a DC-powered router, Move the DC circuit breaker on each DC power supply to the off (O) position. We recommend this even though the power supplies are not connected to power sources. 3. Using both hands, slide the power supply straight into the chassis until the power supply is fully seated in the chassis slot. The power supply faceplate should be flush with any adjacent power supply faceplate or blank installed in the power supply slot.

260 4. Tighten the captive screws. Figure 70: Reinstalling a Power Supply
Reinstalling the Fan Tray After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
To reinstall the fan tray (see Figure 71 on page 261): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Grasp the fan tray on each side, and insert it straight into the chassis. Note the correct orientation by
the "this side up" label on the top surface of the fan tray.

261 3. Tighten the captive screws on the fan tray faceplate to secure it in the chassis. Figure 71: Reinstalling a Fan Tray
Reinstalling the SCBs After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
To reinstall an SCB (see Figure 72 on page 262): CAUTION: Before removing or replacing an SCB, ensure that the ejector handles are stored vertically and pressed toward the center of the SCB.
1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD grounding point.
2. Carefully align the sides of the SCB with the guides inside the chassis. 3. Slide the SCB into the chassis until you feel resistance, carefully ensuring that it is correctly aligned. 4. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them simultaneously clockwise until the SCB is fully seated.

262 5. Place the ejector handles in their proper position, horizontally and toward the center of the board. To
avoid blocking the visibility of the LEDs position the ejectors over the PARK icon. Figure 72: Reinstalling an SCB
Reinstalling the DPCs After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
To reinstall a DPC (see Figure 73 on page 263): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Place the DPC on an antistatic mat, or remove it from its electrostatic bag. 3. Identify the slot on the router where it will be installed. 4. Verify that each fiber-optic transceiver is covered by a rubber safety cap. If it does not, cover the
transceiver with a safety cap. 5. Orient the DPC so that the faceplate faces you. 6. Lift the DPC into place, and carefully align the sides of the DPC with the guides inside the card cage. 7. Slide the DPC all the way into the card cage until you feel resistance.

263 8. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them clockwise simultaneously until the DPC is fully seated. Figure 73: Reinstalling a DPC
Reinstalling the FPCs After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
To reinstall a DPC (see Figure 74 on page 264): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Place the FPC on an antistatic mat, or remove it from its electrostatic bag. 3. Identify the two DPC slots on the router where the FPC will be installed. 4. Verify that each fiber-optic transceiver on the PIC is covered by a rubber safety cap. If it does not,
cover the transceiver with a safety cap. 5. Orient the FPC so that the faceplate faces you. 6. Lift the FPC into place, and carefully align the sides of the FPC with the guides inside the card cage. 7. Slide the FPC all the way into the card cage until you feel resistance.

264 8. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them clockwise simultaneously until the FPC is fully seated. Figure 74: Reinstalling an FPC
Installing the MX480 Router Cable Management Bracket
The cable management brackets attach to both sides of the router. To install the cable management brackets (see Figure 75 on page 265): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Position the cable management brackets on the front sides of the chassis. 3. Insert the tabs into the slots.

265 4. Tighten the captive screws completely. Figure 75: Installing the Cable Management Brackets
Connecting the MX480 to Power
IN THIS SECTION Tools and Parts Required for MX480 Router Grounding and Power Connections | 266 Grounding the MX480 Router | 266 Connecting Power to an AC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal-Capacity Power Supplies | 267 Powering On an AC-Powered MX480 Router | 269

266
Connecting Power to a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power Supplies | 270 Powering On a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power Supplies | 272 Powering Off the MX480 Router | 274 Connecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord | 274 Connecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable | 275
Tools and Parts Required for MX480 Router Grounding and Power Connections
To ground and provide power to the router, you need the following tools and parts: � Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2 � 2.5-mm flat-blade (�) screwdriver � 7/16-in. (11 mm) hexagonal-head external drive socket wrench, or nut driver, with a torque range
between 23 lb-in. (2.6 Nm) and 25 lb-in. (2.8 Nm), for tightening nuts to terminal studs on each power supply on a DC-powered router. � Wire cutters � Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding wrist strap
CAUTION: The maximum torque rating of the terminal studs on the DC power supply is 36 lb-in. (4.0 Nm). The terminal studs may be damaged if excessive torque is applied. Use only a torque-controlled driver or socket wrench to tighten nuts on the DC power supply terminal studs. Use an appropriately-sized driver or socket wrench, with a maximum torque capacity of 50 lb-in. or less. Ensure that the driver is undamaged and properly calibrated and that you have been trained in its use. You may wish to use a driver that is designed to prevent overtorque when the preset torque level is achieved.
Grounding the MX480 Router
You ground the router by connecting a grounding cable to earth ground and then attaching it to the chassis grounding points using UNC 1/4-20 two screws. You must provide the grounding cable (cable lugs are supplied with the router). To ground the router:

267
1. Verify that a licensed electrician has attached the cable lug provided with the router to the grounding cable.
2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an approved site ESD grounding point. See the instructions for your site.
3. Ensure that all grounding surfaces are clean and brought to a bright finish before grounding connections are made.
4. Connect the grounding cable to a proper earth ground. 5. Detach the ESD grounding strap from the site ESD grounding point. 6. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 7. Place the grounding cable lug over the grounding points on the upper rear of the chassis. The bolts
are sized for UNC 1/4-20 bolts. 8. Secure the grounding cable lug to the grounding points, first with the washers, then with the screws. 9. Dress the grounding cable and verify that it does not touch or block access to router components,
and that it does not drape where people could trip on it.
SEE ALSO Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router | 499
Connecting Power to an AC-Powered MX480 Router with NormalCapacity Power Supplies
CAUTION: Do not mix AC and DC power supply modules within the same router. Damage to the router might occur.
You connect AC power to the router by attaching power cords from the AC power sources to the AC appliance inlets located on the power supplies. For power cord and AC power specifications, see "AC Power Cord Specifications for the MX480 Router" on page 33. To connect the AC power cords to the router (see Figure 76 on page 268): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Locate the power cords shipped with the router, which should have a plug appropriate for your
geographical location (see "AC Power Cord Specifications for the MX480 Router" on page 33). 3. Move the AC input switch next to the appliance inlet on the power supply to the off (O) position.

268
4. Connect the power cord to the power supply. 5. Insert the power cord plug into an external AC power source receptacle.
NOTE: Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated AC power feed and a dedicated external circuit breaker.
6. Route the power cord along the cable restraint toward the left or right corner of the chassis. If needed to hold the power cord in place, thread plastic cable ties, which you must provide, through the openings on the cable restraint.
7. Verify that the power cord does not block the air exhaust and access to router components, or drape where people could trip on it.
8. Repeat Step 2 through Step 6 for the remaining power supplies.
Figure 76: Connecting AC Power to the Router (110V)

269
Powering On an AC-Powered MX480 Router
To power on an AC-powered router:
1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD grounding point.
2. Verify that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis. 3. Verify that each AC power cord is securely inserted into its appliance inlet. 4. Verify that an external management device is connected to one of the Routing Engine ports (AUX,
CONSOLE, or ETHERNET). 5. Turn on the power to the external management device. 6. Switch on the dedicated customer site circuit breakers for the power supplies. Follow the ESD and
safety instructions for your site. 7. Move the AC input switch on each power supply to the on (|) position and observe the status LEDs
on each power supply faceplate. If an AC power supply is correctly installed and functioning normally, the AC OK and DC OK LEDs light steadily, and the PS Fail LED is not lit. If any of the status LEDs indicates that the power supply is not functioning normally, repeat the installation and cabling procedures.
NOTE: After powering off a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning it back on. After powering on a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning it off. If the system is completely powered off when you power on the power supply, the Routing Engine (or RCB) boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence. If the Routing Engine finishes booting and you need to power off the system again, first issue the CLI request system halt command. After a power supply is powered on, it can take up to 60 seconds for status indicators--such as the status LEDs on the power supply and the show chassis command display--to indicate that the power supply is functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear during the first 60 seconds.
8. On the external management device connected to the Routing Engine, monitor the startup process to verify that the system has booted properly.
SEE ALSO
Replacing an MX480 AC Power Supply | 412

270
Connecting Power to a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power Supplies
CAUTION: Do not mix AC and DC power supply modules within the same router. Damage to the router might occur.
WARNING: Before performing DC power procedures, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the off position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the off position.
You connect DC power to the router by attaching power cables from the external DC power sources to the terminal studs on the power supply faceplates. You must provide the power cables (the cable lugs are supplied with the router).
To connect the DC source power cables to the router:
1. Switch off the dedicated customer site circuit breakers. Ensure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that there is no chance that the cable leads might become active during installation.
2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD grounding point.
3. Move the DC circuit breaker on the power supply faceplate to the off (O) position. 4. Remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal studs on the faceplate. 5. Verify that the DC power cables are correctly labeled before making connections to the power
supply. In a typical power distribution scheme where the return is connected to chassis ground at the battery plant, you can use a multimeter to verify the resistance of the �48V and RTN DC cables to chassis ground: � The cable with very large resistance (indicating an open circuit) to chassis ground is �48V.
� The cable with very low resistance (indicating a closed circuit) to chassis ground is RTN.
CAUTION: You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity. The power source cables might be labeled (+) and (�) to indicate their polarity. There is no standard color coding for DC power cables. The color coding used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on each power supply.

271
6. Remove the nut and washer from each of the terminal studs. (Use a 7/16-in. [11 mm] nut driver or socket wrench.)
7. Secure each power cable lug to the terminal studs, first with the flat washer, then with the nut (see Figure 77 on page 272). Apply between 23 lb-in. (2.6 Nm) and 25 lb-in. (2.8 Nm) of torque to each nut. Do not overtighten the nut. (Use a 7/16-in. [11 mm] torque-controlled driver or socket wrench.) a. Secure each positive (+) DC source power cable lug to the RTN (return) terminal.
b. Secure each negative (�) DC source power cable lug to the �48V (input) terminal.
CAUTION: Ensure that each power cable lug seats flush against the surface of the terminal block as you are tightening the nuts. Ensure that each nut is properly threaded onto the terminal stud. The nut should be able to spin freely with your fingers when it is first placed onto the terminal stud. Applying installation torque to the nut when improperly threaded may result in damage to the terminal stud.
CAUTION: The maximum torque rating of the terminal studs on the DC power supply is 36 lb-in. (4.0 Nm). The terminal studs may be damaged if excessive torque is applied. Use only a torque-controlled driver or socket wrench to tighten nuts on the DC power supply terminal studs.
The DC power supplies in slots PEM0 and PEM1 must be powered by dedicated power feeds derived from feed A, and the DC power supplies in slots PEM2 and PEM3 must be powered by dedicated power feeds derived from feed B. This configuration provides the commonly deployed A/B feed redundancy for the system. 8. Route the power cables along the cable restraint toward the left or right corner of the chassis. If needed, thread plastic cable ties, which you must provide, through the openings on the cable restraint to hold the power cables in place. 9. Replace the clear plastic cover over the terminal studs on the faceplate. 10. Verify that the power cables are connected correctly, that they are not touching or blocking access to router components, and that they do not drape where people could trip on them.

272 11. Repeat Steps 3 through 10 for the remaining power supplies. Figure 77: Connecting DC Power to the Router
Powering On a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power Supplies
To power on a DC-powered router: 1. Verify that an external management device is connected to one of the Routing Engine ports
(CONSOLE, AUX, or ETHERNET). 2. Turn on the power to the external management device. 3. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 4. Verify that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis. 5. Verify that the source power cables are connected to the appropriate terminal: the positive (+)
source cable to the return terminal (labeled RETURN) and the negative (�) source cable to the input terminal (labeled -48V).

273
6. Switch on the dedicated customer site circuit breakers to provide power to the DC power cables. 7. Check the INPUT OK LED is lit steadily green to verify that power is present. 8. If power is not present:
� Verify that the fuse is installed correctly and turn on the breaker at the battery distribution fuse board or fuse bay.
� Check the voltage with a meter at the terminals of the power supply for correct voltage level and polarity.
9. On each of the DC power supplies, switch the DC circuit breaker to the center position before moving it to the on (--) position.
NOTE: The circuit breaker may bounce back to the off (O) position if you move the breaker too quickly.
If any of the status LEDs indicates that the power supply is not functioning normally, repeat the installation and cabling procedures described in "Replacing an MX480 DC Power Supply" on page 417. 10. Verify that the BREAKER ON LED is lit green steadily. 11. Verify that the PWR OK LED is lit green steadily, indicating the power supply is correctly installed and functioning normally. If the power supply is not functioning normally, repeat the installation and cabling procedures described in "Replacing an MX480 DC Power Supply" on page 417.
NOTE: After powering off a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning it back on. After powering on a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning it off. If the system is completely powered off when you power on the power supply, the Routing Engine (or RCB) boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence. If the Routing Engine finishes booting and you need to power off the system again, first issue the CLI request system halt command. After a power supply is powered on, it can take up to 60 seconds for status indicators--such as the status LEDs on the power supply and the show chassis command display--to indicate that the power supply is functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear during the first 60 seconds.
12. On the external management device connected to the Routing Engine, monitor the startup process to verify that the system has booted properly.

274
SEE ALSO Installing an MX480 DC High-Capacity Power Supply
Powering Off the MX480 Router
NOTE: After powering off a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning it back on.
To power off the router: 1. On the external management device connected to the Routing Engine, issue the request system halt
both-routing-engines operational mode command. The command shuts down the Routing Engines cleanly, so their state information is preserved. (If the router contains only one Routing Engine, issue the request system halt command.)
user@host> request system halt both-routing-engines 2. Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system has halted. For
more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer. 3. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 4. Move the AC input switch on the chassis above the AC power supply or the DC circuit breaker on
each DC power supply faceplate to the off (0) position.
Connecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord
To connect the AC power cord: 1. Locate a replacement power cord with the type of plug appropriate for your geographical location
(see "AC Power Cord Specifications for the MX480 Router" on page 33). 2. Connect the power cord to the power supply. 3. Route the power cord along the cable restraint toward the left or right corner of the chassis. If
needed to hold the power cord in place, thread plastic cable ties, which you must provide, through the openings on the cable restraint. 4. Verify that the power cord does not block the air exhaust and access to router components, or drape where people could trip on it.

275
5. Attach the power cord to the AC power source, and switch on the dedicated customer site circuit breaker for the power supply. Follow the ESD and connection instructions for your site.
6. Switch the AC input switch on the each power supply to the on (--) position and observe the status LEDs on the power supply faceplate. If the power supply is correctly installed and functioning normally, the AC OK and DC OK LEDs light steadily, and the PS FAIL LED is not lit.
SEE ALSO Replacing an MX480 AC Power Supply | 412 AC Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router | 31
Connecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable
WARNING: Before performing DC power procedures, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the off position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the off position.
To connect a power cable for a DC power supply: 1. Locate a replacement power cable that meets the specifications defined in "DC Power Cable
Specifications for the MX480 Router" on page 46. 2. Verify that a licensed electrician has attached a cable lug to the replacement power cable. 3. Verify that the INPUT OK LED is off. 4. Secure the power cable lug to the terminal studs, first with the flat washer, then with the nut. Apply
between 23 lb-in. (2.6 Nm) and 25 lb-in. (2.8 Nm) of torque to each nut (see Figure 78 on page 276). Do not overtighten the nut. (Use a 7/16-in. [11 mm] torque-controlled driver or socket wrench.)
CAUTION: Ensure that each power cable lug seats flush against the surface of the terminal block as you are tightening the nuts. Ensure that each nut is properly threaded onto the terminal stud. The nut should be able to spin freely with your fingers when it is first placed onto the terminal stud. Applying installation torque to the nut when improperly threaded may result in damage to the terminal stud.

276
CAUTION: The maximum torque rating of the terminal studs on the DC power supply is 36 lb-in. (4.0 Nm). The terminal studs may be damaged if excessive torque is applied. Use only a torque-controlled driver or socket wrench to tighten nuts on the DC power supply terminal studs. Figure 78: Connecting Power Cables to the DC Power Supply
5. Route the power cable along the cable restraint toward the left or right corner of the chassis. If needed, thread plastic cable ties, which you must provide, through the openings on the cable restraint to hold the power cable in place.
6. Verify that the DC power cable is connected correctly, that it does not touch or block access to router components, and that it does not drape where people could trip on it.
7. Replace the clear plastic cover over the terminal studs on the faceplate. 8. Attach the power cable to the DC power source. 9. Turn on the dedicated customer site circuit breaker to the power supply. 10. On each of the DC power supplies, switch the DC circuit breaker to the center position before
moving it to the on (--) position.

277
NOTE: The circuit breaker may bounce back to the off (O) position if you move the breaker too quickly.
Observe the status LEDs on the power supply faceplate. If the power supply is correctly installed and functioning normally, the PWR OK, BRKR ON, and INPUT OK LEDs light green steadily.
Connecting the MX480 to the Network
IN THIS SECTION Tools and Parts Required for MX480 Router Connections | 277 Connecting the MX480 Router to a Network for Out-of-Band Management | 278 Connecting the MX480 Router to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device | 278 Connecting the MX480 Router to an External Alarm-Reporting Device | 279 Connecting DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC Cables to the MX480 Router | 280 Connecting the Alarm Relay Wires to the MX480 Craft Interface | 283
Tools and Parts Required for MX480 Router Connections
To connect the router to management devices and line cards, you need the following tools and parts: � Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2 � 2.5-mm flat-blade (�) screwdriver � 2.5-mm Phillips (+) screwdriver � Wire cutters � Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding wrist strap

278
Connecting the MX480 Router to a Network for Out-of-Band Management
To connect the Routing Engine to a network for out-of-band management, connect an Ethernet cable with RJ-45 connectors to the ETHERNET port on the Routing Engine. One Ethernet cable is provided with the router. To connect to the ETHERNET port on the Routing Engine: 1. Turn off the power to the management device. 2. Plug one end of the Ethernet cable (Figure 80 on page 278 shows the connector) into the ETHERNET
port on the Routing Engine. Figure 79 on page 278 shows the port. 3. Plug the other end of the cable into the network device.
Figure 79: Ethernet Port
Figure 80: Routing Engine Ethernet Cable Connector
Connecting the MX480 Router to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device
To use a system console to configure and manage the Routing Engine, connect it to the appropriate CONSOLE port on the Routing Engine. To use a laptop, modem, or other auxiliary device, connect it to the AUX port on the Routing Engine. Both ports accept a cable with an RJ-45 connector. One serial cable with an RJ-45 connector and a DB-9 connector is provided with the router. To connect a device to the CONSOLE port and another device to the AUX port, you must supply an additional cable. To connect a management console or auxiliary device:

279 1. Turn off the power to the console or auxiliary device. 2. Plug the RJ-45 end of the serial cable (Figure 82 on page 279 shows the connector) into the AUX
port or CONSOLE port on the Routing Engine. Figure 81 on page 279 shows the ports. 3. Plug the female DB-9 end into the device's serial port.
NOTE: For console devices, configure the serial port to the following values: � Baud rate--9600 � Parity--N � Data bits--8 � Stop bits--1 � Flow control--none
Figure 81: Auxiliary and Console Ports
Figure 82: Routing Engine Console and Auxiliary Cable Connector
Connecting the MX480 Router to an External Alarm-Reporting Device
To connect the router to external alarm-reporting devices, attach wires to the RED and YELLOW relay contacts on the craft interface. (See Figure 83 on page 280.) A system condition that triggers the red or yellow alarm LED on the craft interface also activates the corresponding alarm relay contact.

280
The terminal blocks that plug into the alarm relay contacts are supplied with the router. They accept wire of any gauge between 28-AWG and 14-AWG (0.08 and 2.08 mm2), which is not provided. Use the gauge of wire appropriate for the external device you are connecting. To connect an external device to an alarm relay contact (see Figure 83 on page 280): 1. Prepare the required length of wire with gauge between 28-AWG and 14-AWG (0.08 and 2.08 mm2). 2. While the terminal block is not plugged into the relay contact, use a 2.5-mm flat-blade screwdriver to
loosen the small screws on its side. With the small screws on its side facing left, insert wires into the slots in the front of the block based on the wiring for the external device. Tighten the screws to secure the wire. 3. Plug the terminal block into the relay contact, and use a 2.5-mm flat-blade screwdriver to tighten the screws on the face of the block. 4. Attach the other end of the wires to the external device. To attach a reporting device for the other kind of alarm, repeat the procedure.
Figure 83: Alarm Relay Contacts
Connecting DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC Cables to the MX480 Router
To connect the DPCs, MPCs, MICs, or PICs to the network (see Figure 84 on page 282 and Figure 85 on page 282): 1. Have ready a length of the type of cable used by the component. For cable specifications, see the
MX Series Interface Module Reference. 2. Remove the rubber safety plug from the cable connector port.

281
LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or removing a cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light. 3. Insert the cable connector into the cable connector port on the faceplate.
NOTE: The XFP cages and optics on the components are industry standard parts that have limited tactile feedback for insertion of optics and fiber. You need to insert the optics and fiber firmly until the latch is securely in place.
4. Arrange the cable to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop.
CAUTION: Avoid bending a fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose.

282 CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cables hang free from the connector. Do not allow the fastened loops of a cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point. Figure 84: Attaching a Cable to a DPC
Figure 85: Attaching a Cable to a MIC

283
Connecting the Alarm Relay Wires to the MX480 Craft Interface
To connect the alarm relay wires between a router and an alarm-reporting device (see Figure 86 on page 283): 1. Prepare the required length of replacement wire with gauge between 28-AWG and 14-AWG (0.08
and 2.08 mm2). 2. Insert the replacement wires into the slots in the front of the block. Use a 2.5-mm flat-blade
screwdriver to tighten the screws and secure the wire. 3. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 4. Plug the terminal block into the relay contact, and use a 2.5-mm flat-blade screwdriver to tighten the
screws on the face of the block. 5. Attach the other end of the wires to the external device.
Figure 86: Alarm Relay Contacts
Initially Configuring the MX480 Router
The T320 router is shipped with Junos OS preinstalled and ready to be configured when the T320 router is powered on. There are three copies of the software: one on a CompactFlash card in the Routing Engine, one on a rotating hard disk in the Routing Engine, and one on a USB flash drive that can be inserted into the slot in the Routing Engine faceplate. When the router boots, it first attempts to start the image on the USB flash drive. If a USB flash drive is not inserted into the Routing Engine or the attempt otherwise fails, the router next tries the CompactFlash card (if installed), and finally the hard disk.

284
You configure the router by issuing Junos OS command-line interface (CLI) commands, either on a console device attached to the CONSOLE port on the Routing Engine, or over a telnet connection to a network connected to the ETHERNET port on the Routing Engine. Gather the following information before configuring the router: � Name the router will use on the network � Domain name the router will use � IP address and prefix length information for the Ethernet interface � IP address of a default router � IP address of a DNS server � Password for the root user This procedure connects the router to the network but does not enable it to forward traffic. For complete information about enabling the router to forward traffic, including examples, see the Junos OS configuration guides. To configure the software: 1. Verify that the router is powered on. 2. Log in as the "root" user. There is no password. 3. Start the CLI.
root# cli root@> 4. Enter configuration mode.
cli> configure [edit] root@# 5. Configure the name of the router. If the name includes spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks (" ").
[edit] root@# set system host-name host-name

285
6. Create a management console user account.
[edit] root@# set system login user user-name authentication plain-text-password New password: password Retype new password: password 7. Set the user account class to super-user.
[edit] root@# set system login user user-name class super-user 8. Configure the router's domain name.
[edit] root@# set system domain-name domain-name 9. Configure the IP address and prefix length for the router's Ethernet interface.
[edit] root@# set interfaces fxp0 unit 0 family inet address address/prefix-length 10. Configure the IP address of a backup router, which is used only while the routing protocol is not running.
[edit] root@# set system backup-router address 11. Configure the IP address of a DNS server.
[edit] root@# set system name-server address 12. Set the root authentication password by entering either a clear-text password, an encrypted password, or an SSH public key string (DSA or RSA).
[edit] root@# set system root-authentication plain-text-password

286
New password: password Retype new password: password
or
[edit] root@# set system root-authentication encrypted-password encrypted-password
or
[edit] root@# set system root-authentication ssh-dsa public-key
or
[edit] root@# set system root-authentication ssh-rsa public-key 13. (Optional) Configure the static routes to remote subnets with access to the management port. Access to the management port is limited to the local subnet. To access the management port from a remote subnet, you need to add a static route to that subnet within the routing table. For more information about static routes, see the Junos OS Administration Library for Routing Devices.
[edit] root@# set routing-options static route remote-subnet next-hop destination-IP retain noreadvertise 14. Configure the telnet service at the [edit system services] hierarchy level.
[edit] root@# set system services telnet 15. (Optional) Display the configuration to verify that it is correct.
[edit] root@# show system {
host-name host-name; domain-name domain-name;

287
backup-router address; root-authentication {
authentication-method (password | public-key); } name-server {
address; } } interfaces { fxp0 {
unit 0 { family inet { address address/prefix-length; }
} } }
16. Commit the configuration to activate it on the router.
[edit] root@# commit
17. (Optional) Configure additional properties by adding the necessary configuration statements. Then commit the changes to activate them on the router.
[edit] root@host# commit
18. When you have finished configuring the router, exit configuration mode.
[edit] root@host# exit root@host>
NOTE: To reinstall Junos OS, you boot the router from the removable media. Do not insert the removable media during normal operations. The router does not operate normally when it is booted from the removable media.

288
When the router boots from the storage media (removable media, CompactFlash card, or hard disk) it expands its search in the /config directory of the routing platform for the following files in the following order: juniper.conf (the main configuration file), rescue.conf (the rescue configuration file), and juniper.conf.1 (the first rollback configuration file). When the search finds the first configuration file that can be loaded properly, the file loads and the search ends. If none of the file can be loaded properly, the routing platform does not function properly. If the router boots from an alternate boot device, Junos OS displays a message indication this when you log in to the router.
RELATED DOCUMENTATION Powering On an AC-Powered MX480 Router | 269 Powering On a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power Supplies | 272

290
Maintaining MX480 Components
IN THIS SECTION Routine Maintenance Procedures for the MX480 Router | 290 MX480 Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) | 291 Tools and Parts Required to Replace MX480 Hardware Components | 292 Replacing the MX480 Craft Interface | 295 Replacing the MX480 Cable Management Brackets | 298 Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable on an MX Series Router | 299 Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable on an MX480 Router | 300
Routine Maintenance Procedures for the MX480 Router
IN THIS SECTION Purpose | 290 Action | 290
Purpose
For optimum router performance, perform preventive maintenance procedures.
Action
� Inspect the installation site for moisture, loose wires or cables, and excessive dust. Make sure that airflow is unobstructed around the router and into the air intake vents.
� Check the status-reporting devices on the craft interface--System alarms and LEDs.

291
� Inspect the air filter at the left rear of the router, replacing it every 6 months for optimum cooling system performance. Do not run the router for more than a few minutes without the air filter in place.
SEE ALSO Maintaining the MX480 Air Filter | 301
MX480 Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)
Field-replaceable units (FRUs) are router components that can be replaced at the customer site. Replacing most FRUs requires minimal router downtime. The router uses the following types of FRUs: � Hot-removable and hot-insertable FRUs--You can remove and replace these components without
powering off the router or disrupting the routing functions. � Hot-pluggable FRUs--You can remove and replace these components without powering off the
router, but the routing functions of the system are interrupted when the component is removed. Table 105 on page 292 lists the FRUs for the MX960 router. Before you replace an SCB or a Routing Engine, you must take the host subsystem offline.

292

Table 105: Field-Replaceable Units Hot-Removable and Hot-Insertable FRUs

Hot-Pluggable FRUs

� Air filter � Craft interface � Backup Switch Control Board (SCB) (if redundant)

� Primary Switch Control Board (SCB) (if nonstop active routing is not configured)
� Primary Routing Engine (if nonstop active routing is not configured)

� Primary Switch Control Board (SCB) (if nonstop active routing is configured)
� Backup Routing Engine (if redundant)
� Primary Routing Engine (if nonstop active routing is configured)

� Switch Control Board (SCB) (nonredundant) � Routing Engine (nonredundant) � Solid-state drives (SSDs) of Routing Engines

� Dense Port Concentrators (DPCs)

� Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs)

� Modular Port Concentrators (MPCs)

� Modular Interface Cards (MICs)

� PICs

� AC, DC, and HVDC/HVAC power supplies (if redundant)

� Fan tray

SEE ALSO MX480 Component Redundancy | 8 Tools and Parts Required to Replace MX480 Hardware Components | 292
Tools and Parts Required to Replace MX480 Hardware Components
To replace hardware components, you need the tools and parts listed in Table 106 on page 293.

293

Table 106: Tools and Parts Required Tool or Part 2.5-mm flat-blade (�) screwdriver

Components � Alarm relay terminal block

7/16-in. (11 mm) nut driver or socket wrench

� DC power supply � Cables and connectors

Blank panels (if component is not reinstalled)

� DPC � FPC � PIC � MPC � MIC � Power supply � Routing Engine � SCB

Electrostatic bag or antistatic mat

� Craft Interface � DPC � FPC � PIC � MPC � MIC � Routing Engine � SCB

294

Table 106: Tools and Parts Required (Continued)

Tool or Part

Components

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding wrist strap

� All

Flat-blade (�) screwdriver

� DPC � Cables and connectors

Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2

� Air filter � Craft interface � Fan tray � SCB � Routing Engine � Cables and connectors

Rubber safety cap

� DPC � MPC � MIC � PIC

Wire cutters

� Cables and connectors � DC power supply

SEE ALSO MX480 Component Redundancy | 8 MX480 Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) | 291

295
Replacing the MX480 Craft Interface
IN THIS SECTION Disconnecting the Alarm Relay Wires from the MX480 Craft Interface | 295 Removing the MX480 Craft Interface | 295 Installing the MX480 Craft Interface | 296 Connecting the Alarm Relay Wires to the MX480 Craft Interface | 297
Disconnecting the Alarm Relay Wires from the MX480 Craft Interface
To disconnect the alarm relay wires from the router and an alarm-reporting device (see Figure 1): 1. Disconnect the existing wire at the external device. 2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 3. Using a 2.5-mm flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the small screws on the face of the terminal block and
remove the block from the relay contact. 4. Using the 2.5-mm flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the small screws on the side of the terminal block.
Remove existing wires from the slots in the front of the block.
Figure 87: Alarm Relay Contacts
SEE ALSO Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router | 499 Connecting the Alarm Relay Wires to the MX480 Craft Interface | 283
Removing the MX480 Craft Interface
To remove the craft interface (see Figure 2):

296
1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD grounding point.
2. Detach any external devices connected to the craft interface. 3. Loosen the captive screws at the left and right corners of the craft interface faceplate. 4. Grasp the craft interface faceplate and carefully tilt it toward you until it is horizontal. 5. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the back of the faceplate by gently pressing on both sides of the
latch with your thumb and forefinger. Remove the craft interface from the chassis.
Figure 88: Removing the Craft Interface
SEE ALSO Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router | 499 Replacing the MX480 Craft Interface | 295
Installing the MX480 Craft Interface
To install the craft interface (see Figure 3): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Grasp the craft interface with one hand, and hold the bottom edge of the craft interface with the
other hand to support its weight. 3. Orient the ribbon cable so that it plugs into the connector socket. The connector is keyed and can be
inserted only one way.

297 4. Align the bottom of the craft interface with the sheet metal above the card cage and press it into
place. 5. Tighten the screws on the left and right corners of the craft interface faceplate. 6. Reattach any external devices connected to the craft interface. Figure 89: Installing the Craft Interface
Connecting the Alarm Relay Wires to the MX480 Craft Interface
To connect the alarm relay wires between a router and an alarm-reporting device (see Figure 4): 1. Prepare the required length of replacement wire with gauge between 28-AWG and 14-AWG (0.08
and 2.08 mm2). 2. Insert the replacement wires into the slots in the front of the block. Use a 2.5-mm flat-blade
screwdriver to tighten the screws and secure the wire. 3. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 4. Plug the terminal block into the relay contact, and use a 2.5-mm flat-blade screwdriver to tighten the
screws on the face of the block.

298 5. Attach the other end of the wires to the external device. Figure 90: Alarm Relay Contacts
Replacing the MX480 Cable Management Brackets
To remove the cable management brackets (see Figure 91 on page 299): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Loosen the captive screws on either side of the chassis. 3. Remove the cable management brackets. To install the cable management brackets (see Figure 91 on page 299): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Position the on the front sides of the chassis. 3. Insert the tabs into the slots.

299 4. Tighten the screws completely. Figure 91: Removing the Cable Management Brackets
Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable on an MX Series Router
One Ethernet cable with RJ-45 connectors is provided with the router. To replace the cable connected to the ETHERNET port: 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Press the tab on the connector, and pull the connector straight out of the port. Figure 92 on page
300 shows the connector. 3. Disconnect the cable from the network device. 4. Plug one end of the replacement cable into the ETHERNET port. Figure 93 on page 300 shows the
port.

300 5. Plug the other end of the cable into the network device. Figure 92: Cable Connector
Figure 93: Ethernet Port
SEE ALSO Replacing an MX960 Routing Engine
Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable on an MX480 Router
To use a system console to configure and manage the Routing Engine, connect it to the CONSOLE port on the Routing Engine. To use a laptop, modem, or other auxiliary device, connect it to the AUX port on the Routing Engine. Both ports accept a cable with an RJ-45 connector. One RJ-45/DB-9 cable is provided with the router. If you want to connect a device to both ports, you must supply another cable. To replace a cable connected to a management console or auxiliary device: 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Press the tab on the connector, and pull the connector straight out of the port. 3. Disconnect the cable from the console or auxiliary device. 4. Plug the RJ-45 end of the replacement serial cable into the CONSOLE or AUX port. Figure 94 on
page 301 shows the external device ports on the Routing Engine.

301 5. Plug the female DB-9 end into the console or auxiliary device's serial port. Figure 94: Auxiliary and Console Ports
Maintaining MX480 Cooling System Components
IN THIS SECTION Maintaining the MX480 Air Filter | 301 Replacing the MX480 Air Filter | 302 Maintaining the MX480 Fan Tray | 304 Replacing the MX480 Fan Tray | 307
Maintaining the MX480 Air Filter
IN THIS SECTION Purpose | 301 Action | 302
Purpose
For optimum cooling, verify the condition of the air filters.

302
Action
� Regularly inspect the air filter. A dirty air filter restricts airflow in the unit, producing a negative effect on the ventilation of the device. The filter degrades over time. You must replace the filter every 6 months.
CAUTION: Always keep the air filter in place while the device is operating, except during replacement. Because the fans are very powerful, they could pull small bits of wire or other materials into the device through the unfiltered air intake. This could damage device components. � The shelf life of polyurethane filter varies from two years to five years depending on the storage conditions. Store in a cool, dry, and dark environment. Wrap the media in plastic and store in an environment with relative humidity between 40%- 80% and temperature between 40� F (4� C) to 90� F (32� C). Note that if the material flakes, or becomes brittle when rubbed or deformed, it is no longer usable.
Replacing the MX480 Air Filter
IN THIS SECTION Removing the MX480 Air Filter | 302 Installing the MX480 Air Filter | 303
Removing the MX480 Air Filter
CAUTION: Do not run the device for more than a few minutes without the air filter in place.
CAUTION: Always keep the air filter in place while the device is operating, except during replacement. Because the fans are very powerful, they could pull small bits of

303
wire or other materials into the device through the unfiltered air intake. This could damage device components. To remove the air filter (see Figure 1): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD grounding point. 2. Loosen the captive screws on the air filter cover. 3. Remove the air filter cover. 4. Slide the air filter out of the chassis.
Figure 95: Removing the Air Filter
SEE ALSO MX480 Cooling System Description | 21 Troubleshooting the MX480 Cooling System | 454
Installing the MX480 Air Filter
To install the air filter (see Figure 2): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Locate the up arrow and ensure that the air filter is right side up. 3. Slide the air filter straight into the chassis until it stops. 4. Align the captive screws of the air filter cover with the mounting holes on the chassis.

304 5. Tighten the captive screws on the air filter cover. Figure 96: Installing the Air Filter
RELATED DOCUMENTATION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router | 499 MX480 Cooling System Description | 21 Troubleshooting the MX480 Cooling System | 454
Maintaining the MX480 Fan Tray
IN THIS SECTION Purpose | 305 Action | 305

305

Purpose
For optimum cooling, verify the condition of the fans.
Action
� Monitor the status of the fans. A fan tray contains multiple fans that work in unison to cool the router components. If one fan fails, the host subsystem adjusts the speed of the remaining fans to maintain proper cooling. A red alarm is triggered when a fan fails, and a yellow alarm and red alarm is triggered when a fan tray is removed.
� To display the status of the cooling system, issue the show chassis environment command. The output is similar to the following:

user@host> show chassis environment

Class Item Temp PEM 0
PEM 1 PEM 2 PEM 3 Routing Engine 0 Routing Engine 1 CB 0 Intake CB 0 Exhaust A CB 0 Exhaust B CB 0 ACBC CB 0 SF A CB 0 SF B CB 1 Intake CB 1 Exhaust A CB 1 Exhaust B CB 1 ACBC CB 1 SF A CB 1 SF B CB 2 Intake CB 2 Exhaust A CB 2 Exhaust B CB 2 ACBC CB 2 SF A CB 2 SF B FPC 2 Intake

Status OK Absent Absent OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent OK

Measurement 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F
40 degrees C / 104 degrees F 39 degrees C / 102 degrees F 42 degrees C / 107 degrees F 26 degrees C / 78 degrees F 27 degrees C / 80 degrees F 27 degrees C / 80 degrees F 26 degrees C / 78 degrees F 37 degrees C / 98 degrees F 35 degrees C / 95 degrees F 27 degrees C / 80 degrees F 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F 28 degrees C / 82 degrees F 27 degrees C / 80 degrees F 36 degrees C / 96 degrees F 36 degrees C / 96 degrees F
22 degrees C / 71 degrees F

306

FPC 2 Exhaust A FPC 2 Exhaust B FPC 2 I3 0 TSensor FPC 2 I3 0 Chip FPC 2 I3 1 TSensor FPC 2 I3 1 Chip FPC 2 I3 2 TSensor FPC 2 I3 2 Chip FPC 2 I3 3 TSensor FPC 2 I3 3 Chip FPC 2 IA 0 TSensor FPC 2 IA 0 Chip FPC 2 IA 1 TSensor FPC 2 IA 1 Chip FPC 4 Intake FPC 4 Exhaust A FPC 4 Exhaust B FPC 4 I3 0 TSensor FPC 4 I3 0 Chip FPC 4 I3 1 TSensor FPC 4 I3 1 Chip FPC 4 I3 2 TSensor FPC 4 I3 2 Chip FPC 4 I3 3 TSensor FPC 4 I3 3 Chip FPC 4 IA 0 TSensor FPC 4 IA 0 Chip FPC 4 IA 1 TSensor FPC 4 IA 1 Chip FPC 7 Intake FPC 7 Exhaust A FPC 7 Exhaust B FPC 7 I3 0 TSensor FPC 7 I3 0 Chip FPC 7 I3 1 TSensor FPC 7 I3 1 Chip FPC 7 I3 2 TSensor FPC 7 I3 2 Chip FPC 7 I3 3 TSensor FPC 7 I3 3 Chip FPC 7 IA 0 TSensor FPC 7 IA 0 Chip FPC 7 IA 1 TSensor

27 degrees C / 80 degrees F

33 degrees C / 91 degrees F

35 degrees C / 95 degrees F

33 degrees C / 91 degrees F

30 degrees C / 86 degrees F

33 degrees C / 91 degrees F

36 degrees C / 96 degrees F

30 degrees C / 86 degrees F

35 degrees C / 95 degrees F

22 degrees C / 71 degrees F

28 degrees C / 82 degrees F

31 degrees C / 87 degrees F

34 degrees C / 93 degrees F

31 degrees C / 87 degrees F

33 degrees C / 91 degrees F

31 degrees C / 87 degrees F

29 degrees C / 84 degrees F

35 degrees C / 95 degrees F

37 degrees C / 98 degrees F

31 degrees C / 87 degrees F

35 degrees C / 95 degrees F

20 degrees C / 68 degrees F

21 degrees C / 69 degrees F

31 degrees C / 87 degrees F

36 degrees C / 96 degrees F

32 degrees C / 89 degrees F

35 degrees C / 95 degrees F

32 degrees C / 89 degrees F

30 degrees C / 86 degrees F

31 degrees C / 87 degrees F

34 degrees C / 93 degrees F

37 degrees C / 98 degrees F

31 degrees C / 87 degrees F

307

FPC 7 IA 1 Chip Fans Top Fan Tray Temp
Top Tray Fan 1 Top Tray Fan 2 Top Tray Fan 3 Top Tray Fan 4 Top Tray Fan 5 Top Tray Fan 6 Bottom Fan Tray Temp Bottom Tray Fan 1 Bottom Tray Fan 2 Bottom Tray Fan 3 Bottom Tray Fan 4 Bottom Tray Fan 5 Bottom Tray Fan 6

35 degrees C / 95 degrees F

27 degrees C / 80 degrees F

Spinning at high speed

28 degrees C / 82 degrees F

Spinning at high speed

SEE ALSO Routine Maintenance Procedures for the MX480 Router | 290
Replacing the MX480 Fan Tray
IN THIS SECTION Removing the MX480 Fan Tray | 307 Installing the MX480 Fan Tray | 309

Removing the MX480 Fan Tray
NOTE: To prevent overheating, install the replacement fan tray immediately after removing the existing fan tray.
To remove the fan tray (see Figure 3):

308
1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD grounding point.
2. Loosen the captive screws on the fan tray faceplate. 3. Grasp the fan tray handle, and pull it out approximately 1 to 3 inches.
WARNING: To avoid injury, keep tools and your fingers away from the fans as you slide the fan module out of the device. The fans might still be spinning. 4. Press the latch located on the inside of the fan tray to release it from the chassis. 5. Place one hand under the fan tray to support it, and pull the fan tray completely out of the chassis.
Figure 97: Removing the Fan Tray

309
Installing the MX480 Fan Tray
To install the fan tray (see Figure 4): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Grasp the fan tray handle, and insert it straight into the chassis. Note the correct orientation by the
this side up label on the top surface of the fan tray. 3. Tighten the captive screws on the fan tray faceplate to secure it in the chassis. Figure 98: Installing the Fan Tray
SEE ALSO Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router | 499 Replacing the MX480 Fan Tray | 307 Maintaining the MX480 Fan Tray | 304 MX480 Cooling System Description | 21 Troubleshooting the MX480 Cooling System | 454
RELATED DOCUMENTATION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router | 499

310
Maintaining MX480 Host Subsystem Components
IN THIS SECTION Maintaining the MX480 Host Subsystem | 310 Replacing an MX480 Routing Engine | 314 Replacing an SSD Drive on an RE-S-1800 | 318 Replacing an SSD Drive on an RE-S-X6-64G | 319 Replacing Connections to MX480 Routing Engine Interface Ports | 324 Upgrading to the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine in a Redundant Host Subsystem | 326 Upgrading to the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine in a Nonredundant Host Subsystem | 334
Maintaining the MX480 Host Subsystem
IN THIS SECTION Purpose | 310 Action | 310
Purpose
For optimum router performance, verify the condition of the host subsystem. The host subsystem comprises an SCB and a Routing Engine installed directly into an SCB.
Action
On a regular basis: � Check the LEDs on the craft interface to view information about the status of the Routing Engines. � Check the LEDs on the SCB faceplate.

311

� Check the LEDs on the Routing Engine faceplate.
� To check the status of the Routing Engines, issue the show chassis routing-engine command. The output is similar to the following:

user@host> show chassis routing-engine

Routing Engine status:

Slot 0:

Current state

Master

Election priority

Master (default)

Temperature

45 degrees C / 113 degrees F

CPU temperature

43 degrees C / 109 degrees F

DRAM

2048 MB

Memory utilization

15 percent

CPU utilization:

User

0 percent

Background

0 percent

Kernel

8 percent

Interrupt

0 percent

Idle

92 percent

Model

RE-S-1300

Serial ID

1000694968

Start time

2007-07-10 12:27:39 PDT

Uptime

1 hour, 40 minutes, 37 seconds

Load averages:

1 minute 5 minute 15 minute

0.11

0.06

0.01

Routing Engine status:

Slot 1:

Current state

Backup

Election priority

Backup (default)

Temperature

46 degrees C / 114 degrees F

CPU temperature

42 degrees C / 107 degrees F

DRAM

2048 MB

Memory utilization

13 percent

CPU utilization:

User

0 percent

Background

0 percent

Kernel

0 percent

Interrupt

0 percent

Idle

100 percent

Model

RE-S-1300

Serial ID

1000694976

312

Start time Uptime

2007-06-19 14:17:00 PDT 20 days, 23 hours, 51 minutes, 4 seconds

� To check the status of the SCBs, issue the show chassis environment cb command. The output is similar to the following:

user@host> show chassis environment cb

CB 0 status:

State

Online Master

Temperature

40 degrees C / 104 degrees F

Power 1

1.2 V

1208 mV

1.5 V

1521 mV

1.8 V

1807 mV

2.5 V

2507 mV

3.3 V

3319 mV

5.0 V

5033 mV

12.0 V

12142 mV

1.25 V

1243 mV

3.3 V SM3

3312 mV

5 V RE

5059 mV

12 V RE

11968 mV

Power 2

11.3 V bias PEM

11253 mV

4.6 V bias MidPlane

4814 mV

11.3 V bias FPD

11234 mV

11.3 V bias POE 0

11176 mV

11.3 V bias POE 1

11292 mV

Bus Revision

FPGA Revision

CB 1 status:

State

Online Standby

Temperature

40 degrees C / 104 degrees F

Power 1

1.2 V

1202 mV

1.5 V

1514 mV

1.8 V

1807 mV

2.5 V

2500 mV

3.3 V

3293 mV

5.0 V

5053 mV

12.0 V

12200 mV

1.25 V

1260 mV

313

3.3 V SM3 5 V RE 12 V RE Power 2 11.3 V bias PEM 4.6 V bias MidPlane 11.3 V bias FPD 11.3 V bias POE 0 11.3 V bias POE 1 Bus Revision FPGA Revision

3319 mV 5059 mV 12007 mV
11311 mV 4827 mV 11330 mV 11292 mV 11311 mV 42 1

To check the status of a specific SCB, issue the show chassis environment cb command and include the slot number of the SCB. The output is similar to the following:

user@host> show chassis environment cb 0

CB 0 status:

State

Online

Temperature Intake

66 degrees C / 150 degrees F

Temperature Exhaust A

67 degrees C / 152 degrees F

Temperature Exhaust B

73 degrees C / 163 degrees F

Power

1.2 V

1153 mV

1.5 V

1417 mV

1.8 V

1704 mV

2.5 V

2375 mV

3.3 V

3138 mV

5.0 V

4763 mV

1.2 V Rocket IO

1160 mV

1.5 V Rocket IO

1408 mV

1.8 V RLDRAM

1717 mV

I2C Slave Revision

For more information about using the CLI, see the Junos OS manuals.

SEE ALSO MX480 Craft Interface Description | 13 MX480 Routing Engine Description | 50

314
Replacing an MX480 Routing Engine
IN THIS SECTION Removing an MX480 Routing Engine | 314 Installing an MX480 Routing Engine | 316
Removing an MX480 Routing Engine
Before you remove a Routing Engine, remove the cables that connect to it.
CAUTION: Before you replace a Routing Engine, you must take the host subsystem offline. If there is only one host subsystem, taking the host subsystem offline shuts down the router.
CAUTION: If the Routing Engine to be replaced is currently functioning as the master Routing engine, switch it to be the backup before removing it.
To remove a Routing Engine from an SCB (see Figure 1): 1. Take the Routing Engine offline gracefully. 2. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface. 3. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 4. Verify that the Routing Engine LEDs are off. 5. Loosen the captive screws on the top and bottom of the Routing Engine. 6. Flip the ejector handles outward to unseat the Routing Engine. 7. Grasp the Routing Engine by the ejector handles, and slide it about halfway out of the chassis. 8. Place one hand underneath the Routing Engine to support it, and slide it completely out of the
chassis. 9. Place the Routing Engine on the antistatic mat.

315
NOTE: To maintain proper airflow through the chassis, do not leave an SCB installed in the chassis without a Routing Engine for extended periods of time. If a Routing Engine is removed, a replacement Routing Engine should be installed as soon as possible.
Figure 99: Removing a Routing Engine

316
Installing an MX480 Routing Engine
To install a Routing Engine into an SCB (Figure 2):
1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD grounding point.
2. Ensure that the ejector handles are not in the locked position. If necessary, flip the ejector handles outward.
3. Place one hand underneath the Routing Engine to support it. 4. Carefully align the sides of the Routing Engine with the guides inside the opening on the SCB. 5. Slide the Routing Engine into the SCB until you feel resistance, and then press the Routing Engine's
faceplate until it engages the connectors.

CAUTION: Align the Routing Engine correctly to avoid damaging it.
6. Press both of the ejector handles inward to seat the Routing Engine. 7. Tighten the captive screws on the left and right of the Routing Engine. 8. Connect the management device cables to the Routing Engine.
The Routing Engine might require several minutes to boot.
After the Routing Engine boots, verify that it is installed correctly by checking the FAIL, RE0, and RE1 LEDs on the craft interface. If the router is operational and the Routing Engine is functioning properly, the green ONLINE LED lights steadily. If the red FAIL LED lights steadily instead, remove and install the Routing Engine again. If the red FAIL LED still lights steadily, the Routing Engine is not functioning properly. Contact your customer support representative.
To check the status of the Routing Engine, use the CLI command:

user@host> show chassis routing-engine

Routing Engine status:

Slot 0: Current state

Master ...

For more information about using the CLI, see the Junos OS documentation.

317
NOTE: If enhanced IP network services is configured on the chassis, all routing engines must be rebooted after synchronizing the routing engines. For more information on synchronizing the routing engines, see Synchronizing Routing Engines. Figure 100: Installing an MX480 Routing Engine
SEE ALSO Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router | 499 Replacing Connections to MX480 Routing Engine Interface Ports | 324
RELATED DOCUMENTATION Replacing Connections to MX480 Routing Engine Interface Ports | 324 Effect of Taking the MX480 Host Subsystem Offline Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router | 499 Replacing Connections to MX480 Routing Engine Interface Ports | 324

318
Synchronizing Routing Engines
Replacing an SSD Drive on an RE-S-1800
Each RE-S-1800 Routing Engine supports two solid-state drives (SSD) specified by Juniper Networks. The RE-S-1800 ships with one SSD installed in the slot labeled SATA SSD 1. The spare SSD is Juniper part number SSD-32G-RE-S. Figure 101 on page 318 shows the arrangement of storage drive slots on a RE-S-1800 Routing Engine.
Figure 101: RE-S-1800 Storage Drive Slots
The following drive has been verified to work in the RE-S-1800 Routing Engine: � SSD-32G-RE-S To replace a storage drive: 1. Disable and deactivate the storage drive. 2. Remove the storage drive.
a. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to an ESD point on the appliance. For more information about ESD, see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage in the hardware guide for your router.
b. Unfasten the thumbscrew that secures the access door in front of the storage drive slots, and open the door.
c. Slide the lock on the ejector to the unlocked position. d. Carefully slide the drive out of the slot.

319
3. Reinstall a storage drive. a. Carefully align the sides of the drive with the guides in the slot. b. Slide the drive into the slot until you feel resistance, carefully ensuring that it is correctly aligned. c. Close the access door and tighten the thumbscrew to secure the door.
SEE ALSO How to Return a Hardware Component to Juniper Networks, Inc.
Replacing an SSD Drive on an RE-S-X6-64G
Each RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine supports two solid-state drives (SSD) specified by Juniper Networks. The RE-S-X6-64G ships with two SSDs installed in the slot labeled DISK1 and DISK2. Figure 102 on page 319 shows the arrangement of storage drive slots on a RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine. Replacing an SSD drive in a RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine consists of the following two stages: 1. Replacing the SSD Drive in the Routing Engine. 2. Copying vmhost and Junos OS to the replaced SSD.
Figure 102: RE-S-X6-64G Storage Drive Slots
The following drive has been verified to work in the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine: � 64GB slim SATA SSD Replacing the SSDs: 1. To replace an SSD in the slot labeled Disk2:
� Make sure that there is no VMHost %d Boot from alternate disk alarm in the output:

320
user@host>show chassis alarm
To replace an SSD in the slot labeled Disk1: a. Make sure that the router is booted up and running from an image from disk1.
Back up the currently running vmhost and Junos OS on disk1 to ensure that both disk1 and disk2 have the same version of vmhost and Junos OS: user@host> request vmhost snapshot [partition]
NOTE: Partitioning the target media is optional.
b. Reboot the router from disk2: user@host> request vmhost reboot disk2
c. Check for the presence of the VMHost %d Boot from alternate disk alarm in the output: user@host>show chassis alarm
2. Offline the Routing Engine by pressing the ONLINE/OFFLINE button. 3. Remove the SSD.
a. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to an ESD point on the appliance. For more information about ESD, see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage in the hardware guide for your router.
b. Unfasten the thumbscrew that secures the access door in front of the storage drive slots, and open the door.
c. Slide the lock on the ejector to the unlocked position.

321 d. Carefully slide the drive out of the slot. Figure 103: Removing an SSD in the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G
4. Reinstall an SSD: a. Carefully align the sides of the drive with the guides in the slot. b. Slide the drive into the slot until you feel resistance, carefully ensuring that it is correctly aligned. c. Close the access door and tighten the thumbscrew to secure the door.
1. Copy Junos OS to the newly replaced SSD: If both the SSDs are replaced together: a. Install using an USB disk: i. Insert the USB disk in the USB slot on the Routing Engine. ii. After the Routing Engine boots from the USB, press y when you are prompted to confirm Install vmhost and Junos software on Primary and Secondary disk [y/N? on the console. iii. After the installation is completed, press y when prompted to confirm Reboot now? [y/N]? to reboot from the SSD disk. NOTE: To prepare a bootable USB disk, see Creating an Emergency Boot Device for Routing Engines with VM Host Support. b. Install vmhost using the PXEBoot method:

322

Set up the PXEBoot server. See Copying VM Host Installation Package to the PXE Boot

Server.

ii.

Bring the Routing Engine online by pressing the ONLINE/OFFLINE button

iii.

During the boot, when you see the message Press Esc for boot options press Esc key to

enter into the BIOS menu boot options.

After the Esc key is pressed, Esc is pressed. Go to boot options. is displayed on the screen.

iv.

Using Up or Down arrow keys, navigate to Boot Manager and press the Enter key.

Using Up or Down arrow keys, navigate through the EFI boot devices listed and select EFI

Network 0 for IPv4 to boot from the PXEboot server and press the Enter key.

vi.

Booting `net boot console is displayed and PXEBoot continues.

NOTE: The booting process may take several minutes.

vii. After the Routing Engine boots, press y when you are prompted to confirm Install vmhost and Junos software on Primary and Secondary disk [y/N? on the console.
viii. After the installation is completed, press y when prompted to confirm Reboot now? [y/N]? to reboot from the SSD disk.
If only disk2 is replaced: a. Bring the Routing Engine online by pressing the ONLINE/OFFLINE button.
b. The router boots from disk1. To be able to boot from disk2: user@host> request vmhost snapshot partition
If only disk1 is replaced: a. Bring the Routing Engine online by pressing the ONLINE/OFFLINE button.
b. The router boots from disk2 . To be able to boot from disk1:

323 user@host> request vmhost snapshot partition Figure 104: Installing an SSD in the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G

1-- Carrier

2-- SSD card

Copying vmhost and Junos OS from an USB disk when both the SSDs are replaced together:

NOTE: To prepare a bootable USB disk, see Creating an Emergency Boot Device for RE-MX-X6, RE-MX-X8 and RE-PTX-X8 Routing Engines.

1. Insert the USB disk in the USB slot on the Routing Engine.
2. After the Routing Engine boots from the USB, press y when you are prompted to confirm Install vmhost and Junos software on Primary and Secondary disk [y/N]? on the console.
3. After the installation is completed, press y when prompted to confirm Reboot now? [y/N]? to reboot from the SSD disk.
Copying vmhost and Junos OS to the SSDs from the PXEBoot server: 1. Set up the PXEBoot server. See Copying VM Host Installation Package to the PXE Boot Server.
2. Bring the Routing Engine online by pressing the ONLINE/OFFLINE button.
3. During the boot, when you see the message Press Esc for boot options press Esc key to enter into the BIOS menu boot options. After the Esc key is pressed, Esc is pressed. Go to boot options. is displayed on the screen.
4. Using Up or Down arrow keys, navigate to Boot Manager and press the Enter key.

324
5. Using Up or Down arrow keys, navigate through the EFI boot devices listed and select EFI Network 0 for IPv4 to boot from the PXEboot server and press the Enter key.
6. Booting `net boot console is displayed and PXEBoot continues.
NOTE: The booting process may take several minutes.
7. After the Routing Engine boots, press y when you are prompted to confirm Install vmhost and Junos software on Primary and Secondary disk [y/N]? on the console.
8. After the installation is completed, press y when prompted to confirm Reboot now? [y/N]? to reboot from the SSD disk.
Copying vmhost and Junos OS when only one disk is replaced: 1. Bring the Routing Engine online by pressing the ONLINE/OFFLINE button. 2. The router boots from disk1 if disk2 is replaced. To be able to boot from disk2:
user@host> request vmhost snapshot partition The router boots from disk2 if disk1 is replaced. To be able to boot from disk1: user@host> request vmhost snapshot recovery partition
SEE ALSO How to Return a Hardware Component to Juniper Networks, Inc. Upgrading the SSD Firmware on Routing Engines with VM Host Support
Replacing Connections to MX480 Routing Engine Interface Ports
IN THIS SECTION Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable on an MX Series Router | 325 Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable on an MX480 Router | 325

325
Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable on an MX Series Router
One Ethernet cable with RJ-45 connectors is provided with the router. To replace the cable connected to the ETHERNET port: 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Press the tab on the connector, and pull the connector straight out of the port. Figure 7 shows the
connector. 3. Disconnect the cable from the network device. 4. Plug one end of the replacement cable into the ETHERNET port. Figure 8 shows the port. 5. Plug the other end of the cable into the network device.
Figure 105: Cable Connector
Figure 106: Ethernet Port
Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable on an MX480 Router
To use a system console to configure and manage the Routing Engine, connect it to the CONSOLE port on the Routing Engine. To use a laptop, modem, or other auxiliary device, connect it to the AUX port on the Routing Engine. Both ports accept a cable with an RJ-45 connector. One RJ-45/DB-9 cable is provided with the router. If you want to connect a device to both ports, you must supply another cable. To replace a cable connected to a management console or auxiliary device: 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Press the tab on the connector, and pull the connector straight out of the port. 3. Disconnect the cable from the console or auxiliary device.

326
4. Plug the RJ-45 end of the replacement serial cable into the CONSOLE or AUX port. Figure 9 shows the external device ports on the Routing Engine.
5. Plug the female DB-9 end into the console or auxiliary device's serial port.
Figure 107: Auxiliary and Console Ports
RELATED DOCUMENTATION Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications for MX Series Routers Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router | 499
Upgrading to the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine in a Redundant Host Subsystem
IN THIS SECTION Removing the Routing Engine | 327 Installing the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G | 330 Verifying and Configuring the Upgraded Routing Engine as the Primary | 333 Verifying and Configuring the Upgraded Routing Engine as the Backup | 334
A redundant host subsystem consists of a primary Routing Engine (RE0) and a backup Routing Engine (RE1). To upgrade the host subsystem to use the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine, you must first uninstall the backup Routing Engine and install the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine, which then becomes the backup Routing Engine. You then switch over this backup Routing Engine to make it the primary Routing Engine. Replace the other Routing Engine and configure it as the backup Routing Engine.

327
Ensure that the Switch Control Board in the chassis is SCBE2 or SCBE3 because the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine is not compatible with the Switch Control Boards SCB or SCBE. To upgrade the Switch Control Board to SCBE2, see Upgrading an MX240 to Use the SCBE2-MX, "Upgrading an MX480 to Use the SCBE2-MX" on page 441 or Upgrading an MX960 to Use the SCBE2-MX, depending on the chassis on which the Routing Engine is being upgraded. To upgrade the Switch Control Board to SCBE3 "Upgrading an MX240, MX480, or MX960 Router to Use the SCBE3-MX" on page 447.
NOTE: Save the router configuration before proceeding with the Routing Engine upgrade.
NOTE: Nonstop active routing (NSR) and graceful Routing Engine switchover (GRES) are not supported during the upgrade and they must be temporarily disabled. Disable NSR by removing the nonstop-routing statement from the [edit routing-options] hierarchy level and by removing the graceful-switchover statement from the [edit chassis redundancy] hierarchy level .
Removing the Routing Engine
To remove the backup Routing Engine from the chassis (see Figure 10, Figure 11, and Figure 12):
1. On the external management device connected to the Routing Engine, shut down the host subsystem by using the request system power-off command.
2. Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system has halted. 3. Remove the cables connected to the Routing Engine. 4. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface. Attach an electrostatic discharge
(ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. 5. Verify that the Routing Engine LEDs are off. Loosen the captive screws on the top and bottom of the Routing Engine. 6. Grasp the Routing Engine by the ejector handles, and slide it about halfway out of the chassis. 7. Place one hand underneath the Routing Engine to support it, and slide it completely out of the chassis. Place the Routing Engine on the antistatic mat.

328
NOTE: To maintain proper airflow through the chassis, do not leave an SCB installed in the chassis without a Routing Engine for extended periods of time. If a Routing Engine is removed, a replacement Routing Engine should be installed as soon as possible.
Figure 108: Removing a Routing Engine from an MX240 Router

329 Figure 109: Removing a Routing Engine from an MX480 Router

330 Figure 110: Removing a Routing Engine from an MX960 Router
Installing the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G
To install the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G: 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis. 2. Ensure that the ejector handles are not in the locked position. If necessary, flip the ejector handles
outward.

331
3. Place one hand underneath the Routing Engine to support it and carefully align the sides of the Routing Engine with the guides inside the opening on the Switch Control Board SCBE2 or SCBE3.
NOTE: The Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G is supported only on the SCBE2 or SCBE3. RE-SX6-64G is not compatible with the SCB or the SCBE.
4. Slide the Routing Engine into the SCBE2 or SCBE3 until you feel resistance, and then press the Routing Engine's faceplate until it engages the connectors.
5. Press both of the ejector handles inward to seat the Routing Engine. Tighten the captive screws on the top and bottom of the Routing Engine.
6. Connect the management device cables to the Routing Engine. After the Routing Engine is installed, the ONLINE LED starts blinking green slowly.
7. Replace the former primary Routing Engine, RE0, with the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G.
NOTE: The Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G is supported only on the SCBE2 and SCBE3. RE-SX6-64G is not compatible with the SCB or the SCBE.
The Routing Engine might require several minutes to boot. After the Routing Engine boots, verify that it is installed correctly by checking the FAIL, RE0, and RE1 LEDs on the craft interface. If the router is operational and the Routing Engine is functioning properly, the green ONLINE LED on the Routing Engine lights steadily. If the red FAIL LED on the Routing Engine lights steadily instead, remove and

332 install the Routing Engine again. If the red FAIL LED still lights steadily, the Routing Engine is not functioning properly. Contact your customer support representative. Figure 111: Installing a Routing Engine in an MX240 Router
Figure 112: Installing a Routing Engine in an MX480 Router

333 Figure 113: Installing a Routing Engine in an MX960 Router
Verifying and Configuring the Upgraded Routing Engine as the Primary
After replacing the backup Routing Engine with the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine, perform the following steps: 1. Verify that the SCBE2 or SCBE3 and RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine are online by issuing the show
chassis hardware command.

334
2. After you install the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine into the SCBE2 or SCBE3, the Routing Engine gets automatically powered on and comes up in amnesiac mode as it is loaded with factory defaults. After the Routing Engine comes up in amnesiac mode, load the base configuration and commit.
3. Configure the backup Routing Engine by using the commit synchronize command to copy the configuration to the backup Routing Engine.
4. Use the request chassis routing-engine master switch command to make the Routing Engine RE-SX6-64G (RE1) the primary Routing Engine. All FPCs reboot after this step.
Verifying and Configuring the Upgraded Routing Engine as the Backup
1. Use the request chassis routing-engine master switch command to make newly installed RE-S-X6-64G (RE0) the backup Routing Engine.
2. Use the commit synchronize command to copy the active configuration from the primary Routing Engine to the backup Routing Engine.
RELATED DOCUMENTATION RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Description
Upgrading to the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine in a Nonredundant Host Subsystem
IN THIS SECTION Removing the Routing Engine | 335 Installing the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G | 335
In a nonredundant host subsystem, only one Routing Engine and one Switch Control Board are present in the chassis. When you are upgrading the Routing Engine, taking the host subsystem offline shuts down the router. To upgrade the host subsystem with the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine, you must uninstall the existing Routing Engine and install the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine. Ensure that the Switch Control Board in the chassis is SCBE2 because the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine is not compatible with the Switch Control Boards SCB or SCBE. To upgrade the Switch Control Board to SCBE2, see Upgrading an MX240 to Use the SCBE2-MX, "Upgrading an MX480 to Use the SCBE2-MX"

335
on page 441or Upgrading an MX960 to Use the SCBE2-MX, depending on the chassis on which the Routing Engine is being upgraded. .
NOTE: Save the router configuration before proceeding with the Routing Engine upgrade.
Removing the Routing Engine
To remove the Routing Engine from the chassis: 1. On the external management device connected to the Routing Engine, shut down the host
subsystem by using the request system power-off command. 2. Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system has halted. 3. Remove the cables connected to the Routing Engine. 4. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface. Attach an ESD grounding strap to
your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. 5. Verify that the Routing Engine LEDs are off. Loosen the captive screws on the top and bottom of the
Routing Engine. 6. Grasp the Routing Engine by the ejector handles, and slide it about halfway out of the chassis. 7. Place one hand underneath the Routing Engine to support it, and slide it completely out of the
chassis. Place the Routing Engine on the antistatic mat.
NOTE: To maintain proper airflow through the chassis, do not leave an SCB installed in the chassis without a Routing Engine for extended periods of time. If a Routing Engine is removed, a replacement Routing Engine should be installed as soon as possible.
Installing the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G
To install the new Routing Engine (RE-S-X6-64G): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis. 2. Ensure that the ejector handles are not in the locked position. If necessary, flip the ejector handles
outward. 3. Place one hand underneath the Routing Engine to support it and carefully align the sides of the
Routing Engine with the guides inside the opening on the SCBE2.

336
NOTE: The Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G is supported only on the SCBE2. RE-S-X6-64G is not compatible with the SCB or the SCBE.
4. Slide the Routing Engine into the SCBE2 until you feel resistance, and then press the Routing Engine's faceplate until it engages the connectors.
5. Press both of the ejector handles inward to seat the Routing Engine. Tighten the captive screws on the top and bottom of the Routing Engine.
6. Connect the management device cables to the Routing Engine. After the Routing Engine is installed, the ONLINE LED starts blinking green slowly.
7. Verify that the SCBE2 and RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine are online by issuing the show chassis hardware command.
8. After you install the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine into the SCBE2, the Routing Engine gets automatically powered on and comes up in amnesiac mode as it is loaded with factory defaults. After the Routing Engine comes up in amnesiac mode, load the base configuration and commit.
The Routing Engine might require several minutes to boot. After the Routing Engine boots, verify that it is installed correctly by checking the FAIL, RE0, and RE1 LEDs on the craft interface. If the router is operational and the Routing Engine is functioning properly, the green ONLINE LED on the Routing Engine lights steadily. If the red FAIL LED lights steadily instead, remove the Routing Engine and reinstall it. If the red FAIL LED on the Routing Engine still lights steadily, the Routing Engine is not functioning properly. Contact your customer support representative.
RELATED DOCUMENTATION RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Description Upgrading to the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine in a Redundant Host Subsystem
Maintaining MX480 Interface Modules
IN THIS SECTION Maintaining MX480 DPCs | 337 Holding an MX480 DPC | 340 Storing an MX480 DPC | 343

338

Action
On a regular basis:
� Check the LEDs on the craft interface directly above each DPC slot. The green LED labeled OK lights steadily when a DPC is functioning normally.
� Check the OK/FAIL LED on the DPC. For more information, seeMX Series Interface Module Reference . If the DPC detects a failure, the DPC sends an alarm message to the Routing Engine.
� Check the status of installed DPCs by issuing the CLI show chassis fpc command to check the status of installed DPCs. As shown in the sample output, the value Online in the column labeled State indicates that the DPC is functioning normally:

user@host> show chassis fpc

Temp CPU Utilization (%) Memory Utilization (%)

Slot State

DRAM (MB) Heap Buffer

0 Online

1024

1 Online

1024

2 Online

43 11

1024

3 Empty

4 Empty

5 Online

1024

For more detailed output, add the detail option. The following example does not specify a slot number, which is optional:

user@host> show chassis fpc detail

Slot 0 information:

State

Online

Temperature

41 degrees C / 105 degrees F

Total CPU DRAM

1024 MB

Total RLDRAM

256 MB

Total DDR DRAM

4096 MB

Start time:

2007-07-10 12:28:33 PDT

Uptime:

1 hour, 33 minutes, 52 seconds

Max Power Consumption

368 Watts

Slot 1 information:

State

Online

Temperature

43 degrees C / 109 degrees F

Total CPU DRAM

1024 MB

Total RLDRAM

256 MB

339

Total DDR DRAM Start time: Uptime: Max Power Consumption Slot 2 information: State Temperature Total CPU DRAM Total RLDRAM Total DDR DRAM Start time: Uptime: Max Power Consumption Slot 5 information: State Temperature Total CPU DRAM Total RLDRAM Total DDR DRAM Start time: Uptime: Max Power Consumption

4096 MB 2007-07-10 12:28:38 PDT 1 hour, 33 minutes, 47 seconds
249 Watts
Online 43 degrees C / 109 degrees F 1024 MB 256 MB 4096 MB
2007-07-10 12:28:40 PDT 1 hour, 33 minutes, 45 seconds 335 Watts
Online 42 degrees C / 107 degrees F 1024 MB 256 MB 4096 MB
2007-07-10 12:28:42 PDT 1 hour, 33 minutes, 43 seconds 333 Watts

� Issue the CLI show chassis fpc pic-status command. The DPC slots are numbered 0 through 5, bottom to top:

user@host> show chassis fpc pic-status

Slot 0 Online

DPCE 4x 10GE R

PIC 0 Online

1x 10GE(LAN/WAN)

PIC 1 Online

1x 10GE(LAN/WAN)

PIC 2 Online

1x 10GE(LAN/WAN)

PIC 3 Online

1x 10GE(LAN/WAN)

Slot 1 Online

DPCE 40x 1GE R

PIC 0 Online

10x 1GE(LAN)

PIC 1 Online

10x 1GE(LAN)

PIC 2 Online

10x 1GE(LAN)

PIC 3 Online

10x 1GE(LAN)

Slot 2 Online

DPCE 40x 1GE R

PIC 0 Online

10x 1GE(LAN)

PIC 1 Online

10x 1GE(LAN)

PIC 2 Online

10x 1GE(LAN)

340

PIC 3 Slot 5
PIC 0 PIC 1 PIC 2 PIC 3

Online Online Online Online Online Online

10x 1GE(LAN) DPC 4x 10GE R 1x 10GE(LAN/WAN) 1x 10GE(LAN/WAN) 1x 10GE(LAN/WAN) 1x 10GE(LAN/WAN)

For further description of the output from the command, see the CLI Explorer.

SEE ALSO MX480 Chassis Description | 6 MX480 Component LEDs on the Craft Interface | 15

Holding an MX480 DPC
When carrying a DPC, you can hold it either vertically or horizontally.
NOTE: A DPC weighs 14.5 lb (6.6 kg). Be prepared to accept the full weight of the DPC as you lift it.
To hold a DPC vertically: 1. Orient the DPC so that the faceplate faces you. To verify orientation, confirm that the text on the
DPC is right-side up and the electromagnetic interference (EMI) strip is on the right-hand side. 2. Place one hand around the DPC faceplate about a quarter of the way down from the top edge. To
avoid deforming the EMI shielding strip, do not press hard on it. 3. Place your other hand at the bottom edge of the DPC. If the DPC is horizontal before you grasp it, place your left hand around the faceplate and your right hand along the bottom edge. To hold a DPC horizontally: 1. Orient the DPC so that the faceplate faces you. 2. Grasp the top edge with your left hand and the bottom edge with your right hand. You can rest the faceplate of the DPC against your body as you carry it.

341 As you carry the DPC, do not bump it against anything. DPC components are fragile. Never hold or grasp the DPC anywhere except places that this document indicates. In particular, never grasp the connector edge, especially at the power connector in the corner where the connector and bottom edges meet. See Figure 114 on page 341. Figure 114: Do Not Grasp the Connector Edge
Never carry the DPC by the faceplate with only one hand. Do not rest any edge of a DPC directly against a hard surface (see Figure 115 on page 342).

342 Do not stack DPCs. Figure 115: Do Not Rest the DPC on an Edge
If you must rest the DPC temporarily on an edge while changing its orientation between vertical and horizontal, use your hand as a cushion between the edge and the surface. SEE ALSO
MX480 DPC Terminology

343
Storing an MX480 DPC
You must store a DPC as follows: � In the router � In the container in which a spare DPC is shipped � Horizontally and sheet metal side down When you store a DPC on a horizontal surface or in the shipping container, always place it inside an antistatic bag. Because the DPC is heavy, and because antistatic bags are fragile, inserting the DPC into the bag is easier with two people. To do this, one person holds the DPC in the horizontal position with the faceplate facing the body, and the other person slides the opening of the bag over the DPC connector edge. If you must insert the DPC into a bag by yourself, first lay the DPC horizontally on a flat, stable surface, sheet metal side down. Orient the DPC with the faceplate facing you. Carefully insert the DPC connector edge into the opening of the bag, and pull the bag toward you to cover the DPC. Never stack a DPC under or on top of any other component.
SEE ALSO MX480 DPC Terminology
Replacing an MX480 DPC
IN THIS SECTION Removing an MX480 DPC | 343 Installing an MX480 DPC | 346
Removing an MX480 DPC
A DPC weighs up to 13.1 lb (5.9 kg). Be prepared to accept its full weight. To remove a DPC (see Figure 3):

344
1. Have ready a replacement DPC or DPC blank panel and an antistatic mat for the DPC. Also have ready rubber safety caps for each DPC you are removing that uses an optical interface.
2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD grounding point.
3. Label the cables connected to each port on the DPC so that you can later reconnect the cables to the correct ports.
4. Use one of the following methods to take the DPC offline: � Press and hold the corresponding DPC online button on the craft interface. The green OK LED next to the button begins to blink. Hold the button down until the LED goes off. � Issue the following CLI command:
user@host>request chassis fpc slot slot-number offline
For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer. 5. Disconnect the cables from the DPC.
LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when you are inserting or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light.
CAUTION: Avoid bending a fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose. 6. Immediately cover each optical transceiver and the end of each fiber-optic cable with a rubber safety cap. 7. Arrange the disconnected cables in the cable management brackets to prevent the cables from developing stress points. 8. Simultaneously turn both of the ejector handles counterclockwise to unseat the DPC. 9. Grasp the handles, and slide the DPC straight out of the card cage halfway.

345
10. Place one hand around the front of the DPC and the other hand under it to support it. Slide the DPC completely out of the chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.
CAUTION: The weight of the DPC is concentrated in the back end. Be prepared to accept the full weight--up to 13.1 lb (5.9 kg)--as you slide the DPC out of the chassis. When the DPC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles, bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight. Do not stack DPCs on top of one another after removal. Place each one individually in an electrostatic bag or on its own antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface. 11. If you are not reinstalling a DPC into the emptied DPC slot within a short time, install a blank DPC panel over the slot to maintain proper airflow in the DPC card cage.
CAUTION: After removing a DPC from the chassis, wait at least 30 seconds before reinserting it, removing a DPC from a different slot, or inserting a DPC into a different slot.
Figure 116: Removing a DPC

346
Installing an MX480 DPC
A DPC weighs up to 14.5 lb (6.6 kg). Be prepared to accept its full weight. To install a DPC (see Figure 4): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Place the DPC on an antistatic mat, or remove it from its electrostatic bag. 3. Identify the slot on the router where it will be installed. 4. Verify that each fiber-optic transceiver is covered with a rubber safety cap. If it does not, cover the
transceiver with a safety cap. 5. Orient the DPC so that the faceplate faces you. 6. Lift the DPC into place, and carefully align the sides of the DPC with the guides inside the card
cage. 7. Slide the DPC all the way into the card cage until you feel resistance. 8. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them clockwise simultaneously until the DPC is fully seated. 9. Remove the rubber safety cap from each fiber-optic transceiver and cable.
LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes. 10. Insert the cables into the cable connector ports on each DPC (see Figure 5). 11. Arrange the cable to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop.
CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cables hang free from the connector. Do not allow the fastened loops of a cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.
CAUTION: Avoid bending a fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose. 12. Use one of the following methods to bring the DPC online:

347
� Press and hold the corresponding DPC online button on the craft interface until the green OK LED next to the button lights steadily, in about 5 seconds.
� Issue the following CLI command:
user@host>request chassis fpc slot slot-number online For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer.
CAUTION: After the OK LED turns green, wait at least 30 seconds before removing the DPC again, removing a DPC from a different slot, or inserting a DPC in a different slot.

348 You can also verify that the DPC is functioning correctly by issuing the show chassis fpc and show chassis fpc pic-status commands. Figure 117: Installing a DPC
Figure 118: Attaching a Cable to a DPC
RELATED DOCUMENTATION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router | 499

349
MX480 Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) Description | 100 MX480 Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) LEDs | 107 Troubleshooting the MX480 DPCs | 455
Replacing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC
IN THIS SECTION Removing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC | 349 Installing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC | 350
Removing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC
Removing and installing cables on a DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC does not affect router function. To remove a cable: 1. Have ready a rubber safety cap for each fiber-optic cable and transceiver. 2. If removing all cables connected to the component, use one of the following methods to take the
component offline: � To take a DPC or an MPC offline:
� Press and hold the corresponding online button on the craft interface. The green OK LED next to the button begins to blink. Hold the button down until the LED goes off.
� Issue the following CLI command:
user@host>request chassis fpc slot slot-number offline For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer. � To take a PIC offline: � Press the online/offline button on the PIC. For a PIC installed in an FPC3, use a narrow-ended tool that fits inside the opening that leads to the button. Press and hold the button until the PIC LED goes off (about 5 seconds).

350
� Issue the following CLI command:
user@host> request chassis pic fpc-slot fpc-slot pic-slot pic-slot offline For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer. � To take a MIC offline: � Press the online/offline button on the MIC. Use a narrow-ended tool that fits inside the opening that leads to the button. Press and hold the button until the MIC LED goes off (about 5 seconds). � Issue the following CLI command:
user@host> request chassis mic fpc-slot mpc-slot pic-slot mic-slot offline For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer. 3. Disconnect the cable from the cable connector port. If the component uses fiber-optic cable, immediately cover each transceiver and the end of each cable with a rubber safety cap.
LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when you are inserting or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light. 4. Remove the cable from the cable management brackets. 5. Disconnect the cable from the destination port.
Installing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC
To install a cable: 1. Have ready a length of the type of cable used by the DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC. For cable
specifications, see the MX Series Interface Module Reference. 2. If the cable connector port is covered by a rubber safety plug, remove the plug.

351
LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when you are inserting or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light. 3. Insert the cable connector into the cable connector port on the component faceplate. 4. Arrange the cable in the cable management brackets to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop. Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape.
CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cables hang free from the connector. Do not allow the fastened loops of a cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.
CAUTION: Avoid bending a fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose. 5. Insert the other end of the cable into the destination port. 6. Repeat the previous steps for any additional cables. 7. If the component is offline (its failure indicator LED is lit), use one of the following methods to bring the it online: � To bring a DPC or an MPC online: � Press and hold the corresponding online button on the craft interface until the green OK LED next to the button lights steadily, in about 5 seconds. � Issue the following CLI command:
user@host>request chassis fpc slot slot-number online For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer.

352
� To bring a PIC online: � Press the PIC offline/online button until the PIC LED lights green. For a PIC installed in an FPC2 or FPC3, use a narrow-ended tool that fits inside the opening that leads to the button. � Issue the following CLI command:
user@host>request chassis pic fpc-slot fpc-slot pic-slot pic-slot online For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer. � To bring a MIC online: � Press the MIC offline/online button until the MIC LED lights green. � Issue the following CLI command:
user@host>request chassis mic fpc-slot mpc-slot pic-slot mic-slot online For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer. The normal functioning indicator LED confirms that the component is online. You can also verify correct DPC or MPC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc command or correct MIC or the PIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status command.
RELATED DOCUMENTATION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router | 499 Maintaining Cables That Connect to MX480 DPCs, MPCs, MICs, or PICs | 404
Maintaining MX480 FPCs
IN THIS SECTION Purpose | 353 Action | 353

353

Purpose
The MX480 router can have up to three Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs) installed horizontally in the front of the chassis. For optimum router performance, verify the condition of the FPC.
Action
On a regular basis:
� Check the LEDs on the craft interface directly above the FPC. The green LED labeled OK lights steadily when an FPC is functioning normally.
� Check the OK/FAIL LED on the FPC. If the FPC detects a failure, the FPC sends an alarm message to the Routing Engine.
� Issue the CLI show chassis fpc command to check the status of the installed FPC. As shown in the sample output, the value Online in the column labeled State indicates that the FPC is functioning normally:

user@host> show chassis fpc

Temp CPU Utilization (%)

Slot State (C) Total Interrupt

0 Online 24

1 Empty

2 Online 41

3 Online 43

4 Online 24

5 Empty

Memory Utilization (%)

DRAM (MB) Heap Buffer

1024

For more detailed output, add the detail option. The following example does not specify a slot number, which is optional:

user@host> show chassis fpc detail

Slot 0 information:

State

Online

Temperature

24 degrees C / 75 degrees F

Total CPU DRAM

1024 MB

Total RLDRAM

128 MB

Total DDR DRAM

2048 MB

Start time:

2008-12-11 16:53:24 PST

Uptime:

15 hours, 2 minutes, 47 seconds

Max Power Consumption

368 Watts

354

Slot 2 information: State Temperature Total CPU DRAM Total RLDRAM Total DDR DRAM Start time: Uptime: Max Power Consumption
Slot 3 information: State Temperature Total CPU DRAM Total RLDRAM Total DDR DRAM Start time: Uptime: Max Power Consumption
Slot 4 information: State Temperature Total CPU DRAM Total RLDRAM Total DDR DRAM Start time: Uptime: Max Power Consumption

Online 29 degrees C / 84 degrees F 1024 MB 256 MB 4096 MB
2008-12-11 16:53:18 PST 15 hours, 2 minutes, 53 seconds 294 Watts
Online 29 degrees C / 84 degrees F 1024 MB 256 MB 4096 MB
2008-12-11 16:53:18 PST 15 hours, 2 minutes, 53 seconds 335 Watts
Online 29 degrees C / 84 degrees F 1024 MB 256 MB 4096 MB
2008-12-11 16:53:18 PST 15 hours, 2 minutes, 53 seconds 333 Watts

� Issue the CLI show chassis fpc pic-status command. The following example shows an FPC installed in DPC slots 0, and 1:

user@host> show chassis fpc pic-status

Slot 0 Online

MX FPC Type 3

PIC 0 Online

1x OC-192 SONET

PIC 1 Online

1x OC-192 SONET

Slot 2 Online

DPC 40x 1GE R

PIC 0 Online

10x 1GE(LAN)

PIC 1 Online

10x 1GE(LAN)

PIC 2 Online

10x 1GE(LAN)

PIC 3 Online

10x 1GE(LAN)

Slot 3 Online

MPC Type 2 3D EQ

PIC 0 Online

1x 10GE XFP

355

PIC 1 Slot 4
PIC 0 PIC 1 PIC 2 PIC 3

Online Online Online Online Online Online

1x 10GE XFP MPC 3D 16x 10GE 4x 10GE(LAN) SFP+ 4x 10GE(LAN) SFP+ 4x 10GE(LAN) SFP+ 4x 10GE(LAN) SFP+

NOTE: An FPC takes up two DPC slots when installed on an MX Series router. The slot number corresponds to the lowest numbered DPC slot.
For further description of the output from the command, see the CLI Explorer.

SEE ALSO MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) LEDs | 115 Troubleshooting the MX480 FPCs | 457

Holding an MX480 FPC
CAUTION: Many components on the FPC are fragile. Failure to handle FPCs as specified in this document can cause irreparable damage.
NOTE: An FPC configured with PICs installed can weigh as much as 18 lb (8.2 kg). Be prepared to accept the full weight of the FPC as you lift it.

CAUTION: To prevent damage when handling or carrying FPCs: � As you carry the FPC, do not bump it against anything. FPC components are fragile.

356
� Do not grasp the FPC anywhere except places that this document indicates. In particular, never grasp the connector edge, especially at the power connector in the corner where the connector and bottom edges meet (see Figure 119 on page 356).
Figure 119: Do Not Grasp the Connector Edge

357 � Do not carry the FPC by the faceplate with only one hand (see Figure 120 on page
357). Figure 120: Do Not Carry an FPC with Only One Hand
� Do not rest any edge of an FPC directly against a hard surface (see Figure 121 on page 358). If you must rest the FPC temporarily on an edge while changing its

358
orientation between vertical and horizontal, use your hand as a cushion between the edge and the surface.
Figure 121: Do Not Rest the FPC on an Edge
You hold an FPC horizontally when installing it into the chassis or an equipment rack. If the FPC is horizontal before you grasp it, place your left hand around the faceplate and your right hand along the bottom edge. To hold an FPC horizontally: 1. Orient the FPC so that the faceplate faces you. 2. Grasp the top edge with your left hand and the bottom edge with your right hand.
SEE ALSO MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) Description | 112 MX480 FPC Terminology
Storing an MX480 FPC
When not installed in the routing platforms, FPCs must be either stored in the container in which a spare FPC is shipped or stored horizontally with the component-side up on a flat, stable surface. When you store an FPC on a horizontal surface or in the shipping container, always place it inside an antistatic bag. Because the FPC is heavy and because antistatic bags are fragile, inserting the FPC into the bag is easier with two people. The storage guidelines are as follows:

359
� When storing an FPC with two people, one person holds the FPC in the horizontal position with the faceplate facing their body, the other person slides the opening of the bag over the FPC connector edge.
� When storing an FPC with one person, you must insert the FPC into a bag by yourself. First lay the FPC horizontally on a flat, stable surface, component-side up. Orient the FPC with the faceplate facing you. Carefully insert the FPC connector edge into the opening of the bag, and pull the bag toward you to cover the FPC. CAUTION: To prevent damage when storing FPCs: � Never lay an FPC component-side down.
Figure 122: Do Not Stack FPCs
� Never stack an FPC under or on top of any other component (see Figure 122 on page 359).
SEE ALSO MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) Description | 112 MX480 FPC Terminology
Replacing an MX480 FPC
IN THIS SECTION Removing an MX480 FPC | 360

360
Installing an MX480 FPC | 362
Removing an MX480 FPC
When you remove an FPC, the router continues to function, although the PIC interfaces installed on the FPC being removed no longer function. An FPC takes up two DPC slots on the MX480 router. Up to three FPCs can be installed horizontally in the front of the MX480 router. The FPCs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. An empty FPC3 weighs 14 lb (6.5 kg). A fully configured FPC can weigh up to 18 lb (8.2 kg). Be prepared to accept its full weight. To remove an FPC (see Figure 10): 1. Have ready a replacement FPC or FPC blank panel and an antistatic mat for the FPC. Also have
ready rubber safety caps for each PIC using an optical interface on the FPC that you are removing. 2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 3. Label the cables connected to each PIC on the FPC so that you can later reconnect the cables to
the correct PICs. 4. Use one of the following methods to take the FPC offline:
� Press and hold the FPC online/offline button. The green OK LED next to the button begins to blink. Hold the button down until the LED goes off. The LEDs and online/offline button for each FPC are located directly above it on the craft interface.
� Issue the following CLI command:
user@host>request chassis fpc slot slot-number offline
For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer.
NOTE: The slot number corresponds to the lowest numbered slot for which the FPC is installed.
5. Disconnect the cables from the PICs installed in the FPC. 6. Immediately cover each fiber-optic transceiver and the end of each fiber-optic cable with a rubber
safety cap.

361
LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes. 7. Arrange the cable in the cable management brackets to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop. Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape.
CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector. Do not allow fastened loops of cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.
CAUTION: Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose. 8. Simultaneously turn both the ejector handles counterclockwise to unseat the FPC. 9. Grasp the handles, and slide the FPC straight out of the card cage halfway. 10. Place one hand around the front of the FPC (the PIC housing) and the other hand under it to support it. Slide the FPC completely out of the chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.
CAUTION: The weight of the FPC is concentrated in the back end. Be prepared to accept the full weight--up to 18 lb (8.2 kg)--as you slide the FPC out of the chassis. When the FPC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles, bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight. Do not stack FPCs on top of one another after removal. Place each one individually in an electrostatic bag or on its own antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface. 11. If necessary, remove each installed PIC from the FPC. 12. After you remove each PIC, immediately place it on an antistatic mat or in an electrostatic bag. 13. If you are not reinstalling an FPC into the emptied DPC slots within a short time, install a blank DPC panel over each slot to maintain proper airflow in the card cage.

362
CAUTION: After removing an FPC from the chassis, wait at least 30 seconds before reinserting it or inserting an FPC into a different slot. Figure 123: Removing an FPC
Installing an MX480 FPC
An FPC takes up two DPC slots on the MX480 router. Up to three FPCs can be installed horizontally in the front of the router. The FPCs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. An empty FPC3 weighs 14 lb (6.5 kg). A fully configured FPC can weigh up to 18 lb (8.2 kg). Be prepared to accept its full weight. To install an FPC (see Figure 11): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Place the FPC on an antistatic mat.

363
3. Take each PIC to be installed in the replacement FPC out of its electrostatic bag, and identify the slot on the FPC where it will be connected.
4. Verify that each fiber-optic PIC has a rubber safety cap covering the PIC transceiver. If it does not, cover the transceiver with a safety cap.
5. Install each PIC into the appropriate slot on the FPC. 6. Locate the slots in the card cage in which you plan to install the FPC. 7. Orient the FPC so that the faceplate faces you. 8. Lift the FPC into place, and carefully align the sides of the FPC with the guides inside the card cage.
CAUTION: When the FPC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles, bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight. 9. Slide the FPC all the way into the card cage until you feel resistance. 10. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them clockwise simultaneously until the FPC is fully seated. 11. If any of the PICs on the FPC connect to fiber-optic cable, remove the rubber safety cap from each transceiver and cable.
LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes. 12. Insert the appropriate cable into the cable connector ports on each PIC on the FPC. 13. Arrange the cable in the cable management brackets to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop. Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape.
CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cables hang free from the connector. Do not allow the fastened loops of a cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.
CAUTION: Avoid bending a fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose. 14. Use one of the following methods to bring the FPC online:

364
� Press and hold the FPC online/offline button until the green OK LED next to the button lights steadily, in about 5 seconds. The LEDs and online/offline button for each FPC are located directly above it on the craft interface.
� Issue the following CLI command:
user@host>request chassis fpc slot slot-number online For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer.
CAUTION: After the OK LED lights steadily, wait at least 30 seconds before removing the FPC again, removing an FPC from a different slot, or inserting an FPC in a different slot.

365 You can also verify correct FPC and PIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc and show chassis fpc pic-status commands described in "Maintaining MX480 FPCs" on page 352 and "Maintaining MX480 PICs" on page 384. Figure 124: Installing an FPC
Maintaining MX480 MICs
IN THIS SECTION Purpose | 366 Action | 366

366

Purpose
For optimum router performance, verify the condition of the MICs.
Action
On a regular basis: � Check the LEDs on MIC faceplates. The meaning of the LED states differs for various MICs. For more
information, see the MX Series Interface Module Reference. If the MPC that houses the MIC detects a MIC failure, the MPC generates an alarm message to be sent to the Routing Engine. � Issue the CLI show chassis fpc pic-status command. The MIC slots in an MPC are numbered PIC 0/1 and PIC 2/3, left to right:

user@host> show chassis fpc pic-status

Slot 0 Online

DPCE 4x 10GE R EQ

PIC 0 Online

1x 10GE(LAN/WAN) EQ

PIC 1 Online

1x 10GE(LAN/WAN) EQ

PIC 2 Online

1x 10GE(LAN/WAN) EQ

PIC 3 Online

1x 10GE(LAN/WAN) EQ

Slot 1 Online

DPCE 40x 1GE R EQ

PIC 0 Online

10x 1GE(LAN) EQ

PIC 1 Online

10x 1GE(LAN) EQ

PIC 2 Online

10x 1GE(LAN) EQ

PIC 3 Online

10x 1GE(LAN) EQ

Slot 2 Online

MS-DPC

PIC 0 Online

MS-DPC PIC

PIC 1 Online

MS-DPC PIC

Slot 3 Online

MPC Type 2 3D EQ

PIC 0 Online

1x 10GE XFP

PIC 1 Online

1x 10GE XFP

Slot 4 Online

MPC 3D 16x 10GE

PIC 0 Online

4x 10GE(LAN) SFP+

PIC 1 Online

4x 10GE(LAN) SFP+

PIC 2 Online

4x 10GE(LAN) SFP+

PIC 3 Online

4x 10GE(LAN) SFP+

For further description of the output from the command, see the CLI Explorer.

367
SEE ALSO MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) Description | 134 MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) LEDs | 139 Troubleshooting the MX480 MICs | 461
Replacing an MX480 MIC
IN THIS SECTION Removing an MX480 MIC | 367 Installing an MX480 MIC | 369 Installing an MX480 Dual-Wide MIC | 372
Removing an MX480 MIC
MICs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. When you remove a MIC, the router continues to function, although the MIC interfaces being removed no longer function. The MICs are located in the MPCs installed in the front of the router. A MIC weighs less than 2 lb (0.9 kg). To remove a MIC (see Figure 12 and Figure 13): 1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface to receive the MIC. If the MIC
connects to fiber-optic cable, have ready a rubber safety cap for each transceiver and cable. 2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 3. Use one of the following methods to take the MIC offline:
� Press its online/offline button. Use a narrow-ended tool that fits inside the opening that leads to the button. Press and hold the button until the MIC OK/FAIL LED goes off (about 5 seconds).
� Issue the following CLI command:
user@host> request chassis mic fpc-slot mpc-slot mic-slot mic-slot offline For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer.

368
4. Label the cables connected to the MIC so that you can later reconnect each cable to the correct MIC. 5. Disconnect the cables from the MIC. If the MIC uses fiber-optic cable, immediately cover each
transceiver and the end of each cable with a rubber safety cap.
LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when you are inserting or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light. 6. Arrange the cable to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop.
CAUTION: Avoid bending a fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose. 7. On the MPC, pull the ejector lever that is adjacent to the MIC you are removing away from the MPC faceplate. Pulling the ejector lever disconnects the MIC from the MPC.
NOTE: To remove a dual-wide MIC that takes up both MIC slots, you must pull both ejector levers away from the MPC faceplate.
8. Grasp the handles on the MIC faceplate, and slide the MIC out of the MPC card carrier. Place it in the electrostatic bag or on the antistatic mat.

369 9. If you are not reinstalling a MIC into the emptied MIC slot within a short time, install a blank MIC
panel over the slot to maintain proper airflow in the MPC card cage. Figure 125: Removing a MIC
Figure 126: Removing a Dual-Wide MIC
Installing an MX480 MIC
To install a MIC (see Figure 15): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. If you have used a dual-wide MIC and are now replacing it with two "single" MICs, install the
septum (see Figure 14): a. Place the MPC on a flat surface (If necessary, remove the MPC from the router as described in
"Replacing an MX480 MPC" on page 379). b. Position the septum in the center of the MPC so that it lines up with holes labeled S on the top
of the MPC. c. Insert a screw into each of the two holes labeled S, and then tighten completely. d. On the bottom of the MPC, insert a screw into each of the four holes labeled S, and then tighten
completely.

370 e. Install the MPC as described in "Replacing an MX480 MPC" on page 379. Figure 127: Installing the Septum
3. If the MIC uses fiber-optic cable, verify that a rubber safety cap is over each transceiver on the faceplate. Install a cap if necessary.

371
4. On the MPC, pull the ejector lever that is adjacent to the MIC you are installing away from the MPC faceplate.
5. Align the rear of the MIC with the guides located at the corners of the MIC slot. 6. Slide the MIC into the MPC until it is firmly seated in the MPC.
CAUTION: Slide the MIC straight into the slot to avoid damaging the components on the MIC. 7. Verify that the ejector lever is engaged by pushing it toward the MPC faceplate. 8. If the MIC uses fiber-optic cable, remove the rubber safety cap from each transceiver and the end of each cable.
LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when you are inserting or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light. 9. Insert the appropriate cables into the cable connectors on the MIC. 10. Arrange each cable to prevent the cable from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop.
CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cables hang free from the connector. Do not allow the fastened loops of a cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.
CAUTION: Avoid bending a fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose. 11. Use one of the following methods to bring the MIC online:

372
� Press the MIC offline/online button until the MIC OK/FAIL LED lights green. � Issue the following CLI command:
user@host> request chassis mic fpc-slot mpc-slot mic-slot mic-slot online For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer. The normal functioning status LED confirms that the MIC is online. You can also verify correct MIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status command described in "Maintaining MX480 MICs" on page 365.
Figure 128: Installing a MIC
SEE ALSO MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) Description | 134 Troubleshooting the MX480 MICs | 461 MX480 MIC Serial Number Label | 480
Installing an MX480 Dual-Wide MIC
To install a dual-wide MIC (see Figure 17): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Remove the septum, if necessary (see Figure 16):
a. Place the MPC on a flat surface (if necessary, remove the MPC from the router as described in "Replacing an MX480 MPC" on page 379).
b. Remove the four screws labeled S on the bottom of the MPC. c. Remove the two screws labeled S on the top of the MPC.

373
d. Slide the septum towards you and out of the MPC. e. Store the septum and screws for later use. f. Install the MPC as described in "Replacing an MX480 MPC" on page 379.
Figure 129: Removing the Septum

374
3. If the MIC uses fiber-optic cable, verify that a rubber safety cap is over each transceiver on the faceplate. Install a cap if necessary.
4. Pull the ejector lever above both MIC slots away from the router. 5. Align the rear of the MIC with the guides located at the corners of the MIC slot. 6. Slide the MIC into the MIC slot until it is firmly seated in the chassis.
CAUTION: Slide the MIC straight into the slot to avoid damaging the components on the MIC. 7. Verify that the ejector levers are engaged by pushing them toward the router. 8. If the MIC uses fiber-optic cable, remove the rubber safety cap from each transceiver and the end of each cable.
LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when you are inserting or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light. 9. Insert the appropriate cables into the cable connectors on the MIC. 10. Arrange each cable to prevent the cable from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop.
CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cables hang free from the connector. Do not allow the fastened loops of a cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.
CAUTION: Avoid bending a fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose.

375 11. Use one of the following methods to bring the MIC online:
� Press the MIC offline/online button until the MIC OK/FAIL LED lights green. � Issue the following CLI command:
user@host> request chassis mic fpc-slot mpc-slot mic-slot mic-slot online The normal functioning status LED confirms that the MIC is online. You can also verify correct MIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status command described in "Maintaining MX480 MICs" on page 365. Figure 130: Installing a Dual-Wide MIC
SEE ALSO MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) Description | 134 Troubleshooting the MX480 MICs | 461 MX480 MIC Serial Number Label | 480
RELATED DOCUMENTATION Troubleshooting the MX480 MICs | 461

376
Maintaining MX480 MPCs
IN THIS SECTION Purpose | 376 Action | 376

Purpose
The router can have up to six MPCs mounted horizontally in the card cage at the front of the chassis. For optimum router performance, verify the condition of the MPCs.
Action
On a regular basis: � Check the LEDs on the craft interface directly above each MPC slot. The green LED labeled OK lights
steadily when an MPC is functioning normally.
� Check the OK/FAIL LED on the MPC. If the MPC detects a failure, the MPC sends an alarm message to the Routing Engine.
� Issue the CLI show chassis fpc command to check the status of installed MPCs. As shown in the sample output, the value Online in the column labeled State indicates that the MPC is functioning normally:

user@host> show chassis fpc

Temp CPU Utilization (%)

Slot State

0 Online

1 Online

2 Online

3 Online

4 Online

5 Empty

Memory Utilization (%)

DRAM (MB) Heap Buffer

2048

1024

377

For more detailed output, add the detail option. The following example does not specify a slot number, which is optional:

user@host> show chassis fpc detail

Slot 0 information:

State

Online

Temperature

33 degrees C / 91 degrees F

Total CPU DRAM

1024 MB

Total RLDRAM

256 MB

Total DDR DRAM

4096 MB

Start time:

2009-12-22 12:26:54 PST

Uptime:

6 days, 3 hours, 8 minutes, 51 seconds

Max Power Consumption

330 Watts

Slot 1 information:

State

Online

Temperature

32 degrees C / 89 degrees F

Total CPU DRAM

1024 MB

Total RLDRAM

256 MB

Total DDR DRAM

4096 MB

Start time:

2009-12-22 12:26:54 PST

Uptime:

6 days, 3 hours, 8 minutes, 51 seconds

Max Power Consumption

365 Watts

Slot 2 information:

State

Online

Temperature

41 degrees C / 105 degrees F

Total CPU DRAM

1024 MB

Total RLDRAM

128 MB

Total DDR DRAM

2048 MB

Start time:

2009-12-22 12:26:46 PST

Uptime:

6 days, 3 hours, 8 minutes, 59 seconds

Max Power Consumption

265 Watts

Slot 3 information:

State

Online

Temperature

36 degrees C / 96 degrees F

Total CPU DRAM

2048 MB

Total RLDRAM

806 MB

Total DDR DRAM

2632 MB

Start time:

2009-12-22 12:27:04 PST

Uptime:

6 days, 3 hours, 8 minutes, 41 seconds

Max Power Consumption

450 Watts

Slot 4 information:

State

Online

378

Temperature Total CPU DRAM Total RLDRAM Total DDR DRAM Start time: Uptime: Max Power Consumption

40 degrees C / 104 degrees F 2048 MB 1324 MB 5120 MB
2009-12-22 12:27:02 PST 6 days, 3 hours, 8 minutes, 43 seconds 440 Watts

� Issue the CLI show chassis fpc pic-status command. The MPC slots are numbered 0 through 5, bottom to top:

user@host> show chassis fpc pic-status

Slot 0 Online

DPCE 4x 10GE R EQ

PIC 0 Online

1x 10GE(LAN/WAN) EQ

PIC 1 Online

1x 10GE(LAN/WAN) EQ

PIC 2 Online

1x 10GE(LAN/WAN) EQ

PIC 3 Online

1x 10GE(LAN/WAN) EQ

Slot 1 Online

DPCE 40x 1GE R EQ

PIC 0 Online

10x 1GE(LAN) EQ

PIC 1 Online

10x 1GE(LAN) EQ

PIC 2 Online

10x 1GE(LAN) EQ

PIC 3 Online

10x 1GE(LAN) EQ

Slot 2 Online

MS-DPC

PIC 0 Online

MS-DPC PIC

PIC 1 Online

MS-DPC PIC

Slot 3 Online

MPC Type 2 3D EQ

PIC 0 Online

1x 10GE XFP

PIC 1 Online

1x 10GE XFP

Slot 4 Online

MPC 3D 16x 10GE

PIC 0 Online

4x 10GE(LAN) SFP+

PIC 1 Online

4x 10GE(LAN) SFP+

PIC 2 Online

4x 10GE(LAN) SFP+

PIC 3 Online

4x 10GE(LAN) SFP+

For further description of the output from the command, see the CLI Explorer.

SEE ALSO MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) Description | 153 MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) LEDs | 157

379
Troubleshooting the MX480 MPCs | 462
Replacing an MX480 MPC
IN THIS SECTION Removing an MX480 MPC | 379 Installing an MX480 MPC | 381
Removing an MX480 MPC
When you remove an MPC, the router continues to function, although the MIC interfaces installed on the MPC being removed no longer function. An MPC installs horizontally in the front of the router. The MPCs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. A fully configured MPC can weigh up to 18.35 lb (8.3 kg). Be prepared to accept its full weight. To remove an MPC (see Figure 18): 1. Have ready a replacement MPC or DPC blank panel and an antistatic mat for the MPC. Also have
ready rubber safety caps for each MIC using an optical interface on the MPC that you are removing. 2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD grounding point. 3. Label the cables connected to each MIC on the MPC so that you can later reconnect the cables to the correct MICs. 4. Use one of the following methods to take the MPC offline: � Press and hold the corresponding online button on the craft interface. The green OK/FAIL LED
next to the button begins to blink. Hold the button down until the LED goes off. � Issue the following CLI command:
user@host>request chassis fpc slot slot-number offline For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer. 5. Disconnect the cables from the MICs installed in the MPC.

380
LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or removing a cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light.
CAUTION: Avoid bending a fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose. 6. If a MIC uses fiber-optic cable, immediately cover each transceiver and the end of each cable with a rubber safety cap. 7. Arrange the disconnected cables in the cable management brackets to prevent the cables from developing stress points. 8. Simultaneously turn both the ejector handles counterclockwise to unseat the MPC. 9. Grasp the handles, and slide the MPC straight out of the card cage halfway. 10. Place one hand around the front of the MPC (the MIC housing) and the other hand under it to support it. Slide the MPC completely out of the chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.
CAUTION: The weight of the MPC is concentrated in the back end. Be prepared to accept the full weight--up to 18.35 lb (8.3 kg)--as you slide the MPC out of the chassis. When the MPC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles, bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight. Do not stack MPCs on top of one another after removal. Place each one individually in an electrostatic bag or on its own antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface. 11. If necessary, remove each installed MIC from the MPC. 12. After you remove each MIC, immediately place it on an antistatic mat or in an electrostatic bag. 13. If you are not reinstalling an MPC into the emptied line card slots within a short time, install a blank DPC panel over each slot to maintain proper airflow in the card cage.

381
CAUTION: After removing an MPC from the chassis, wait at least 30 seconds before reinserting it or inserting an MPC into a different slot. Figure 131: Removing an MPC
SEE ALSO MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) Description | 153 MX480 MPC Serial Number Label | 482
Installing an MX480 MPC
An MPC installs horizontally in the front of the router. The MPCs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. A fully configured MPC can weigh up to 18.35 lb (8.3 kg). Be prepared to accept its full weight. To install an MPC (see Figure 19): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Place the MPC on an antistatic mat.

382
3. Take each MIC to be installed in the replacement MPC out of its electrostatic bag, and identify the slot on the MPC where it will be connected.
4. Verify that each fiber-optic MIC has a rubber safety cap covering the MIC transceiver. If it does not, cover the transceiver with a safety cap.
5. Install each MIC into the appropriate slot on the MPC. 6. Locate the slot in the card cage in which you plan to install the MPC. 7. Orient the MPC so that the faceplate faces you. 8. Lift the MPC into place, and carefully align the sides of the MPC with the guides inside the card
cage.
CAUTION: When the MPC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles, bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight. 9. Slide the MPC all the way into the card cage until you feel resistance. 10. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them clockwise simultaneously until the MPC is fully seated. 11. If any of the MICs on the MPC connect to fiber-optic cable, remove the rubber safety cap from each transceiver and cable.
LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes. 12. Insert the appropriate cable into the cable connector ports on each MIC on the MPC. Secure the cables so that they are not supporting their own weight. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop, using the cable management system. Placing fasteners on a loop helps to maintain its shape.
CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cables hang free from the connector. Do not allow the fastened loops of a cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.
CAUTION: Avoid bending a fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose. 13. Use one of the following methods to bring the MPC online:

383
� Press and hold the corresponding MPC online button on the craft interface until the green OK/ FAIL LED next to the button lights steadily, in about 5 seconds.
� Issue the following CLI command:
user@host>request chassis fpc slot slot-number online For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer.
CAUTION: After the OK/FAIL LED lights steadily, wait at least 30 seconds before removing the MPC again, removing an MPC from a different slot, or inserting an MPC in a different slot. You can also verify correct MPC and MIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc and show chassis fpc pic-status commands described in"Maintaining MX480 MPCs" on page 376 and "Maintaining MX480 MICs" on page 365.
Figure 132: Installing an MPC

384 RELATED DOCUMENTATION
MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) Description | 153
Maintaining MX480 PICs
IN THIS SECTION Purpose | 384 Action | 384

Purpose
For optimum router performance, verify the condition of the PICs.
Action
On a regular basis: � Check the LEDs on PIC faceplates. The meaning of the LED states differs for various PICs. For more
information, see the MX Series Interface Module Reference. If the FPC that houses the PIC detects a PIC failure, the FPC generates an alarm message to be sent to the Routing Engine. � Issue the CLI show chassis fpc pic-status command. The PIC slots in an FPC are numbered from 0 through 1, left to right:

user@host> show chassis fpc pic-status

Slot 0 Online

DPC 40x 1GE R

PIC 0 Online

10x 1GE(LAN)

PIC 1 Online

10x 1GE(LAN)

PIC 2 Online

10x 1GE(LAN)

PIC 3 Online

10x 1GE(LAN)

Slot 1 Online

MX FPC Type 3

PIC 0 Online

1x OC-192 SONET

PIC 1 Online

1x OC-192 SONET

Slot 2 Online

MS-DPC

PIC 0 Online

MS-DPC PIC

385

PIC 1 Slot 3
PIC 0 PIC 1 Slot 4 PIC 0 PIC 1 PIC 2 PIC 3

Online Online Online Online Online Online Online Online Online

MS-DPC PIC MPC Type 2 3D EQ 1x 10GE XFP 1x 10GE XFP MPC 3D 16x 10GE 4x 10GE(LAN) SFP+ 4x 10GE(LAN) SFP+ 4x 10GE(LAN) SFP+ 4x 10GE(LAN) SFP+

For further description of the output from the command, see the CLI Explorer.

SEE ALSO
MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) Description | 112 Troubleshooting the MX480 PICs | 465 MX480 PIC Serial Number Label | 484

Replacing an MX480 PIC

IN THIS SECTION Removing an MX480 PIC | 385 Installing an MX480 PIC | 387

Removing an MX480 PIC
PICs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. When you remove a PIC, the router continues to function, although the PIC interfaces being removed no longer function.
The PICs are located in the FPCs installed in the front of the router. A PIC weighs less than 2 lb (0.9 kg).
To remove a PIC (see Figure 20):
1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface to receive the PIC. If the PIC connects to fiber-optic cable, have ready a rubber safety cap for each transceiver and cable.

386
2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD grounding point.
3. Use one of the following methods to take the PIC offline: � Press its online/offline button. For a PIC installed in FPC3, use a narrow-ended tool that fits inside the opening that leads to the button. Press and hold the button until the PIC LED goes off (about 5 seconds). � Issue the following CLI command:
user@host> request chassis pic fpc-slot fpc-slot pic-slot pic-slot offline
For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer. 4. Label the cables connected to the PIC so that you can later reconnect each cable to the correct PIC. 5. Disconnect the cables from the PIC. If the PIC uses fiber-optic cable, immediately cover each
transceiver and the end of each cable with a rubber safety cap.
LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when you are inserting or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light. 6. Arrange the cable in the cable management brackets to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop. Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape.
CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cables hang free from the connector. Do not allow the fastened loops of a cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.

387 CAUTION: Avoid bending a fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose. 7. For an FPC3 PIC, loosen the captive screw at the bottom of the PIC faceplate, then twist the ejector handle at the top of the faceplate counterclockwise to unseat the PIC. 8. Slide the PIC out of the FPC card carrier and place it in the electrostatic bag or on the antistatic mat. 9. If you are not reinstalling a PIC into the emptied PIC slot within a short time, install a blank PIC panel over the slot to maintain proper airflow in the FPC card cage. Figure 133: Removing a PIC
Installing an MX480 PIC
To install a PIC (see Figure 21):

388
1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD grounding point.
2. If the PIC uses fiber-optic cable, verify that a rubber safety cap is over each transceiver on the faceplate. Install a cap if necessary.
3. Align the notches in the connector at the rear of the PIC with the notches in the PIC slot in the FPC and then slide the PIC in until it lodges firmly in the FPC.
CAUTION: Slide the PIC straight into the slot to avoid damaging the components on the bottom of the PIC. 4. For an FPC3 PIC, turn the ejector handle at the top of the PIC faceplate clockwise, then tighten the captive screw at the bottom of the faceplate to secure the PIC in the FPC. 5. If the PIC uses fiber-optic cable, remove the rubber safety cap from each transceiver and the end of each cable.
LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when you are inserting or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light. 6. Insert the appropriate cables into the cable connectors on the PIC. 7. Arrange the cable in the cable management brackets to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop. Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape.
CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cables hang free from the connector. Do not allow the fastened loops of a cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.

389
CAUTION: Avoid bending a fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose. 8. Use one of the following methods to bring the PIC online: � Press the PIC offline/online button until the PIC LED lights green. For a PIC installed in an FPC2 or FPC3, use a narrow-ended tool that fits inside the opening that leads to the button. � Issue the following CLI command:
user@host> request chassis pic fpc-slot fpc-slot pic-slot pic-slot online For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer.

390 The normal functioning status LED confirms that the PIC is online. You can also verify correct PIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status command described in "Maintaining MX480 PICs" on page 384. Figure 134: Installing a PIC
RELATED DOCUMENTATION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router | 499 Troubleshooting the MX480 PICs | 465 MX480 PIC Serial Number Label | 484 MX480 PIC Description | 116

391
Replacing an MX480 AS MLC
IN THIS SECTION Removing an MX480 AS MLC | 391 Installing an MX480 AS MLC | 393
Removing an MX480 AS MLC
When you remove an Application Services Modular Line Card (AS MLC), the router continues to function, although the modular cards (AS MXC and AS MSC) installed on the AS MLC being removed no longer function. Up to five AS MLCs can be installed horizontally in the front of the MX480 router. The AS MLCs are hotinsertable and hot-removable. An empty AS MLC weighs 10.5 lb (4.76 kg). A fully configured AS MLC can weigh up to 15.27 lb (6.93 kg). Be prepared to accept its full weight. To remove an AS MLC (see Figure 22): 1. Have ready a replacement AS MLC or an AS MLC blank panel and an antistatic mat for the AS MLC. 2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 3. Use one of the following methods to take the AS MLC offline:
� Press and hold the AS MLC online/offline button. The green OK LED next to the button begins to blink. Hold the button down until the LED goes out. The online/offline button for each AS MLC is located directly above it on the craft interface.
� Issue the following CLI command:
user@host>request chassis fpc slot slot-number offline For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer.
NOTE: The slot number corresponds to the lowest numbered slot for which the AS MLC is installed.
4. Simultaneously turn both the ejector handles counterclockwise to unseat the AS MLC. 5. Grasp the handles, and slide the AS MLC straight out of the card cage halfway.

392
6. Place one hand around the front of the AS MLC (the modular card housing) and the other hand under it to support it. Slide the AS MLC completely out of the chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.
CAUTION: The weight of the AS MLC is concentrated in the back end. Be prepared to accept the full weight--up to 15.27 lb (6.93 kg)--as you slide the AS MLC out of the chassis. When the AS MLC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles, bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight.
Do not stack AS MLCs on top of one another after removal. Place each one individually in an electrostatic bag or on its own antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
7. If necessary, remove each installed AS MSC and AS MXC from the AS MLC. 8. After you remove each modular card, immediately place it on an antistatic mat or in an electrostatic
bag. 9. If you are not reinstalling an AS MLC into the emptied slots within a short time, install a blank AS
MLC panel over each slot to maintain proper airflow in the card cage.

393
CAUTION: After removing an AS MLC from the chassis, wait at least 30 seconds before reinserting it or inserting an AS MLC into a different slot.
Figure 135: Removing an AS MLC
Installing an MX480 AS MLC
You can install up to five Application Services Modular Line Cards (AS MLCs) horizontally in the front of the MX480 router. The AS MLCs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. An empty AS MLC weighs 10.5 lb (4.76 kg). A fully configured AS MLC can weigh up to 15.27 lb (6.93 kg). Be prepared to accept its full weight. To install an AS MLC (see Figure 23): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Place the AS MLC on an antistatic mat. 3. Take the AS MSC and AS MXC (the modular cards) to be installed in the AS MLC out of its
electrostatic bag. The AS MSC must be inserted in the left slot and the AS MXC in the right slot. 4. Install the AS MSC and AS MXC into the appropriate slot on the AS MLC. 5. Locate the slots in the card cage in which you plan to install the AS MLC.

394
6. Orient the AS MLC so that the faceplate faces you. 7. Lift the AS MLC into place, and carefully align the sides of the AS MLC with the guides inside the
card cage.
CAUTION: When the AS MLC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles, bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight. 8. Slide the AS MLC all the way into the card cage until you feel resistance. 9. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them clockwise simultaneously until the AS MLC is fully seated. 10. Use one of the following methods to bring the AS MLC online: � Press and hold the AS MLC online/offline button until the green OK LED next to the button lights steadily, in about 5 seconds. The LEDs and online/offline button for each AS MLC are located above it on the craft interface. � Issue the following CLI command:
user@host>request chassis fpc slot slot-number online
For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer.
CAUTION: After the OK LED lights steadily, wait at least 30 seconds before removing the AS MLC again, removing an AS MLC from a different slot, or inserting an AS MLC in a different slot.

395 You can also verify correct AS MLC and AS MSC or AS MXC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc and show chassis fpc pic-status. Figure 136: Installing an AS MLC
Replacing an MX480 AS MSC
IN THIS SECTION Removing an MX480 AS MSC | 395 Installing an MX480 AS MSC | 397
Removing an MX480 AS MSC
AS MSCs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. When you remove an AS MSC, the router continues to function.

396
The AS MSCs are located in the AS MLCs installed in the front of the router. An AS MSC weighs 1.4 lb (0.6 kg). To remove an AS MSC (see Figure 24): 1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface to receive the AS MSC. 2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 3. Use one of the following methods to take the AS MSC offline:
� Press its online/offline button. Use a narrow-ended tool that fits inside the opening that leads to the button. Press and hold the button until the AS MSC LED goes out (about 5 seconds).
� Issue the following CLI command:
user@host> request chassis pic fpc-slot fpc-slot pic-slot pic-slot offline
For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer. 4. Slide the AS MSC out of the AS MLC card carrier by pulling the handles, and place it in the
electrostatic bag or on the antistatic mat.

397 5. If you are not reinstalling an AS MSC into the emptied AS MSC slot within a short time, install a blank
AS MSC panel over the slot to maintain proper airflow in the AS MLC card cage. Figure 137: Removing an AS MSC
SEE ALSO MX480 Application Services Modular Storage Card Description | 167
Installing an MX480 AS MSC
To install an AS MSC (see Figure 25):

398
1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD grounding point.
2. Align the notches in the connector at the rear of the AS MSC with the notches in the AS MSC slot (slot 0--the top slot in the AS MLC ), and then slide the AS MSC in until it lodges firmly in the AS MLC.
CAUTION: Slide the AS MSC straight into the slot to avoid damaging the components on the bottom of the AS MSC. 3. Use one of the following methods to bring the AS MSC online: � Press the AS MSC offline/online button until the LED light turns green. � Issue the following CLI command:
user@host> request chassis pic fpc-slot fpc-slot pic-slot pic-slot online For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer.

399 The normal functioning status LED confirms that the AS MSC is online. You can also verify correct AS MSC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status. Figure 138: Installing an AS MSC
RELATED DOCUMENTATION MX480 Application Services Modular Storage Card Description | 167

400
Replacing an MX480 AS MXC
IN THIS SECTION Removing an MX480 AS MXC | 400 Installing an MX480 AS MXC | 402
Removing an MX480 AS MXC
AS MXCs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. When you remove an AS MXC, the router continues to function. The AS MXCs are located in the AS MLCs installed in the front of the router. An AS MXC weighs 1.4 lb (0.6 kg). To remove an AS MXC (see Figure 26): 1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface to receive the AS MXC. 2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 3. Use one of the following methods to take the AS MXC offline:
� Press its online/offline button. Use a narrow-ended tool that fits inside the opening that leads to the button. Press and hold the button until the AS MXC LED goes out (about 5 seconds).
� Issue the following CLI command:
user@host> request chassis pic fpc-slot fpc-slot pic-slot pic-slot offline For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer. 4. 5. Slide the AS MXC out of the AS MLC card carrier by pulling the handles, and place it in the electrostatic bag or on the antistatic mat.

401 6. If you are not reinstalling an AS MXC into the emptied AS MXC slot within a short time, install a
blank AS MXC panel over the slot to maintain proper airflow in the AS MLC card cage. Figure 139: Removing an AS MXC
SEE ALSO MX480 Application Services Modular Processing Card Description | 168

402
Installing an MX480 AS MXC
To install an AS MXC (see Figure 27): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Align the notches in the connector at the rear of the AS MXC with the notches in the AS MXC slot
(slot 1--the bottom slot in the AS MLC), and then slide the AS MXC in until it lodges firmly in the AS MLC.
CAUTION: Slide the AS MXC straight into the slot to avoid damaging the components on the bottom of the AS MXC. 3. Use one of the following methods to bring the AS MXC online: � Press the AS MXC offline/online button until the LED light turns green. � Issue the following CLI command:
user@host> request chassis pic fpc-slot fpc-slot pic-slot pic-slot online For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer.

403
The normal functioning status LED confirms that the AS MXC is online. You can also verify correct AS MXC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status command.
Figure 140: Installing an AS MXC

404
Maintaining Cables That Connect to MX480 DPCs, MPCs, MICs, or PICs
IN THIS SECTION Purpose | 404 Action | 404
Purpose
For optimum router performance, verify the condition of the cables that connect to the DPCs, MPCs, MICs, or PICs.
Action
On a regular basis: � Use the cable management brackets to support cables and prevent cables from dislodging or
developing stress points. � Place excess cable out of the way in the cable management brackets. Do not allow fastened loops of
cable to dangle from the connector or cable management brackets, because this stresses the cable at the fastening point. Putting fasteners on the loops helps to maintain their shape. � Keep the cable connections clean and free of dust and other particles, which can cause drops in the received power level. Always inspect cables and clean them if necessary before connecting an interface. � Label both ends of the cables to identify them. The following guidelines apply specifically to fiber-optic cables: � When you unplug a fiber-optic cable, always place a rubber safety plug over the transceiver on the faceplate and on the end of the cable. � Anchor fiber-optic cables to avoid stress on the connectors. Be sure to secure fiber-optic cables so that they do not support their own weight as they hang to the floor. Never let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector. � Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its bend radius. An arc smaller than a few inches can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose.

405
� Frequent plugging and unplugging of fiber-optic cable into and out of optical instruments can cause damage to the instruments that is expensive to repair. Instead, attach a short fiber extension to the optical equipment. Any wear and tear due to frequent plugging and unplugging is then absorbed by the short fiber extension, which is easy and inexpensive to replace.
� Keep fiber-optic cable connections clean. Small microdeposits of oil and dust in the canal of the transceiver or cable connector could cause loss of light, reducing signal power and possibly causing intermittent problems with the optical connection. To clean the transceivers, use an appropriate fiber-cleaning device, such as RIFOCS Fiber Optic Adaptor Cleaning Wands (part number 946). Follow the directions for the cleaning kit you use. After you clean an optical transceiver, make sure that the connector tip of the fiber-optic cable is clean. Use only an approved alcohol-free fiber-optic cable cleaning kit, such as the Opptex Cletop-S Fiber Cleaner. Follow the directions for the cleaning kit you use.
SEE ALSO Maintaining MX480 DPCs | 337 Maintaining MX480 MPCs | 376 Maintaining MX480 MICs | 365 Maintaining MX480 PICs | 384
Maintaining MX-SPC3 Services Card
IN THIS SECTION Maintaining MX-SPC3 Services Card | 406 Replacing an MX-SPC3 | 407

406
Maintaining MX-SPC3 Services Card
IN THIS SECTION Purpose | 406 Action | 406
Purpose
For optimum router performance, verify the condition of the MX-SPC3 Services Card. To maintain MXSPC3s cards, perform the following procedures regularly.
Action
On a regular basis: � Check the LEDs on the craft interface corresponding to the slot for each MX-SPC3. The green LED
labeled OK lights steadily when a MX-SPC3 is functioning normally. � Check the OK/FAIL LED on the MX-SPC3. If the MX-SPC3 detects a failure, the MX-SPC3 sends an
alarm message to the Routing Engine. � Issue the CLI show chassis fpc command to check the status of installed MX-SPC3s.
user@host> show chassis fpc For more detailed output, add the detail option.
user@host> show chassis fpc detail � Issue the CLI show chassis fpc pic-status command.
user@host> show chassis fpc pic-status For further description of the output from the command, see the CLI Explorer.

407
Replacing an MX-SPC3
IN THIS SECTION Removing an MX-SPC3 | 407 Installing an MX-SPC3 | 409
Removing an MX-SPC3
The MX-SPC3 installs horizontally in the front of the MX240 & MX480 routers and vertically in the MX960 router. The MX-SPC3s are hot-insertable and hot-removable and the router continues to function when you remove an MX-SPC3. A fully configured MX-SPC3 can weigh up to 18.35 lb (8.3 kg). Be prepared to accept its full weight. To remove an MX-SPC3: 1. Have ready a replacement MX-SPC3 or a blank panel and an antistatic mat for the MX-SPC3. Also
have ready rubber safety caps for transceivers. 2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 3. Label the cables connected to each port on the MX-SPC3 so that you can later reconnect the
cables to the correct ports. 4. Use one of the following methods to take the MX-SPC3 offline:
� Press and hold the corresponding online button on the craft interface. The green OK/FAIL LED next to the button begins to blink. Hold the button down until the LED goes off.
� Issue the following CLI command:
user@host>request chassis fpc slot slot-number offline For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer. 5. Disconnect the cables from the MX-SPC3. If the MX-SPC3 uses fiber-optic cable, immediately cover each transceiver and the end of each cable with a rubber safety cap.

408
LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or removing a cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light.
CAUTION: Avoid bending a fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose. 6. Arrange the disconnected cables in the cable manager to prevent the cables from developing stress points. 7. Simultaneously turn both the ejector handles counterclockwise to unseat the MX-SPC3. 8. Grasp the handles, and slide the MX-SPC3 straight out of the card cage halfway. 9. Place one hand around the front of the MX-SPC3 and the other hand under it to support it. Slide the MX-SPC3 completely out of the chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.
CAUTION: The weight of the MX-SPC3 is concentrated in the back end. Be prepared to accept the full weight--up to 18.35 lb (8.3 kg)--as you slide the MXSPC3 out of the chassis. When the MX-SPC3 is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles, bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight. Do not stack MX-SPC3s on top of one another after removal. Place each one individually in an electrostatic bag or on its own antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface. 10. If you are not reinstalling an MX-SPC3 into the emptied line card slots within a short time, install a blank panel over each slot to maintain proper airflow in the card cage.
CAUTION: After removing an MX-SPC3 from the chassis:

409
� Check the back panel connectors of the MX-SPC3 for damages. A damaged connector on the MX-SPC3 card can damage the chassis back plane.
� Wait for at least 30 seconds before reinserting the MX-SPC3 into the same slot or inserting it into a different slot.
Installing an MX-SPC3
The MX-SPC3 installs horizontally in the front of the MX240 & MX480 routers and vertically in the MX960 router. A fully configured MX-SPC3 can weigh up to 18.35 lb (8.3 kg). Be prepared to accept its full weight.
CAUTION: Before installing an MX-SPC3 into the chassis: � Check the back panel connectors of the MX-SPC3 for damages. A damaged
connector on the MX-SPC3 card can damage the chassis back plane.
� Wait for at least 30 seconds, before reinserting the MX-SPC3 into the same slot or inserting it into a different slot.
To install an MX-SPC3: 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Place the MX-SPC3 on an antistatic mat. 3. Locate the slot in the card cage in which you plan to install the MX-SPC3. 4. Verify that each fiber-optic transceiver is covered with a rubber safety cap. If it does not, cover the
transceiver with a safety cap. 5. Orient the MX-SPC3 so that the faceplate faces you. 6. Lift the MX-SPC3 into place, and carefully align first the bottom and then the top of the card with
the guides inside the card cage.
CAUTION: When the MX-SPC3 is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles, bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight.
7. Slide the MX-SPC3 all the way into the card cage until you feel resistance. 8. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them clockwise simultaneously until the MX-SPC3 is fully
seated. 9. If the MX-SPC3 uses fiber-optic cable, remove the rubber safety cap from each transceiver and
cable.

410
LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes. 10. Insert the appropriate cables into the cable connector ports on MX-SPC3. Secure the cables so that they are not supporting their own weight. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop, using the cable management system. Placing fasteners on a loop helps to maintain its shape.
CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cables hang free from the connector. Do not allow the fastened loops of a cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.
CAUTION: Avoid bending a fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose. 11. Use one of the following methods to bring the MX-SPC3 online: � Press and hold the corresponding MX-SPC3 online button on the craft interface until the green OK/FAIL LED next to the button lights steadily, in about 5 seconds. � Issue the following CLI command:
user@host>request chassis fpc slot slot-number online For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer.
CAUTION: After the OK/FAIL LED lights steadily, wait at least 30 seconds before removing the MX-SPC3 again, removing an MX-SPC3 from a different slot, or inserting an MX-SPC3 in a different slot.

411
Maintaining MX480 Power System Components
IN THIS SECTION Maintaining the MX480 Power Supplies | 411 Replacing an MX480 AC Power Supply | 412 Replacing an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord | 415 Replacing an MX480 DC Power Supply | 417 Replacing an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable | 422

Maintaining the MX480 Power Supplies
IN THIS SECTION Purpose | 411 Action | 411

Purpose
For optimum router performance, verify the condition of the power supplies.

Action
On a regular basis:

� PEM 0 status: State Temperature AC Input: DC Output

Online

Voltage(V) Current(A)

Power(W) 0

Load(%) 0

412

PEM 1 status: State Temperature AC Input: DC Output

Online

Voltage(V) Current(A)

Power(W) Load(%) 1062 42

� Make sure that the power and grounding cables are arranged so that they do not obstruct access to other router components.
� Routinely check the status LEDs on the power supply faceplates and the craft interface to determine if the power supplies are functioning normally.
� Check the red and yellow alarm LEDs on the craft interface. Power supply failure or removal triggers an alarm that causes one or both of the LEDs to light. You can display the associated error messages by issuing the following command:

user@host> show chassis alarms
� Periodically inspect the site to ensure that the grounding and power cables connected to the router are securely in place and that there is no moisture accumulating near the router.

Replacing an MX480 AC Power Supply

IN THIS SECTION Removing an MX480 AC Power Supply | 413

413
Installing an MX480 AC Power Supply | 414
Removing an MX480 AC Power Supply
Before you remove a power supply, be aware of the following:
NOTE: The minimum number of power supplies must be present in the router at all times.
CAUTION: To maintain proper cooling and prevent thermal shutdown of the operating power supply unit, each power supply slot must contain either a power supply or a blank panel. If you remove a power supply, you must install a replacement power supply or a blank panel shortly after the removal.
NOTE: After powering off a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning it back on.
To remove an AC power supply (see Figure 1): 1. Switch off the dedicated customer site circuit breaker for the power supply, and remove the power
cord from the AC power source. Follow the instructions for your site. 2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 3. Move the AC input switch next to the appliance inlet on the power supply to the off (O) position. 4. Remove the power cord from the power supply. 5. Unscrew the captive screws on the bottom edge of the power supply.

414 6. Pull the power supply straight out of the chassis.
Figure 141: Removing an AC Power Supply
Installing an MX480 AC Power Supply
To install an AC power supply (see Figure 2): 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Move the AC input switch next to the appliance inlet on the power supply to the off (O) position. 3. Using both hands, slide the power supply straight into the chassis until the power supply is fully
seated in the chassis slot. The power supply faceplate should be flush with any adjacent power supply faceplate or blank installed in the power supply slot. 4. Tighten both captive screws at the bottom of the power supply. 5. Attach the power cord to the power supply. 6. Route the power cord along the cable restraint toward the left or right corner of the chassis. If needed to hold the power cord in place, thread plastic cable ties, which you must provide, through the openings on the cable restraint. 7. Attach the power cord to the AC power source, and switch on the dedicated customer site circuit breaker for the power supply. Follow the ESD and connection instructions for your site.

415 8. Move the AC input switch next to the appliance inlet on the power supply to the on ( | ) position and
observe the status LEDs on the power supply faceplate. If the power supply is correctly installed and functioning normally, the AC OK and DC OK LEDs light steadily, and the PS FAIL LED is not lit. Figure 142: Installing an AC Power Supply in an MX480 Router
Replacing an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord
IN THIS SECTION Disconnecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord | 416 Connecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord | 416

416
Disconnecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord
To disconnect the AC power cord:
1. Switch off the dedicated customer site circuit breaker for the power supply, and remove the power cord from the AC power source. Follow the instructions for your site.
2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD grounding point.
3. Move the AC input switch next to the appliance inlet on the power supply to the off (O) position. 4. Remove the power cord from the power supply.
Connecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord
To connect the AC power cord:
1. Locate a replacement power cord with the type of plug appropriate for your geographical location (see "AC Power Cord Specifications for the MX480 Router" on page 33).
2. Connect the power cord to the power supply. 3. Route the power cord along the cable restraint toward the left or right corner of the chassis. If
needed to hold the power cord in place, thread plastic cable ties, which you must provide, through the openings on the cable restraint. 4. Verify that the power cord does not block the air exhaust and access to router components, or drape where people could trip on it. 5. Attach the power cord to the AC power source, and switch on the dedicated customer site circuit breaker for the power supply. Follow the ESD and connection instructions for your site. 6. Switch the AC input switch on the each power supply to the on (--) position and observe the status LEDs on the power supply faceplate. If the power supply is correctly installed and functioning normally, the AC OK and DC OK LEDs light steadily, and the PS FAIL LED is not lit.
SEE ALSO
Replacing an MX480 AC Power Supply | 412 AC Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router | 31

417
Replacing an MX480 DC Power Supply
IN THIS SECTION Removing an MX480 DC Power Supply | 417 Installing an MX480 DC Power Supply | 418
Removing an MX480 DC Power Supply
Before you remove a power supply, be aware of the following:
NOTE: The minimum number of power supplies must be present in the router at all times.
WARNING: Before performing DC power procedures, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the off position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the off position.
CAUTION: To maintain proper cooling and prevent thermal shutdown of the operating power supply unit, each power supply slot must contain either a power supply or a blank panel. If you remove a power supply, you must install a replacement power supply or a blank panel shortly after the removal.
NOTE: After powering off a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning it back on.
To remove a DC power supply (see Figure 3): 1. Switch off the dedicated customer site circuit breaker for the power supply being removed. Follow
your site's procedures for ESD. 2. Make sure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that there is no
chance that the cables might become active during the removal process. 3. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point.

418 4. Move the DC circuit breaker on the DC power supply faceplate to the off (O) position. 5. Remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal studs on the faceplate. 6. Remove the nut and washer from each of the terminal studs. (Use a 7/16-in. [11 mm] nut driver or
socket wrench.) 7. Remove the cable lugs from the terminal studs. 8. Loosen the captive screws on the bottom edge of the power supply faceplate. 9. Carefully move the power cables out of the way. 10. Pull the power supply straight out of the chassis. Figure 143: Removing a DC Power Supply from the Router
Installing an MX480 DC Power Supply
WARNING: Before performing DC power procedures, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the off position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the off position. To install a DC power supply (see Figure 4): 1. Ensure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that there is no chance that the cable leads might become active during installation.

419
2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD grounding point.
3. Move the DC circuit breaker on the power supply faceplate to the off (O) position. 4. Using both hands, slide the power supply straight into the chassis until the power supply is fully
seated in the chassis slot. The power supply faceplate should be flush with any adjacent power supply faceplate or blank installed in the power supply slot. 5. Tighten the captive screws on the lower edge of the power supply faceplate. 6. Remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal studs on the faceplate. 7. Remove the nut and washer from each of the terminal studs. 8. Secure each power cable lug to the terminal studs, first with the flat washer, then with the split washer, and then with the nut (see Figure 5). Apply between 23 lb-in. (2.6 Nm) and 25 lb-in. (2.8 Nm) of torque to each nut. Do not overtighten the nut. (Use a 7/16-in. [11 mm] torquecontrolled driver or socket wrench.) a. Secure the positive (+) DC source power cable lug to the RTN (return) terminal.
b. Secure the negative (�) DC source power cable lug to the �48V (input) terminal.
CAUTION: Ensure that each power cable lug seats flush against the surface of the terminal block as you are tightening the nuts. Ensure that each nut is properly threaded onto the terminal stud. The nut should be able to spin freely with your fingers when it is first placed onto the terminal stud. Applying installation torque to the nut when improperly threaded may result in damage to the terminal stud.
CAUTION: The maximum torque rating of the terminal studs on the DC power supply is 36 lb-in. (4.0 Nm). The terminal studs may be damaged if excessive torque is applied. Use only a torque-controlled driver or socket wrench to tighten nuts on the DC power supply terminal studs.
CAUTION: You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity. The power source cables might be labeled (+) and (�) to indicate their polarity. There is no standard color coding for DC power cables. The color coding used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on each power supply.

420
NOTE: The DC power supplies in PEM0 and PEM1 must be powered by dedicated power feeds derived from feed A, and the DC power supplies in PEM2 and PEM3 must be powered by dedicated power feeds derived from feed B. This configuration provides the commonly deployed A/B feed redundancy for the system.
NOTE: For information about connecting to DC power sources, see "DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router" on page 42.
9. Replace the clear plastic cover over the terminal studs on the faceplate. 10. Route the power cables along the cable restraint toward the left or right corner of the chassis. If
needed to hold the power cables in place, thread plastic cable ties, which you must provide, through the openings on the cable restraint. 11. Verify that the power cabling is correct, that the cables are not touching or blocking access to router components, and that they do not drape where people could trip on them. 12. Switch on the dedicated customer site circuit breakers. Follow your site's procedures for safety and ESD. Verify that the INPUT OK LED on the power supply is lit green. 13. On each of the DC power supplies, switch the DC circuit breaker to the center position before moving it to the on (--) position.
NOTE: The circuit breaker may bounce back to the off (O) position if you move the breaker too quickly.
Observe the status LEDs on the power supply faceplate. If the power supply is correctly installed and functioning normally, the PWR OK, BRKR ON, and INPUT OK LEDs light green steadily.
NOTE: If more than one power supply is being installed, turn on all power supplies at the same time.

421 NOTE: An SCB must be present for the PWR OK LED to go on. Figure 144: Installing a DC Power Supply in the Router

422 Figure 145: Connecting DC Power to the Router
RELATED DOCUMENTATION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router | 499 MX480 DC Power Supply Description | 39
Replacing an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable
IN THIS SECTION Disconnecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable | 423 Connecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable | 423

423
Disconnecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable
WARNING: Before performing DC power procedures, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the off position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the off position.
To disconnect a power cable for a DC power supply:
1. Switch off the dedicated customer site circuit breaker for the power supply being removed. Follow your site's procedures for ESD.
2. Make sure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that there is no chance that the cables might become active during the removal process.
3. Verify that the INPUT OK LED on the power supply is not lit. 4. Remove the power cable from the external DC power source. 5. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 6. Move the DC circuit breaker on the power supply faceplate to the off (O)position. 7. Remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal studs on the faceplate. 8. Remove the nut and washer from each of the terminal studs. (Use a 7/16-in. [11 mm] nut driver or
socket wrench.) 9. Remove the cable lug from the terminal studs. 10. Remove the power cable from the cable restraint, and then carefully move the cable out of the way.
Connecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable
WARNING: Before performing DC power procedures, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the off position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the off position.
To connect a power cable for a DC power supply:
1. Locate a replacement power cable that meets the specifications defined in "DC Power Cable Specifications for the MX480 Router" on page 46.
2. Verify that a licensed electrician has attached a cable lug to the replacement power cable. 3. Verify that the INPUT OK LED is off. 4. Secure the power cable lug to the terminal studs, first with the flat washer, then with the nut. Apply
between 23 lb-in. (2.6 Nm) and 25 lb-in. (2.8 Nm) of torque to each nut (see Figure 6). Do not overtighten the nut. (Use a 7/16-in. [11 mm] torque-controlled driver or socket wrench.)

424
CAUTION: Ensure that each power cable lug seats flush against the surface of the terminal block as you are tightening the nuts. Ensure that each nut is properly threaded onto the terminal stud. The nut should be able to spin freely with your fingers when it is first placed onto the terminal stud. Applying installation torque to the nut when improperly threaded may result in damage to the terminal stud.
CAUTION: The maximum torque rating of the terminal studs on the DC power supply is 36 lb-in. (4.0 Nm). The terminal studs may be damaged if excessive torque is applied. Use only a torque-controlled driver or socket wrench to tighten nuts on the DC power supply terminal studs. Figure 146: Connecting Power Cables to the DC Power Supply
5. Route the power cable along the cable restraint toward the left or right corner of the chassis. If needed, thread plastic cable ties, which you must provide, through the openings on the cable restraint to hold the power cable in place.
6. Verify that the DC power cable is connected correctly, that it does not touch or block access to router components, and that it does not drape where people could trip on it.

425
7. Replace the clear plastic cover over the terminal studs on the faceplate. 8. Attach the power cable to the DC power source. 9. Turn on the dedicated customer site circuit breaker to the power supply. 10. On each of the DC power supplies, switch the DC circuit breaker to the center position before
moving it to the on (--) position.
NOTE: The circuit breaker may bounce back to the off (O) position if you move the breaker too quickly.
Observe the status LEDs on the power supply faceplate. If the power supply is correctly installed and functioning normally, the PWR OK, BRKR ON, and INPUT OK LEDs light green steadily.
Maintaining MX480 SFP and XFP Transceivers
IN THIS SECTION Replacing an SFP or XFP Transceiver on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC | 425
Replacing an SFP or XFP Transceiver on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC
IN THIS SECTION Removing an SFP or XFP Transceiver from an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC | 425 Installing an SFP or XFP Transceiver into an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC | 427
Removing an SFP or XFP Transceiver from an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC
Removing an SFP or XFP does not interrupt DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC functioning, but the removed SFP or XFP no longer receives or transmits data.

426
To remove an SFP or XFP transceiver (see Figure 1): 1. Have ready a replacement transceiver or a transceiver slot plug, an antistatic mat, and a rubber safety
cap for the transceiver. 2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 3. Label the cables connected to the transceiver so that you can reconnect them correctly later.
LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes. 4. Remove the cable connector from the transceiver. 5. Pull the ejector handle out from the transceiver to unlock the transceiver.
CAUTION: Make sure that you open the ejector handle completely until you hear it click. This prevents damage to the transceiver. Use needlenose pliers to pull the ejector handle out from the transceiver. 6. Grasp the transceiver ejector handle, and pull the transceiver approximately 0.5 in. (1.3 cm) out of the DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC. 7. Using your fingers, grasp the body of the transceiver, and pull it the rest of the way out of the DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC.
Figure 147: Removing SFPs or XFPs
8. Place a rubber safety cap over the transceiver. 9. Place the removed transceiver on an antistatic mat or in an electrostatic bag.

427
CAUTION: After removing a transceiver from the chassis, wait at least 30 seconds before reinserting it or inserting a transceiver into a different slot.
Installing an SFP or XFP Transceiver into an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC
To install an SFP or XFP: 1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD
grounding point. 2. Take each transceiver to be installed out of its electrostatic bag, and identify the slot on the
component where it will be installed. 3. Verify that each transceiver is covered by a rubber safety cap. If it is not, cover the transceiver with a
safety cap. 4. Carefully align the transceiver with the slots in the component. The connectors should face the
component. 5. Slide the transceiver until the connector is seated in the component slot. If you are unable to fully
insert the transceiver, make sure the connector is facing the right way. 6. Close the ejector handle of the transceiver. 7. Remove the rubber safety cap from the transceiver and the end of the cable. Insert the cable into the
transceiver.
LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes. 8. Verify that the status LEDs on the component faceplate indicate that the SFP or XFP is functioning correctly. For more information about the component LEDs, see the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
Maintaining MX480 Switch Control Boards
IN THIS SECTION Replacing an MX480 Switch Control Board | 428

428
Upgrading an MX480 to Use the SCBE-MX | 432 Upgrading an MX480 to Use the SCBE2-MX | 441 Upgrading an MX240, MX480, or MX960 Router to Use the SCBE3-MX | 447
Replacing an MX480 Switch Control Board
IN THIS SECTION Removing an MX480 SCB-MX | 428 Installing an MX480 Switch Control Board | 429
Before replacing a Switch Control Board (SCB), read the guidelines in Operating and Positioning the MX480 SCB Ejectors.
Removing an MX480 SCB-MX
1. Take the host subsystem offline. 2. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface. 3. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis. 4. Rotate the ejector handles simultaneously counterclockwise to unseat the Switch Control Board. 5. Grasp the ejector handles, and slide the Switch Control Board about halfway out of the chassis. 6. Place one hand underneath the Switch Control Board to support it, and slide it completely out of the
chassis. 7. Place the Switch Control Board on the antistatic mat.

429 8. If you are not replacing the Switch Control Board now, install a blank panel over the empty slot. Figure 148: Removing a Switch Control Board from the MX480
Installing an MX480 Switch Control Board
1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the other end of the strap to an ESD grounding point.
2. Carefully align the sides of the Switch Control Board with the guides inside the chassis. 3. Slide the Switch Control Board into the chassis until you feel resistance, carefully ensuring that it is
correctly aligned. 4. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them simultaneously clockwise until the Switch Control Board
is fully seated.

430 5. Place the ejector handles in the proper position, horizontally and toward the center of the board.
Figure 149: Installing a Switch Control Board in the MX480

6. Check the LEDs on the Switch Control Board faceplate to verify that it is functioning normally.
� The green OK/FAIL LED should light steadily a few minutes after the Switch Control Board is installed.
� If the OK/FAIL LED is red, remove and install the Switch Control Board again. If the OK/FAIL LED still lights steadily, the Switch Control Board is not functioning properly. Contact your customer support representative.
7. Check the status of the Switch Control Board using the show chassis environment cb command:

user@host> show chassis environment cb

CB 0 status:

State

Online Master

Temperature

25 degrees C / 77 degrees F

Power 1

1.2 V

1198 mV

1.5 V

1508 mV

1.8 V

1830 mV

2.5 V

5059 mV

3.3 V

6593 mV

5.0 V

5111 mV

12.0 V

12181 mV

1.25 V

1250 mV

3.3 V SM3

6587 mV

431

5 V RE 12 V RE Power 2 11.3 V bias PEM 4.6 V bias MidPlane 11.3 V bias FPD 11.3 V bias POE 0 11.3 V bias POE 1 Bus Revision FPGA Revision CB 1 status: State Temperature Power 1 1.2 V 1.5 V 1.8 V 2.5 V 3.3 V 5.0 V 12.0 V 1.25 V 3.3 V SM3 5 V RE 12 V RE Power 2 11.3 V bias PEM 4.6 V bias MidPlane 11.3 V bias FPD 11.3 V bias POE 0 11.3 V bias POE 1 Bus Revision FPGA Revision

5078 mV 12026 mV
11253 mV 4827 mV 11408 mV 11446 mV 11408 mV 6 0
Online Standby 26 degrees C / 78 degrees F
1211 mV 1517 mV 1817 mV 2507 mV 3312 mV 5136 mV 12142 mV 1260 mV 3306 mV 5085 mV 11968 mV
11369 mV 4814 mV 11427 mV 11350 mV 11330 mV 39 1

RELATED DOCUMENTATION
Operating and Positioning the MX480 SCB Ejectors Effect of Taking the MX480 Host Subsystem Offline Taking an MX480 Host Subsystem Offline

432
Upgrading an MX480 to Use the SCBE-MX
IN THIS SECTION Prepare for the Upgrade | 432 Upgrade the SCB-MX in the Backup Routing Engine | 434 Upgrade the MX480 SCB-MX in the Primary Routing Engine | 436 Complete the SCBE-MX Upgrade | 438
This topic describes how to upgrade your MX960, MX480, or MX240 router to use the SCBE-MX without taking the router offline. This "in-service" upgrade only works for MX routers with DPC, MSDPC, MPC1, MPC2, or MPC3 line cards. If your MX router has another type of line card, you'll need to take the router offline before you do the upgrade.
NOTE: Junos OS does not support in-service upgrades to the SCBE-MX on routers with an MXMPC3E-3D or MX-MPC3-3D MPC. If your MX router has these MPCs, you'll need to shutdown the system before you do the upgrade. An in-service upgrade can result in service disruption.
Prepare for the Upgrade
Before you do the upgrade, open a telnet session to the primary Routing Engine CLI operational mode and issue the configure exclusive command. This command locks the configuration to prevent accidental changes during the upgrade process.
TIP: To prevent traffic loss during the upgrade process, we recommend that you operate the line cards at 50% line rate. This 50% limit must be maintained per PFE on each line card.
To prepare the MX480 router for the Enhanced MX Switch Control Board (SCBE-MX) upgrade:

433
1. Verify that the system runs Junos OS Release 11.4 or later by issuing the show version command on the primary router.
user@host> show version Model: mx480 Junos Base OS Software Suite [11.4-20110530];

NOTE: The MX SCBE-MX is supported only in Junos OS Release 11.4 or later.
The latest software ensures a healthy system--that is, Routing Engines, control boards, and FPCs-- before the upgrade. 2. Verify that SCB-MX boards are installed:

user@host> show chassis hardware

Item Version

Part Number

CB0 REV 07

710-021523

CB1 REV 07

710-021523

Serial Number ABBC8281 ABBC8323

Description MX SCB MX SCB

SCB-MX details are displayed as above, along with other hardware components. The MX480 router has only two SCB-MXs and each SCB-MX has four fabric planes. 3. Establish console connections to both Routing Engines. You can use a telnet session to connect to the router console by issuing the <router name>-con command. For example, if the router name is juniper, you can connect to RE0 and RE1 consoles by issuing the telnet juniper-con and telnet juniper1con commands. 4. Ensure that graceful switchover (GRES), commit synchronize (required for nonstop routing), and nonstop routing (NSR) are enabled or configured by running the set chassis redundancy gracefulswitchover, set system commit synchronize, set routing-options nonstop-routing commands.
NOTE: These commands are mandatory for this upgrade and may be removed, if desired, after the upgrade.

434

5. Set the upgrade flag on, and start the SCB-MX upgrade by issuing the set chassis state cb-upgrade on command.

user@host# configure user@host# set chassis state cb-upgrade on user@host# commit
6. Determine the order to replace the existing SCB-MXs with upgraded ones. SCB 0 is associated with RE0, and SCB 1 is associated with RE1.
NOTE: Do not add or remove any router hardware during the upgrade procedure.

Upgrade the SCB-MX in the Backup Routing Engine

TIP: The MX480 has two slots for the SCB-MX--that is, SCB 0 and SCB 1--and these correspond to RE0 and RE1 respectively, where SCB 1 is the first SCB-MX.
To upgrade the SCB-MX in the backup Routing Engine:
1. Power down the backup Routing Engine from the primary Routing Engine by issuing the request system power-off other-routing-engine command.
2. Verify that the Routing Engine is powered down by issuing the show chassis routing-engine 1 command. The slot of the Routing Engine may be 0 or 1, and is shown as 1 in this example:

user@host> show chassis routing-engine 1 Routing Engine Status: Slot 1: Current State Present
Ensure that the Current State is Present, which indicates that the Routing Engine is offline. 3. Take the fabric plane offline by issuing the request chassis fabric plane 4 offline command. SCB 1 has
four fabric planes numbered, 4, 5, 6, and 7. 4. Verify that the fabric plane 4 is offline by issuing the show chassis fabric summary command.

user@host> show chassis fabric summary

Plane

State

Uptime

435

Offline

Online

1 hour, 15 minutes, 35 seconds

5. Take the remaining fabric planes offline by issuing the request chassis fabric plane 5/6/7 offline command--that is, by changing the fabric plane number each time. Verify that the fabric planes are offline by issuing the command given in Step 2.
6. Take the SCB-MX in slot 1 offline by issuing the request chassis cb offline slot 1 command. 7. Verify that SCB-MX is offline:

user@host> show chassis environment cb 1

CB 1 status:

State

Offline

Power 1

Disabled

Power 2

Disabled

8. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis.
9. Remove and replace the SCB-MX in slot 1 on the router with the SCBE-MX. Use the replacement procedure described in "Replacing an MX480 Switch Control Board" on page 428.
10. Verify that the installation is successful and the SCBE-MX is online:

user@host> show chassis environment cb 1

CB 1 status

State

Online

Temperature 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F

11. Verify that the fabric planes come online correctly:

user@host> show chassis fabric summary Plane State Uptime 4 Online 2 minutes, 25 seconds 5 Online 2 minutes, 15 seconds 6 Online 2 minutes, 3 seconds 7 Online 1 minute, 49 seconds
12. Verify that the backup Routing Engine is back online:

user@host> show chassis routing-engine 1 Routing Engine Status:

436

Slot 1: Current State
13. Verify the alarms:

Backup

user@host> show chassis alarms

Alarm Time

Class Description

2011-06-01 13:26:56 EDT Major CB fabrics are of mixed types

As only one SCB-MX has been upgraded, the alarm indicates that the SCB-MXs are of mixed type. This alarm is cleared after all the control boards are upgraded.

Upgrade the MX480 SCB-MX in the Primary Routing Engine

1. Issue the request chassis routing-engine master switch command so that the backup RE becomes the primary RE. This ensures a Graceful RE Switchover (GRES) to gracefully switch between the primary and backup Routing Engines.
2. Log in to the new primary Routing Engine after the switchover.
3. Switch the configuration mode to ensure that you are still in configure exclusive mode by issuing the exit command and then the configure exclusive command, from the old primary Routing Engine.
4. Log in to the current primary Routing Engine again and issue the configure exclusive command. 5. Power down the backup Routing Engine from the primary Routing Engine by issuing the request
system power-off other-routing-engine command. 6. Issue the show chassis routing-engine 0 command to verify that the Routing Engine is powered down.

user@host> show chassis routing-engine 0 Routing Engine Status: Slot 0: Current State Present
Verify that the Current State is Present, which indicates that the Routing Engine is offline. 7. Take the first fabric plane of the backup Routing Engine offline by issuing the request chassis fabric
plane 0 offline command. SCB0 has four fabric planes numbered, 0, 1, 2, and 3. 8. Issue the show chassis fabric summary command to verify that the fabric plane is offline.

user@host> show chassis fabric summary Plane State Uptime 0 Offline 1 Online 3 minutes, 45 seconds

437

Verify that the state of plane 0 is Offline.
9. Take the remaining fabric planes offline by issuing the request chassis fabric plane 1/2/3 offline command--that is, by changing the fabric plane number each time. Verify that the fabric planes are offline by issuing the command given in Step 4.
10. Take the SCB-MX in slot 0 offline by issuing the request chassis cb offline slot 0 command. 11. Verify that the control board is offline:

user@host> show chassis environment cb 0

CB 0 status:

State

Offline

Power 1

Disabled

Power 2

Disabled

12. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis.
13. Remove and replace the offline SCB-MX on the router with the SCBE-MX. Use the replacement procedure described in "Replacing an MX480 Switch Control Board" on page 428.
14. Verify that the installation is successful and SCB 0 is online by issuing the show chassis environment cb 0 command:

user@host> show chassis environment cb 0

CB 0 status

State

Online

Temperature 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F

Other details, such as power, are also displayed along with the state.
15. Verify that the fabric planes come online correctly by issuing the show chassis fabric summary command:

user@host> show chassis fabric summary Plane State Uptime 0 Online 2 minutes, 5 seconds 1 Online 1 minute, 55 seconds 2 Online 1 minute, 43 seconds 3 Online 1 minute, 33 seconds

438

16. Verify that the backup Routing Engine is back online by issuing the show chassis routing-engine 0 command:

user@host> show chassis routing-engine 0

Routing Engine Status:

Slot 0:

Current State

Backup

17. Verify the alarms by issuing the show chassis alarms command:

user@host> show chassis alarms Alarm Time Class Description 2011-06-01 13:26:56 EDT Major CB fabric links require upgrade/training 2011-06-01 12:10:41 EDT Major Require a fan tray upgrade
The major alarm has changed from CB fabrics are of mixed types to CB fabric links require upgrade/ training, as a SCB-MX requires training to change the link speed from 3G to 6G for the SCBE-MX. This alarm is displayed until the 3G to 6G link transition is completed.
Complete the SCBE-MX Upgrade
1. Verify if there are any MPCs running at 3G instead of 6G:

user@host> request chassis fabric upgrade-bandwidth info Slot State 0 Upgrade not supported 1 Needs upgrade 2 Empty 3 Empty 4 Empty 5 Empty
In this example, the results indicate that slot 0 does not support the upgrade and slot 1 needs to be upgraded.
NOTE: The SCBE-MX line card supports only DPC, MS-DPC, MPC1, MPC2, and MPC3 line cards for the upgrade-bandwidthcommand. If line cards that do not support the upgradebandwidthcommand are present in the chassis during the SCB-MX to SCBE-MX upgrade, the

439
request chassis fabric upgrade-bandwidth commands will return Upgrade not supported for the slot(s) that contain the unsupported line card(s).
2. Issue the request chassis fabric upgrade-bandwidth fpc all command to upgrade the bandwidth of all MPCs. If you want to control the MPC line card upgrade, go to Step 3.
CAUTION: Use this command only if you are not concerned with the slot upgrade order or if only one old MPC is present in the chassis. Running this command may result in a loss of traffic across the MPC. Using this method may increase the traffic loss, because it does not consider any redundancy or graceful switchover strategies that you may have configured on the system.
3. Issue the request chassis fabric upgrade-bandwidth fpc slot 1 command to upgrade the MPC in slot 1. 4. Verify that the MPC is upgraded:
user@host> request chassis fabric upgrade-bandwidth info Slot State 0 Upgrade not supported 1 Upgraded 2 Empty
5. Verify the fabric plane state for all MPCs:
user@host> show chassis fabric summary Plane State Uptime 0 Spare 21 seconds 1 Spare 12 seconds 2 Online 12 minutes 3 Online 12 minutes 4 Online 30 minutes 5 Online 30 minutes
6. Verify the state of the MPCs:
user@host> show chassis fabric fpcs FPC 1 PFE #0
Plane 0: Links ok Plane 1: Links ok

440

Plane 2: Plane enabled Plane 3: Plane enabled Plane 4: Plane enabled Plane 5: Plane enabled PFE #1 Plane 0: Links ok Plane 1: Links ok Plane 2: Plane enabled Plane 3: Plane enabled Plane 4: Plane enabled Plane 5: Plane enabled PFE #2 Plane 0: Links ok Plane 1: Links ok Plane 2: Plane enabled Plane 3: Plane enabled Plane 4: Plane enabled Plane 5: Plane enabled PFE #3 Plane 0: Links ok Plane 1: Links ok Plane 2: Plane enabled Plane 3: Plane enabled Plane 4: Plane enabled Plane 5: Plane enabled
Fabric plane details of all MPCs are also displayed.
7. Verify if the show chassis fabric summary command output shows fabric planes in the 'check' state. This indicates that the fabric plane has an error. You can try to recover the fabric plane to normal operation by issuing the request chassis fabric plane <#> offline command, followed by the request chassis fabric plane <#> online command, where <#> equals the fabric plane in error.
NOTE: After you issue the request chassis fabric plane <#> offline and request chassis fabric plane <#> online commands, issue the show chassis fabric summary command to verify that the fabric plane errors are rectified and to verify the current state of the fabric planes.
8. Verify if there are any major alarms:

user@host> show chassis alarms

Alarm Time

Class Description

441

2011-06-01 13:37:43 EDT 2011-06-01 13:37:26 EDT

Minor Minor

Require a fan tray upgrade Backup RE Active

In this example, the major alarms are no longer displayed, and the upgrade is successfully completed.
9. Disable the upgrade configuration by issuing the set chassis state cb-upgrade off command and then the commit command.
10. You can delete that command by issuing the delete chassis state cb-upgrade command and then the commit command.

WARNING: Deleting the chassis state cb-upgrade on configuration before disabling the SCB-MX upgrade using the set chassis state cb-upgrade off command can cause unexpected errors in the fabric.
11. Verify the SCBE-MXs are installed by issuing the show chassis hardware command:

user@host> show chassis hardware

Item Version Part Number Serial Number Description

CB0 REV 02 750-031391 YE8505

Enhanced MX SCB

CB1 REV 07 710-031391 YL6769

Enhanced MX SCB

SEE ALSO SCBE-MX Description
Upgrading an MX480 to Use the SCBE2-MX
IN THIS SECTION Prepare the MX480 Router for the SCBE2-MX Upgrade | 442 Power Off the MX480 Router | 443 Remove the MX480 Routing Engine | 443

442
Install the MX480 Routing Engine into the SCBE2-MX | 444 Power On the MX480 Router | 444 Complete the SCBE2-MX Upgrade | 445
Consider the following scenarios when upgrading an MX480 SCB-MX or SCBE-MX to use the SCBE2MX: Scenario 1: SCBE2-MX; Routing Engine (RE) with Junos OS Release 13.3R1 or later installed. � Replace the SCB-MXs. Ensure that you replace the SCB-MXs at the same time. � Ensure that Enhanced IP or Enhanced Ethernet Network Services mode is configured before you
power on the router. Scenario 2: SCB-MX or SCBE-MX; existing Routing Engine with a Junos OS Release 13.3R1 or earlier installed. � Upgrade the Routing Engine (RE0 and RE1) software to Junos OS Release 13.3 or later. � Configure Enhanced IP or Enhanced Ethernet Network Services mode. � Replace the SCB-MXs. Ensure that you replace the SCB-MXs at the same time. Scenario 3: Failed SCB-MX or SCBE-MX; Routing Engine with a Junos OS Release 13.3R1 or earlier installed. � Upgrade the software on the Routing Engine hosting the failed SCB-MX or SCBE-MX with Junos OS
Release 13.3R1 or later. � Replace the SCB-MXs. Ensure that you replace the SCB-MXs at the same time. � Upgrade the software on the Routing Engine hosting the SCBE2-MX with Junos OS Release 13.3R1
or later. � Configure Enhanced IP or Enhanced Ethernet Network Services mode. To upgrade the MX480 to use the SCBE2-MX, perform the following steps:
NOTE: You cannot upgrade to SCBE2-MX without powering off the MX480 router.
Prepare the MX480 Router for the SCBE2-MX Upgrade

443
Verify that the system runs Junos OS Release 13.3 or later by issuing the show version command on the primary router.
user@host> show version Model: mx480 Junos Base OS Software Suite [13.3-yyyymmdd]; ...
NOTE: The SCBE2-MX is supported only on: � Junos OS Release 13.3 or later � Network Services Mode: Enhanced-IP
The latest software ensures a healthy system--that is, a system that comprises Routing Engines, control boards, and FPCs--before the upgrade. For information about how to verify and upgrade the Junos OS, see the Junos OS Installation and Upgrade Guide.
Power Off the MX480 Router
NOTE: After turning off the power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning it back on.
1. On the external management device connected to the Routing Engine, issue the request system halt both-routing-engines operational mode command. This command shuts down the Routing Engines cleanly, so that their state information is preserved. (If the router contains only one Routing Engine, issue the request system halt command.)
user@host> request system halt both-routing-engines 2. Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system has halted. 3. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to
one of the ESD points on the chassis. 4. Move the AC input switch on the chassis above the AC power supply or the DC circuit breaker on
each DC power supply faceplate to the off (O) position.
Remove the MX480 Routing Engine

444
1. Remove the cables connected to the Routing Engine. 2. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface. 3. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to
one of the ESD points on the chassis. 4. Loosen the captive screws on the top and bottom of the Routing Engine. 5. Flip the ejector handles outward to unseat the Routing Engine. 6. Grasp the Routing Engine by the ejector handles, and slide it about halfway out of the chassis. 7. Place one hand underneath the Routing Engine to support it, and slide it completely out of the
chassis. 8. Place the Routing Engine on the antistatic mat.
Install the MX480 Routing Engine into the SCBE2-MX
1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis.
2. Ensure that the ejector handles are not in the locked position. If necessary, flip the ejector handles outward.
3. Place one hand underneath the Routing Engine to support it. 4. Carefully align the sides of the Routing Engine with the guides inside the opening on the SCBE2-MX. 5. Slide the Routing Engine into the SCBE2-MX until you feel resistance and then press the faceplate of
the Routing Engine until it engages the connectors. 6. Press both of the ejector handles inward to seat the Routing Engine. 7. Tighten the captive screws on the top and bottom of the Routing Engine. 8. Connect the management device cables to the Routing Engine.
Power On the MX480 Router
1. Verify that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis. 2. Verify that each AC power cord is securely inserted into its appliance inlet. 3. Verify that an external management device is connected to one of the Routing Engine ports (AUX,
CONSOLE, or ETHERNET). 4. Turn on the power to the external management device. 5. Switch on the dedicated customer-site circuit breakers. Follow the ESD and safety instructions for
your site. 6. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis. 7. Move the AC input switch on the chassis above the AC power supply or the DC circuit breaker on
each DC power-supply faceplate to the off (--) position.

445

8. Check that the AC or the DC power supply is correctly installed and functioning normally. Verify that the AC OK and DC OK LEDs light steadily, and the PS FAIL LED is not lit.
NOTE: After a power supply is powered on, it can take up to 60 seconds for status indicators --such as the status LEDs on the power supply and the show chassis command display--to indicate that the power supply is functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear during the first 60 seconds.
If any of the status LEDs indicates that the power supply is not functioning normally, repeat the installation and cabling procedures. 9. On the external management device connected to the Routing Engine, monitor the startup process to verify that the system has booted properly.
NOTE: If the system is completely powered off when you power on the power supply, the Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence. Normally, the router boots from the Junos OS on the CompactFlash card. After turning on a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning it off.

Complete the SCBE2-MX Upgrade
1. Verify that the installation is successful and the SCBE2-MX is online by issuing the show chassis environment cb command:

user@host> show chassis environment cb 0

CB 0 status

State

Online

Temperature 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F

...

user@host> show chassis environment cb 1

CB 1 status

State

Online

Temperature 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F

...

Other details, such as, temperature, power, etc are also displayed along with the state.

446

2. Verify that the fabric planes come online correctly by issuing the show chassis fabric summary command:

user@host> show chassis fabric summary

Plane State Uptime

Online 2 days, 19 hours, 10 minutes, 9 seconds

...

3. Verify that the backup Routing Engine is back online by issuing the show chassis routing-engine 1 command:

user@host> show chassis routing-engine 1

Routing Engine Status:

Slot 1:

Current State

Backup

...

4. Verify the SCBE2-MXs before you finish by issuing the show chassis hardware command:

user@host> show chassis hardware

Hardware inventory:

Item

Version Part number

CB 0

REV 08 750-048307

CB 1

REV 08 750-048307

...

Serial number CABC9829 CABC9828

Description Enhanced MX SCB 2 Enhanced MX SCB 2

As shown in the example, the MX480 now has SCBE2-MXs.